SlideShare a Scribd company logo
1. Describe the rational for constructing a new building to be
water and energy efficient?
2. Can this rationale be applied to an existing building and if so
how?
Tip: Please remember to add a subject line to your post. Use
descriptive subject lines for your posts; some find it easier to
write the subject line after writing the post.
Submit your response to the discussion board in a 300-500 word
narrative. Your response should clearly relate to the aspect
of both questions and an understanding of the required
readings. Be sure to apply the concepts you've learned in a
meaningful way.
Afterwards, submit two-three 100-200 word responses to your
classmates’ postings. Your response should explore ideas and
provide constructive responses. Be sure to interact with all of
your classmates during the term.
In total, you should have a minimum of 3 posts for the week.
Due dates: Your initial posting is due no later than Wednesday
11:59 PM October 2nd, 2019. Final peer responses are due by
Sunday 11:59 PM October 6, 2019.
After completing this, I will send you 3 classmatesposts.
thanks
LEED v4 for
BUILDING DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION
Updated April 14, 2017
Includes:
LEED BD+C: New Construction
LEED BD+C: Core and Shell
LEED BD+C: Schools
LEED BD+C: Retail
LEED BD+C: Data Centers
LEED BD+C: Warehouses and Distribution Centers
LEED BD+C: Hospitality
LEED BD+C: Healthcare
Updated to reflect the April 14, 2017 LEED v4 Building Design
and Construction Addenda
Updated to reflect the April 14, 2017 LEED v4 Building Design
and Construction Addenda
Prerequisite: Integrative Project Planning and
Design..................................................................... 9
Healthcare
...............................................................................................
......................................... 9
Credit: Integrative Process
...............................................................................................
................. 10
NC, CS, Schools, Retail, Data Centers, Warehouses &
Distribution Centers, Hospitality, Healthcare
...............................................................................................
......................................................... 10
LOCATION AND TRANSPORATION (LT)
.......................................................... 12
LT Credit: LEED for Neighborhood Development Location
........................................................... 12
NC, CS, Schools, Retail, Data Centers, Warehouses &
Distribution Centers, Hospitality, Healthcare
...............................................................................................
......................................................... 12
LT Credit: Sensitive Land
Protection...............................................................................
................. 13
NC, CS, Schools, Retail, Data Centers, Warehouses &
Distribution Centers, Hospitality, Healthcare
.................................................................................... ...........
......................................................... 13
LT Credit: High-Priority Site
...............................................................................................
............... 15
NC, CS, Schools, Retail, Data Centers, Warehouses &
Distribution Centers, Hospitality, Healthcare
...............................................................................................
......................................................... 15
LT Credit: Surrounding Density and Diverse Uses
......................................................................... 16
NC, CS, Schools, Retail, Data Centers, Hospitality
....................................................................... 16
Warehouses & Distribution Centers
...............................................................................................
17
Healthcare
...............................................................................................
....................................... 18
LT Credit: Access to Quality
Transit....................................................................................
............. 19
NC, CS, Data Centers, Warehouses & Distribution Centers,
Hospitality ....................................... 19
Schools
...............................................................................................
............................................ 20
Healthcare
...............................................................................................
....................................... 21
LT Credit: Bicycle Facilities
...............................................................................................
................ 22
NC, CS, Data Centers, Warehouses & Distribution Centers,
Hospitality ....................................... 22
Schools
...............................................................................................
............................................ 23
Retail
...............................................................................................
............................................... 23
Healthcare
...............................................................................................
....................................... 24
LT Credit: Reduced Parking Footprint
.............................................................................................
26
NC, CS, Retail, Schools, Data Centers, Warehouses &
Distribution Centers, Hospitality, Healthcare
...............................................................................................
......................................................... 26
LT Credit: Green Vehicles
...............................................................................................
................... 28
NC, CS, Data Centers, Hospitality. Retail, Healthcare
.................................................................. 28
Schools
...............................................................................................
............................................ 29
Warehouses & Distribution Centers
...............................................................................................
30
SUSTAINABLE SITES (SS)
............................................................................ 31
SS Prerequisite: Construction Activity Pollution Prevention
........................................................ 31
NC, CS, Schools, Retail, Data Centers, Warehouses &
Distribution Centers, Hospitality, Healthcare
...............................................................................................
......................................................... 31
SS Prerequisite: Environmental Site Assessment
.......................................................................... 32
Schools, Healthcare
...............................................................................................
........................ 32
SS Credit: Site Assessment
.................................................................................. .............
................ 33
Updated to reflect the April 14, 2017 LEED v4 Building Design
and Construction Addenda
NC, CS, Schools, Retail, Data Centers, Warehouses &
Distribution Centers, Hospitality, Healthcare
...............................................................................................
......................................................... 33
SS Credit: Site Development—Protect or Restore Habitat
............................................................. 34
NC, CS, Schools, Retail, Data Centers, Warehouses &
Distribution Centers, Hospitality, Healthcare
...............................................................................................
......................................................... 34
SS Credit: Open Space
...............................................................................................
........................ 36
NC, CS, Schools, Retail, Data Centers, Warehouses &
Distribution Centers, Hospitality, Healthcare
...............................................................................................
......................................................... 36
SS Credit: Rainwater Management
.................................................................................. .............
.... 37
NC, CS, Schools, Retail, Data Centers, Warehouses &
Distribution Centers, Hospitality, Healthcare
...............................................................................................
......................................................... 37
SS Credit: Heat Island Reduction
...............................................................................................
....... 39
NC, CS, Schools, Retail, Data Centers, Warehouses &
Distribution Centers, Hospitality, Healthcare
...............................................................................................
......................................................... 39
SS Credit: Light Pollution
Reduction................................................................................
................ 41
NC, CS, Schools, Retail, Data Centers, Warehouses &
Distribution Centers, Hospitality, Healthcare
...............................................................................................
......................................................... 41
SS Credit: Site Master Plan
...............................................................................................
................. 45
Schools
...............................................................................................
............................................ 45
SS Credit: Tenant Design and Construction Guidelines
................................................................ 46
CS
...............................................................................................
.................................................... 46
SS Credit: Places of Respite
...............................................................................................
............... 47
Healthcare
...............................................................................................
....................................... 47
SS Credit: Direct Exterior Access
...............................................................................................
...... 48
Healthcare
...............................................................................................
....................................... 48
SS Credit: Joint Use of Facilities
...............................................................................................
....... 49
Schools
...............................................................................................
............................................ 49
WATER EFFICIENCY (WE)
........................................................................... 51
WE Prerequisite: Outdoor Water Use Reduction
............................................................................ 51
NC, CS, Schools, Retail, Data Centers, Warehouses &
Distribution Centers, Hospitality, Healthcare
...............................................................................................
......................................................... 51
WE Prerequisite: Indoor Water Use Reduction
............................................................................... 52
NC, CS, Schools, NC-Retail, Data Centers, Warehouses &
Distribution Centers, NC-Hospitality,
Healthcare
.................................................................................. .............
....................................... 52
WE Prerequisite: Building-Level Water Metering
............................................................................ 55
NC, CS, Schools, Retail, Data Centers, Warehouses &
Distribution Centers, Hospitality, Healthcare
...............................................................................................
......................................................... 55
WE Credit: Outdoor Water Use Reduction
....................................................................................... 56
NC, CS, Schools, Retail, Data Centers, Warehouses &
Distribution Centers, Hospitality, Healthcare
...............................................................................................
......................................................... 56
WE Credit: Indoor Water Use Reduction
.......................................................................................... 57
Updated to reflect the April 14, 2017 LEED v4 Building Design
and Construction Addenda
NC, CS, Schools, NC-Retail, Data Centers, Warehouses &
Distribution Centers, NC-Hospitality,
Healthcare
...............................................................................................
....................................... 57
WE Credit: Cooling Tower Water Use
...............................................................................................
60
NC, CS, Schools, Retail, Data Centers, Warehouses &
Distribution Centers, Hospitality, Healthcare,
...............................................................................................
......................................................... 60
WE Credit: Water Metering
...............................................................................................
................. 62
NC, CS, Schools, Retail, Data Centers, Warehouses &
Distribution Centers, Hospitality, Healthcare
...............................................................................................
......................................................... 62
ENERGY AND ATMOSPHERE
......................................................................... 64
EA Prerequisite: Fundamental Commissioning and Verification
.................................................. 64
NC, CS, Schools, Retail, Data Centers, Warehouses &
Distribution Centers, Hospitality, Healthcare
...............................................................................................
......................................................... 64
EA Prerequisite: Minimum Energy Performance
............................................................................. 66
NC, CS, Schools, Retail, Warehouses & Distribution Centers,
Hospitality, Healthcare ................ 66
Data Centers
...............................................................................................
................................... 67
EA Prerequisite: Building-Level Energy Metering
........................................................................... 69
NC, Schools, Retail, Data Centers, Warehouses & Distribution
Centers, Hospitality, Healthcare 69
CS
...............................................................................................
.................................................... 69
EA Prerequisite: Fundamental Refrigerant Management
............................................................... 70
NC, CS, Schools, Retail, Data Centers, Warehouses &
Distribution Centers, Hospitality, Healthcare
...............................................................................................
......................................................... 70
EA Credit: Enhanced Commissioning
..............................................................................................
71
NC, CS, Schools, Retail, Data Centers, Warehouses &
Distribution Centers, Hospitality, Healthcare
...............................................................................................
......................................................... 71
EA Credit: Optimize Energy Performance
........................................................................................ 74
NC, CS, Schools, Retail, Warehouses & Distribution Centers,
Hospitality, Healthcare ................ 74
Data Centers
...............................................................................................
................................... 76
EA Credit: Advanced Energy Metering
........................................................................................ .....
77
NC, Schools, Retail, Data Centers, Warehouses & Distribution
Centers, Hospitality, Healthcare 77
CS
...............................................................................................
.................................................... 77
EA Credit: Demand Response
...............................................................................................
............ 79
NC, CS, Schools, Retail, Data Centers, Warehouses &
Distribution Centers, Hospitality, Healthcare
...............................................................................................
......................................................... 79
EA Credit: Renewable Energy Production
....................................................................................... 80
NC, CS, Schools, Retail, Data Centers, Warehouses &
Distribution Centers, Hospitality, Healthcare
...............................................................................................
......................................................... 80
EA Credit: Enhanced Refrigerant Management
............................................................................... 82
NC, CS, Schools, Data Centers, Warehouses & Distribution
Centers, Hospitality, Healthcare .... 82
Retail NC
...............................................................................................
......................................... 83
EA Credit: Green Power and Carbon Offsets
.................................................................................. 85
NC, CS, Schools, Retail, Data Centers, Warehouses &
Distribution Centers, Hospitality, Healthcare
...............................................................................................
......................................................... 85
Updated to reflect the April 14, 2017 LEED v4 Building Design
and Construction Addenda
MATERIALS AND RESOURCES (MR)
.............................................................. 86
MR Prerequisite: Storage and Collection of Recyclables
.............................................................. 86
NC, CS, Schools, Data Centers, Warehouses & Distribution
Centers, Hospitality NC, Healthcare86
Retail NC
...............................................................................................
......................................... 86
MR Prerequisite: Construction and Demolition Waste
Management Planning ........................... 87
NC, CS, Schools, Retail NC, Data Centers, Warehouses &
Distribution Centers, Hospitality NC,
Healthcare
...............................................................................................
....................................... 87
MR Prerequisite: PBT Source Reduction—Mercury
....................................................................... 88
Healthcare
...............................................................................................
....................................... 88
MR Credit: Building Life-Cycle Impact Reduction
........................................................................... 90
NC, CS, Schools, Retail NC, Data Centers, Warehouses &
Distribution Centers, Hospitality NC,
Healthcare
...............................................................................................
....................................... 90
MR Credit: Building Product Disclosure and Optimization—
Environmental Product Declarations
...............................................................................................
............................................................... 93
NC, CS, Schools, Retail, Data Centers, Warehouses &
Distribution Centers, Hospitality, Healthcare
...............................................................................................
......................................................... 93
MR Credit: Building Product Disclosure and Optimization –
Sourcing of Raw Materials .......... 95
NC, CS, Schools, Retail NC, Data Centers, Warehouses &
Distribution Centers, Hospitality NC,
Healthcare
...............................................................................................
....................................... 95
MR Credit: Building Product Disclosure and Optimization –
Material Ingredients ..................... 97
NC, CS, Schools, Retail NC, Data Centers, Warehouses &
Distribution Centers, Hospitality NC,
Healthcare
...............................................................................................
....................................... 97
MR Credit: PBT Source Reduction—Mercury
................................................................................ 100
Healthcare
...............................................................................................
..................................... 100
MR Credit: PBT Source Reduction—Lead, Cadmium, and
Copper ............................................. 102
Healthcare
...............................................................................................
..................................... 102
MR Credit: Furniture and Medical Furnishings
............................................................................. 103
Healthcare
...............................................................................................
..................................... 103
MR Credit: Design for Flexibility
...............................................................................................
...... 105
Healthcare
.............................................................................................. .
..................................... 105
MR Credit: Construction and Demolition Waste Management
.................................................... 106
NC, CS, Schools, Retail NC, Data Centers, Warehouses &
Distribution Centers, Hospitality NC,
Healthcare
...............................................................................................
..................................... 106
INDOOR ENVIRONMENTAL QUALITY (EQ)
.................................................... 107
EQ Prerequisite: Minimum Indoor Air Quality Performance
........................................................ 107
NC, CS, Schools, Retail, Data Centers, Warehouses &
Distribution Centers, Hospitality .......... 107
Healthcare
...............................................................................................
..................................... 109
EQ Prerequisite: Environmental Tobacco Smoke Control
........................................................... 111
NC, CS, Retail, Data Centers, Warehouses & Distribution
Centers, Hospitality, Healthcare ...... 111
Schools
...............................................................................................
.......................................... 112
Updated to reflect the April 14, 2017 LEED v4 Building Design
and Construction Addenda
EQ Prerequisite: Minimum Acoustic Performance
....................................................................... 113
Schools
...............................................................................................
.......................................... 113
EQ Credit: Enhanced Indoor Air Quality Strategies
...................................................................... 115
NC, CS, Schools, Retail, Data Centers, Warehouses &
Distribution Centers, Hospitality, Healthcare
...............................................................................................
....................................................... 115
EQ Credit: Low-Emitting Materials
...............................................................................................
... 118
NC, CS, Schools, Retail, Data Centers, Warehouses &
Distribution Centers, Hospitality, Healthcare
................................................................................ ...............
....................................................... 118
EQ Credit: Construction Indoor Air Quality Management Plan
................................................... 123
NC, CS, Schools, Retail, Data Centers, Warehouses &
Distribution Centers, Hospitality .......... 123
Healthcare
...............................................................................................
..................................... 123
EQ Credit: Indoor Air Quality Assessment
.................................................................................... 125
NC, Schools, Retail, Data Centers, Warehouses & Distribution
Centers, Hospitality, Healthcare125
EQ Credit: Thermal Comfort
...............................................................................................
............. 128
NC, Schools, Retail, Data Centers, Hospitality, Healthcare
......................................................... 128
Warehouses & Distribution Centers
.............................................................................................
128
NC, Schools, Retail, Data Centers, Warehouses & Distribution
Centers, Hospitality ................. 129
Healthcare
............................................................................................. ..
..................................... 129
EQ Credit: Interior Lighting
...............................................................................................
.............. 130
NC, Schools, Data Centers, Warehouses & Distribution Centers,
Hospitality ............................. 130
Retail NC
...............................................................................................
....................................... 131
Healthcare
...............................................................................................
..................................... 131
EQ Credit: Daylight
...............................................................................................
............................ 132
NC, CS, Schools, Retail, Data Centers, Warehouses &
Distribution Centers, Hospitality, Healthcare
...............................................................................................
....................................................... 132
EQ Credit: Quality Views
...............................................................................................
................... 135
NC, CS, Schools, Retail, Data Centers, Hospitality
..................................................................... 135
Warehouses & Distribution Centers
.............................................................................................
135
Healthcare
...............................................................................................
..................................... 135
EQ Credit: Acoustic Performance
...............................................................................................
.... 137
NC, Data Centers, Warehouses & Distribution Centers,
Hospitality ............................................ 137
Schools
...............................................................................................
.......................................... 138
Healthcare
...............................................................................................
..................................... 139
INNOVATION (IN)
....................................................................................... 141
IN Credit:
Innovation...............................................................................
.......................................... 141
NC, CS, Schools, Retail, Data Centers, Warehouses &
Distribution Centers, Hospitality, Healthcare
............................................................................................ ...
....................................................... 141
IN Credit: LEED Accredited Professional
....................................................................................... 143
NC, CS, Schools, Retail NC, Data Centers, Warehouses &
Distribution Centers, Hospitality, Healthcare
...............................................................................................
....................................................... 143
REGIONAL PRIORITY (RP)
......................................................................... 144
NC, CS, Schools, Retail NC, Data Centers, Warehouses &
Distribution Centers, Hospitality, Healthcare
...............................................................................................
....................................................... 144
Updated to reflect the April 14, 2017 LEED v4 Building Design
and Construction Addenda
APPENDICES
............................................................................................
145
Appendix 1. Use Types and Categories
.........................................................................................
145
Appendix 2. Default Occupancy Counts
........................................................................................ 146
Appendix 3. Retail Process Load Baselines
.................................................................................. 147
Updated to reflect the April 14, 2017 LEED v4 Building Design
and Construction Addenda
PREREQUISITE: INTEGRATIVE PROJECT PLANNING AND
DESIGN
Required
This prerequisite applies to:
Intent
Maximize opportunities for integrated, cost-effective adoption
of green design and construction strategies,
emphasizing human health as a fundamental evaluative criterion
for building design, construction and
operational strategies. Utilize innovative approaches and
techniques for green design and construction.
Requirements
HEALTHCARE
Use cross-discipline design and decision making, beginning in
the programming and pre-design phase. At a
minimum, ensure the following process:
Owner’s Project Requirements Document. Prepare an Owner’s
Project Requirements (OPR) document.
Develop a health mission statement and incorporate it in the
OPR. The health mission statement must
address "triple bottom line" values—economic, environmental
and social. Include goals and strategies to
safeguard the health of building occupants, the local community
and the global environment, while creating a
high-performance healing environment for the building’s
patients, caregivers and staff.
Preliminary Rating Goals. As early as practical and preferably
before schematic design, conduct a
preliminary LEED meeting with a minimum of four key project
team members and the owner or owner’s
representative. As part of the meeting, create a LEED® action
plan that, at a minimum:
Silver, Gold, or Platinum);
ed certification
level; and
requirements for each prerequisite and selected
credit are met.
Integrated Project Team. Assemble an integrated project team
and include as many of the following
professionals as feasible (minimum of four), in addition to the
owner or owner’s representative.
manager
designer
r
designer
performance testing
agents
sustainable design
consultant
ility green teams
teams
staff
programmers
representatives
general contractor
construction cost
estimator
appropriate to the specific
project type
Design Charrette. As early as practical and preferably before
schematic design, conduct a minimum
four-hour , integrated design charrette with the project team as
defined above. The goal is to optimize the
integration of green strategies across all aspects of building
design, construction and operations, drawing
on the expertise of all participants.
10
Updated to reflect the April 14, 2017 LEED v4 Building Design
and Construction Addenda
CREDIT: INTEGRATIVE PROCESS
BD&C
1 point
This credit applies to
re & Shell
Intent
To support high-performance, cost-effective project outcomes
through an early analysis of the
interrelationships among systems.
Requirements
NC, CS, SCHOOLS, RETAIL, DATA CENTERS,
WAREHOUSES & DISTRIBUTION CENTERS,
HOSPITALITY,
HEALTHCARE
Beginning in pre-design and continuing throughout the design
phases, identify and use opportunities to
achieve synergies across disciplines and building systems. Use
the analyses described below to inform
the owner’s project requirements (OPR), basis of design (BOD),
design documents, and construction
documents.
Energy-Related Systems
Discovery: Perform a preliminary “simple box” energy
modeling analysis before the completion of
schematic design that explores how to reduce energy loads in
the building and accomplish related
sustainability goals by questioning default assumptions. Assess
at least two potential strategies
associated with the following:
landscaping, and adjacent site
conditions.
affect HVAC sizing, energy
consumption, lighting, and renewable energy opportunities.
-
to-wall ratios, glazing
characteristics, shading, and window operability.
lighting levels in occupied
spaces.
options.
process loads through
programmatic solutions (e.g., equipment and purchasing
policies, layout options).
multifunctioning spaces, operating
schedules, space allotment per person, teleworking, reduction of
building area, and
anticipated operations and maintenance.
Implementation: Document how the above analysis informed
design and building form decisions in
the project’s OPR and BOD and the eventual design of the
project, including the following, as
applicable:
11
Updated to reflect the April 14, 2017 LEED v4 Building Design
and Construction Addenda
orientations;
systems (e.g., HVAC, lighting, controls,
Exterior materials, interior finishes, and functional program
elements); and
AND
Water-Related Systems
Discovery: Perform a preliminary water budget analysis before
the completion of schematic design that
explores how to reduce potable water loads in the building and
accomplish related sustainability goals.
Assess and estimate the project’s potential nonpotable water
supply sources and water demand volumes,
including the following:
gn
case demand volumes, calculated
in accordance with WE Prerequisite Indoor Water Use
Reduction.
case demand volume calculated
in accordance with WE Credit Outdoor Water-Use Reduction.
cess water demand. Assess kitchen, laundry, cooling
tower, and other equipment demand
volumes, as applicable.
source volumes, such as on-
site rainwater and graywater, municipally supplied nonpotable
water, and HVAC equipment
condensate.
Implementation: Document how the above analysis informed
building and site design decisions in
the project’s OPR and BOD. Demonstrate how at least one on-
site nonpotable water supply source
was analyzed to reduce the burden on municipal supply or
wastewater treatment systems by
contributing to at least two of the water demand components
listed above. Demonstrate how the
analysis informed the design of the project, including the
following, as applicable:
-site treatment systems;
stems.
12
Updated to reflect the April 14, 2017 LEED v4 Building Design
and Construction Addenda
LOCATION AND TRANSPORATION (LT)
LT CREDIT: LEED FOR NEIGHBORHOOD DEVELOPMENT
LOCATION
BD&C
3–16 points
This credit applies to
ruction (8–16 points)
–20 points)
–15 points)
–16 points)
–16 points)
–16 points)
–16 points)
–9 points)
Intent
To avoid development on inappropriate sites. To reduce vehicle
distance traveled. To enhance livability
and improve human health by encouraging daily physical
activity.
Requirements
NC, CS, SCHOOLS, RETAIL, DATA CENTERS,
WAREHOUSES & DISTRIBUTION CENTERS,
HOSPITALITY,
HEALTHCARE
Locate the project within the boundary of a development
certified under LEED for Neighborhood
Development (Stage 2 or Stage 3 under the Pilot or 2009 rating
systems, Certified Plan or Certified
Project under the LEED v4 rating system).
Projects attempting this credit are not eligible to earn points
under other Location and Transportation
credits.
Table 1. Points for LEED ND location.
Certification level Points BD&C
Points
BD&C (Core
and Shell)
Points BD&C
(Schools)
Points
BD&C
(Healthcare)
Certified 8 8 8 5
Silver 10 12 10 6
Gold 12 16 12 7
Platinum 16 20 15 9
13
Updated to reflect the April 14, 2017 LEED v4 Building Design
and Construction Addenda
LT CREDIT: SENSITIVE LAND PROTECTION
BD&C
1-2 points
This credit applies to
point)
Intent
To avoid the development of environmentally sensitive lands
and reduce the environmental impact from
the location of a building on a site.
Requirements
NC, CS, SCHOOLS, RETAIL, DATA CENTERS,
WAREHOUSES & DISTRIBUTION CENTERS,
HOSPITALITY,
HEALTHCARE
Option 1.
Locate the development footprint on land that has been
previously developed.
OR
Option 2.
Locate the development footprint on land that has been
previously developed or that does not meet the
following criteria for sensitive land:
farmland of statewide or local importance as
defined by the U.S. Code of Federal Regulations, Title 7,
Volume 6, Parts 400 to 699, Section
657.5 (or local equivalent for projects outside the U.S.) and
identified in a state Natural
Resources Conservation Service soil survey (or local equivalent
for projects outside the U.S.).
flood hazard map or otherwise
legally designated by the local jurisdiction or the state. For
projects in places without legally
adopted flood hazard maps or legal designations, locate on a
site that is entirely outside any
floodplain subject to a 1% or greater chance of flooding in any
given year.
o species listed as threatened or endangered under the U.S.
Endangered Species Act or
the state’s endangered species act, or
o species or ecological communities classified by NatureServe
as GH (possibly extinct), G1
(critically imperiled), or G2 (imperiled), or
o species listed as threatened or endangered specifies under
local equivalent standards
(for projects outside the U.S.) that are not covered by
NatureServe data.
water body, except for minor
improvements.
wetland, except for minor improvements.
Minor improvements within the wetland and water body buffers
may be undertaken to enhance
appreciation of them, provided such facilities are open all
building users. Only the following improvements
are considered minor:
14
Updated to reflect the April 14, 2017 LEED v4 Building Design
and Construction Addenda
(3.5 meters), of which no more than
8 feet (2.5 meters) may be impervious;
and/or natural hydrology;
-story structure per 300 linear feet (90 linear
meters) on average, not exceeding 500
square feet (45 square meters);
meters) on average, not exceeding 500
square feet (45 square meters) each;
o Hazardous trees, up to 75% of dead trees
o Trees less than 6 inches (150 millimeters) diameter at breast
height
o Up to 20% of trees more than 6 inches (150 millimeters)
diameter at breast height with a
condition rating of 40% or higher.
o Trees under 40% condition rating
The condition rating must be based on an assessment by an
arborist certified by the International
Society of Arboriculture (ISA) using ISA standard measures, or
local equivalent for projects
outside the U.S.
15
Updated to reflect the April 14, 2017 LEED v4 Building Design
and Construction Addenda
LT CREDIT: HIGH-PRIORITY SITE
BD&C
2-3 points
This credit applies to
-2 points)
-3 points)
-2 points)
-2 points)
-2 points)
-2 points)
lity (1-2 points)
-2 points)
Intent
To encourage project location in areas with development
constraints and promote the health of the
surrounding area.
Requirements
NC, CS, SCHOOLS, RETAIL, DATA CENTERS,
WAREHOUSES & DISTRIBUTION CENTERS,
HOSPITALITY,
HEALTHCARE
Option 1. Historic District (1 point BD&C except Core and
Shell, 2 points Core and Shell)
Locate the project on an infill location in a historic district.
OR
Option 2. Priority Designation (1 point BD&C except Core and
Shell, 2 points Core and Shell)
Locate the project on one of the following:
l Community site;
Financial Institutions Fund Qualified Low-
Income Community (a subset of the New Markets Tax Credit
Program);
Development’s Qualified Census Tract (QCT)
or Difficult Development Area (DDA); or
for projects outside the U.S.
OR
Option 3. Brownfield Remediation (2 points BD&C except Core
and Shell, 3 points Core and Shell)
Locate on a brownfield where soil or groundwater
contamination has been identified, and where the
local, state, or national authority (whichever has jurisdiction)
requires its remediation. Perform
remediation to the satisfaction of that authority.
16
Updated to reflect the April 14, 2017 LEED v4 Building Design
and Construction Addenda
LT CREDIT: SURROUNDING DENSITY AND DIVERSE
USES
BD&C
1–6 points
This credit applies to
–5 points)
–6 points)
–5 points)
–5 points)
–5 points)
–5 points)
–5 points)
Intent
To conserve land and protect farmland and wildlife habitat by
encouraging development in areas with
existing infrastructure. To promote walkability, and
transportation efficiency and reduce vehicle distance
traveled. To improve public health by encouraging daily
physical activity.
Requirements
NC, CS, SCHOOLS, RETAIL, DATA CENTERS,
HOSPITALITY
Option 1. Surrounding Density (2–3 points BD&C except Core
and Shell, 2-4 points Core and
Shell)
Locate on a site whose surrounding existing density within a ¼-
mile (400-meter) radius of the project
boundary meets the values in Table 1. Use either the “separate
residential and nonresidential densities”
or the “combined density” values.
Table 1a. Points for average density within 1/4 mile of project
(IP units)
Combined
density
Separate residential and nonresidential
densities
Points
BD&C
(except
Core
and
Shell)
Points
BD&C
(Core
and
Shell)
Square feet per
acre of buildable
land
Residential
density (DU/acre)
Nonresidential
density (FAR)
22,000 7 0.5 2 2
35,000 12 0.8 3 4
Table 1b. Points for average density within 400 meters of
project (SI units)
Combined
density
Separate residential and nonresidential
densities
Points
BD&C
(except
Core
Points
BD&C
17
Updated to reflect the April 14, 2017 LEED v4 Building Design
and Construction Addenda
and
Shell)
(Core
and
Shell)
Square meters
per hectare of
buildable land
Residential
density
(DU/hectare)
Nonresidential
density (FAR)
5,050 17.5 0.5 2 2
8,035 30 0.8 3 4
DU = dwelling unit; FAR = floor-area ratio.
Schools only
Physical education spaces that are part of the project site, such
as playing fields and associated buildings
used during sporting events only (e.g., concession stands) and
playgrounds with play equipment, are
excluded from the development density calculations.
AND/OR
Option 2. Diverse Uses (1–2 points)
Construct or renovate a building or a space within a building
such that the building’s main entrance is
within a ½-mile (800-meter) walking distance of the main
entrance of four to seven (1 point) or eight or
more (2 points) existing and publicly available diverse uses
(listed in Appendix 1).
The following restrictions apply.
tore may be
counted only once even if it sells
products in several categories).
if five restaurants are within
walking distance, only two may be counted).
t at least three of the five
categories, exclusive of the building’s
primary use.
WAREHOUSES & DISTRIBUTION CENTERS
Option 1. Development and Adjacency (2–3 points)
Construct or renovate the project on a previously developed site
that was used for industrial or
commercial purposes. (2 points).
OR
Construct or renovate the project on a site that is both a
previously developed and an adjacent site. The
adjacent sites must be currently used for industrial or
commercial purposes (3 points).
AND/OR
Option 2. Transportation Resources (1–2 points)
Construct or renovate the project on a site that has two or three
(1 point) or four (2 points) of the following
transportation resources:
-mile (16 kilometer) driving distance of
a main logistics hub, defined as an
airport, seaport, intermodal facility, or freight village with
intermodal transportation.
-mile (1600-meter) driving distance of
an on-off ramp to a highway.
18
Updated to reflect the April 14, 2017 LEED v4 Building Design
and Construction Addenda
-mile (1600-meter) driving distance of
an access point to an active freight rail
line.
In all cases, a planned transportation resource must be sited,
funded, and under construction by the date
of the certificate of occupancy and complete within 24 months
of that date.
HEALTHCARE
Option 1. Surrounding Density (1 point)
Locate on a site whose surrounding existing density within a ¼-
mile (400-meter) radius of the project
boundary is:
1. At least 7 dwelling units per acre (17.5 DU per hectare) with
a 0.5 floor-area ratio. The
counted density must be existing density, not zoned density, or
2. At least 22,000 square feet per acre (5 050 square meters per
hectare) of buildable land.
For previously developed existing rural healthcare campus sites,
achieve a minimum development
density of 30,000 square feet per acre (6890 square meters per
hectare).
OR
Option 2. Diverse Uses (1 point)
Construct or renovate a building on a site such that the
building’s main entrance is within a ½-mile (800-
meter) walking distance of the main entrance of at least seven
operational and publicly accessible uses
(listed in Appendix 1).
The following restrictions apply.
may be counted only once even if it
sells products in several categories).
se type may be counted (e.g.,
if five restaurants are within
walking distance, only two may be counted).
categories, exclusive of the building’s
primary use.
19
Updated to reflect the April 14, 2017 LEED v4 Building Design
and Construction Addenda
LT CREDIT: ACCESS TO QUALITY TRANSIT
BD&C
1–6 points
This credit applies to
–5 points)
–6 points)
–4 points)
(1–5 points)
–5 points)
–5 points)
–5 points)
–2 points)
Intent
To encourage development in locations shown to have
multimodal transportation choices or otherwise
reduced motor vehicle use, thereby reducing greenhouse gas
emissions, air pollution, and other
environmental and public health harms associated with motor
vehicle use.
Requirements
NC, CS, DATA CENTERS, WAREHOUSES & DISTRIBUTION
CENTERS, HOSPITALITY, RETAIL
Locate any functional entry of the project within a ¼-mile (400-
meter) walking distance of existing or
planned bus, streetcar, or rideshare stops, or within a ½-mile
(800-meter) walking distance of existing or
planned bus rapid transit stops, light or heavy rail stations,
commuter rail stations, or commuter ferry
terminals. The transit service at those stops and stations in
aggregate must meet the minimums listed in
Tables 1 and 2. Planned stops and stations may count if they are
sited, funded, and under construction
by the date of the certificate of occupancy and are complete
within 24 months of that date.
Both weekday and weekend trip minimums must be met.
(service in opposite directions).
are counted towards the threshold.
required walking distance, only trips from
one stop are counted towards the threshold.
Table 1. Minimum daily transit service for projects with
multiple transit types (bus, streetcar, rail,
or ferry)
Weekday
trips
Weekend
trips
Points BD&C
(except Core
and Shell)
Points BD&C (Core
and shell
72 40 1 1
144 108 3 3
360 216 5 6
Table 2. Minimum daily transit service for projects with
commuter rail or ferry service only
Weekday trips Weekend trips Points
24 6 1
40 8 2
20
Updated to reflect the April 14, 2017 LEED v4 Building Design
and Construction Addenda
60 12 3
Projects served by two or more transit routes such that no one
route provides more than 60% of the
documented levels may earn one additional point, up to the
maximum number of points.
If existing transit service is temporarily rerouted outside the
required distances for less than two years, the
project may meet the requirements, provided the local transit
agency has committed to restoring the
routes with service at or above the prior level.
SCHOOLS
Option 1. Transit-Served Location (1–4 points)
Locate any functional entry of the project within a ¼-mile (400-
meter) walking distance of existing or
planned bus, streetcar, or rideshare stops, or within a ½-mile
(800-meter) walking distance of existing or
planned bus rapid transit stops, light or heavy rail stations,
commuter rail stations or commuter ferry
terminals. The transit service at those stops and stations must
meet the minimums listed in Tables 1 and
2. Planned stops and stations may count if they are sited,
funded, and under construction by the date of
the certificate of occupancy and are complete within 24 months
of that date.
(service in opposite directions).
ying transit route, only trips in one direction
are counted towards the threshold.
required walking distance, only trips from
one stop are counted towards the threshold.
Table 1. Minimum daily transit service for projects with
multiple transit types (bus, streetcar, rail,
or ferry)
Weekday trips Points
72 1
144 2
360 4
Table 2. Minimum daily transit service for projects with
commuter rail or ferry service only
Weekday trips Points
24 1
40 2
60 3
Projects served by two or more transit routes such that no one
route provides more than 60% of the
prescribed levels may earn one additional point, up to the
maximum number of points.
If existing transit service is temporarily rerouted outside the
required distances for less than two years, the
project may meet the requirements, provided the local transit
agency has committed to restoring the
routes with service at or above the prior level.
OR
Option 2. Pedestrian Access (1–4 points)
Show that the project has an attendance boundary such that the
specified percentages of students live
within no more than a 3/4-mile (1200-meter) walking distance
(for grades 8 and below, or ages 14 and
21
Updated to reflect the April 14, 2017 LEED v4 Building Design
and Construction Addenda
below), and 1 1/2-mile (2400-meter) walking distance (for
grades 9 and above or ages 15 and above) of a
functional entry of a school building. Points are awarded
according to Table 3.
Table 3. Points for student population within walking distance
In addition, locate the project on a site that allows pedestrian
access to the site from all residential
neighborhoods that house the planned student population.
HEALTHCARE
Locate any functional entry of the project within a ¼-mile (400-
meter) walking distance of existing or
planned bus, streetcar, or rideshare stops, or within a ½-mile
(800-meter) walking distance of existing or
planned bus rapid transit stops, light or heavy rail stations,
commuter rail stations or commuter ferry
terminals. The transit service at those stops and stations in
aggregate must meet the minimums listed in
Tables 1 and 2. Planned stops and stations may count if they are
sited, funded, and under construction
by the date of the certificate of occupancy and are complete
within 24 months of that date.
Both weekday and weekend trip minimums must be met.
(service in opposite directions).
are counted towards the threshold.
required walking distance, only trips from
one stop are counted towards the threshold.
Table 1. Minimum daily transit service for projects with
multiple transit types (bus, streetcar, rail,
or ferry).
Weekday trips Weekend trips Points
72 40 1
144 108 2
Table 2. Minimum daily transit service for projects with
commuter rail or ferry service only
Weekday trips Weekend trips Points
24 6 1
40 8 2
Projects served by two or more transit routes such that no one
route provides more than 60% of the
prescribed levels may earn one additional point, up to the
maximum number of points.
If existing transit service is temporarily rerouted outside the
required distances for less than two years, the
project may meet the requirements, provided the local transit
agency has committed to restoring the
routes with service at or above the prior level.
Percentage of students Points
50% 1
60% 2
70% or more 4
22
Updated to reflect the April 14, 2017 LEED v4 Building Design
and Construction Addenda
LT CREDIT: BICYCLE FACILITIES
BD&C
1 point
This credit applies to
Intent
To promote bicycling and transportation efficiency and reduce
vehicle distance traveled. To improve
public health by encouraging utilitarian and recreational
physical activity.
Requirements
NC, CS, DATA CENTERS, WAREHOUSES & DISTRIBUTION
CENTERS, HOSPITALITY
Bicycle Network
Design or locate the project such that a functional entry or
bicycle storage is within a 200-yard (180-
meter) walking distance or bicycling distance from a bicycle
network that connects to at least one of the
following:
st 10 diverse uses (see Appendix 1);
is 50% or more residential; or
rail station, or ferry terminal.
All destinations must be within a 3-mile (4800-meter) bicycling
distance of the project boundary.
Planned bicycle trails or lanes may be counted if they are fully
funded by the date of the certificate of
occupancy and are scheduled for completion within one year of
that date.
Bicycle Storage and Shower Rooms
Case 1. Commercial or Institutional Projects
Provide short-term bicycle storage for at least 2.5% of all peak
visitors, but no fewer than four storage
spaces per building.
Provide long-term bicycle storage for at least 5% of all regular
building occupants, but no fewer than four
storage spaces per building in addition to the short-term bicycle
storage spaces.
Provide at least one on-site shower with changing facility for
the first 100 regular building occupants and
one additional shower for every 150 regular building occupants
thereafter.
Case 2. Residential Projects
Provide short-term bicycle storage for at least 2.5% of all peak
visitors but no fewer than four storage
spaces per building.
Provide long-term bicycle storage for at least 30% of all regular
building occupants, but no less than one
storage space per residential unit.
23
Updated to reflect the April 14, 2017 LEED v4 Building Design
and Construction Addenda
Case 3. Mixed-Use Projects
Meet the Case 1 and Case 2 storage requirements for the
nonresidential and residential portions of the
project, respectively.
For All Projects
Short-term bicycle storage must be within 100 feet (30 meters)
walking distance of any main entrance.
Long-term bicycle storage must be within 100 feet (30 meters)
walking distance of any functional entry.
Bicycle storage capacity may not be double-counted: storage
that is fully allocated to the occupants of
nonproject facilities cannot also serve project occupants.
Core & Shell projects should refer to Appendix 2, Default
Occupancy Counts, for occupancy count
requirements and guidance.
SCHOOLS
Bicycle Network
Design or locate the project such that a functional entry and/or
bicycle storage is within a 200-yard (180-
meter) walking distance or bicycling distance of a bicycle
network that connects to at least one of the
following:
station, commuter
rail station, or ferry terminal.
All destinations must be within a 3-mile (4800-meter) bicycling
distance of the project boundary.
Provide dedicated bicycle lanes that extend at least to the end of
the school property with no barriers
(e.g., fences) on school property.
Planned bicycle trails or lanes may be counted if they are fully
funded by the date of the certificate of
occupancy and are scheduled for completion within one year of
that date.
Bicycle Storage and Shower Rooms
Provide long-term bicycle storage for at least 5% of all regular
building occupants (excluding students
grade 3 and younger), but no fewer than four storage spaces per
building.
Provide at least one on-site shower with changing facility for
the first 100 regular building occupants
(excluding students) and one additional shower for every 150
regular building occupants (excluding
students) thereafter.
Long-term storage spaces must be easily accessible to occupants
and be within 100 feet (30 meters)
walking distance of any main entrance.
Bicycle storage capacity may not be double-counted: storage
that is fully allocated to the occupants of
nonproject facilities cannot also serve project occupants.
RETAIL
Bicycle Network
Design or locate the project such that a functional entry and/or
bicycle storage is within a 200-yard (180-
meter) walking distance or bicycling distance of a bicycle
network that connects to at least one of the
following:
); or
rail station, or ferry terminal.
All destinations must be within a 3-mile (4800-meter) bicycling
distance of the project boundary.
24
Updated to reflect the April 14, 2017 LEED v4 Building Design
and Construction Addenda
Planned bicycle trails or lanes may be counted if they are fully
funded by the date of the certificate of
occupancy and are scheduled for completion within one year of
that date.
Bicycle Storage and Shower Rooms
Provide at least two short-term bicycle storage spaces for every
5,000 square feet (465 square meters),
but no fewer than two storage spaces per building.
Provide long-term bicycle storage for at least 5% of regular
building occupants, but no fewer than two
storage spaces per building in addition to the short-term bicycle
storage spaces.
Provide at least one on-site shower with changing facility for
the first 100 regular building occupants and
one additional shower for every 150 regular building occupants
thereafter.
Short-term bicycle storage must be within 100 feet (30 meters)
walking distance of any main entrance.
Long-term bicycle storage must be within 100 feet (30 meters)
walking distance of any functional entry.
Bicycle storage capacity may not be double-counted: storage
that is fully allocated to the occupants of
nonproject facilities cannot also serve project occupants.
Provide a bicycle maintenance program for employees or
bicycle route assistance for employees and
customers. Route assistance must be provided in a manner
easily accessible to both employees and
customers.
For projects that are part of a multitenant complex only: If
bicycle storage spaces have been provided in
the complex in which the project is located, determine the
number of spaces that may be attributed to the
project by dividing the project’s floor area by the total floor
area of the development (buildings only) and
multiplying the percentage result by the total number of spaces.
If this number does not meet the credit
requirement, the project must provide additional bicycle
storage.
HEALTHCARE
Bicycle Network
Design or locate the project such that a functional entry and/or
bicycle storage is within a 200-yard (180-
meter) walking distance or bicycling distance of a bicycle
network that connects to at least one of the
following:
rail station, or ferry terminal.
All destinations must be within a 3-mile (4800-meter) bicycling
distance of the project boundary.
Planned bicycle trails or lanes may be counted if they are fully
funded by the date of the certificate of
occupancy and are scheduled for completion within one year of
that date.
Bicycle Storage and Shower Rooms
Case 1. Commercial or Institutional Projects
Provide short-term bicycle storage for at least 2.5% of all peak
visitors, but no fewer than four storage
spaces per building.
Provide long-term bicycle storage for at least 5% of regular
building occupants (excluding patients), but
no fewer than four storage spaces per building in addition to the
short-term bicycle storage spaces.
Provide at least one on-site shower with changing facility for
the first 100 regular building occupants
(excluding patients) and one additional shower for every 150
regular building occupants thereafter.
25
Updated to reflect the April 14, 2017 LEED v4 Building Design
and Construction Addenda
Case 2. Residential Projects
Provide secure, enclosed bicycle storage for at least 30% of all
regular building occupants (excluding
patients) measured at peak periods, but no less than one storage
space per residential unit.
For All Projects
Short-term bicycle storage must be within 100 feet (30 meters)
walking distance of any main entrance.
Long-term bicycle storage must be within 100 feet (30 meters)
walking distance of any functional entry.
Bicycle storage capacity may not be double counted: storage
that is fully allocated to the occupants of
nonproject facilities cannot also serve project occupants.
26
Updated to reflect the April 14, 2017 LEED v4 Building Design
and Construction Addenda
LT CREDIT: REDUCED PARKING FOOTPRINT
BD&C
1 point
This credit applies to
e (1 point)
Intent
To minimize the environmental harms associated with parking
facilities, including automobile
dependence, land consumption, and rainwater runoff.
Requirements
NC, CS, RETAIL, SCHOOLS, DATA CENTERS,
WAREHOUSES & DISTRIBUTION CENTERS,
HOSPITALITY,
HEALTHCARE
Do not exceed the minimum local code requirements for parking
capacity.
Provide parking capacity that is a percentage reduction below
the base ratios recommended by the
Parking Consultants Council, as shown in the Institute of
Transportation Engineers’ Transportation
Planning Handbook, 3rd edition, Tables 18-2 through 18-4.
Case 1. Baseline Location
Projects that have not earned points under LT Credit
Surrounding Density and Diverse Uses or LT Credit
Access to Quality Transit must achieve a 20% reduction from
the base ratios.
Case 2. Dense and/or Transit-Served Location
Projects earning 1 or more points under either LT Credit
Surrounding Density and Diverse Uses or LT
Credit Access to Quality Transit must achieve a 40% reduction
from the base ratios.
For All Projects
The credit calculations must include all existing and new off-
street parking spaces that are leased or
owned by the project, including parking that is outside the
project boundary but is used by the
project. On-street parking in public rights-of-way is excluded
from these calculations.
For projects that use pooled parking, calculate compliance using
the project’s share of the pooled
parking.
Provide preferred parking for carpools for 5% of the total
parking spaces after reductions are made from
the base ratios. Preferred parking is not required if no off-street
parking is provided.
27
Updated to reflect the April 14, 2017 LEED v4 Building Design
and Construction Addenda
Mixed-use projects should determine the percentage reduction
by first aggregating the parking amount of
each use (as specified by the base ratios) and then determining
the percentage reduction from the
aggregated parking amount.
Do not count parking spaces for fleet and inventory vehicles
unless these vehicles are regularly used by
employees for commuting as well as business purposes.
28
Updated to reflect the April 14, 2017 LEED v4 Building Design
and Construction Addenda
LT CREDIT: GREEN VEHICLES
BD&C
1 point
This credit applies to
stribution Centers (1 point)
Intent
To reduce pollution by promoting alternatives to conventionally
fueled automobiles.
Requirements
NC, CS, DATA CENTERS, HOSPITALITY. RETAIL,
HEALTHCARE
Designate 5% of all parking spaces used by the project as
preferred parking for green vehicles. Clearly
identify and enforce for sole use by green vehicles. Distribute
preferred parking spaces proportionally
among various parking sections (e.g. between short-term and
long-term spaces).
Green vehicles must achieve a minimum green score of 45 on
the American Council for an Energy
Efficient Economy (ACEEE) annual vehicle rating guide (or
local equivalent for projects outside the U.S.).
A discounted parking rate of at least 20% for green vehicles is
an acceptable substitute for preferred
parking spaces. The discounted rate must be publicly posted at
the entrance of the parking area and
permanently available to every qualifying vehicle.
In addition to preferred parking for green vehicles, meet one of
the following two options for alternative-
fuel fueling stations:
Option 1. Electric Vehicle Charging
Install electrical vehicle supply equipment (EVSE) in 2% of all
parking spaces used by the project.
Clearly identify and reserve these spaces for the sole use by
plug-in electric vehicles. EVSE parking
spaces must be provided in addition to preferred parking spaces
for green vehicles.
The EVSE must:
– 240 volts) or
greater.
ant regional or local standard for
electrical connectors, such as SAE
Surface Vehicle Recommended Practice J1772, SAE Electric
Vehicle Conductive Charge
Coupler or IEC 62196 of the International Electrotechnical
Commission for projects outside the
U.S.
participating in a demand-response
program or time-of-use pricing to encourage off-peak charging.
OR
Option 2. Liquid, gas, or battery facilities
29
Updated to reflect the April 14, 2017 LEED v4 Building Design
and Construction Addenda
Install liquid or gas alternative fuel fueling facilities or a
battery switching station capable of refueling a
number of vehicles per day equal to at least 2% of all parking
spaces.
SCHOOLS
Option 1: Green passenger vehicles
Designate 5% of all parking spaces used by the project as
preferred parking for green vehicles. Clearly
identify and enforce for sole use by green vehicles. Distribute
preferred parking spaces proportionally
among various parking sections (e.g. between short-term and
long-term spaces).
Green vehicles must achieve a minimum green score of 45 on
the American Council for an Energy
Efficient Economy (ACEEE) annual vehicle rating guide (or
local equivalent for projects outside the U.S.
A discounted parking rate of at least 20% for green vehicles is
an acceptable substitute for preferred
parking spaces. The discounted rate must be publicly posted at
the entrance of the parking area and
permanently available to every qualifying vehicle.
In addition to preferred parking for green vehicles, meet one of
the following two options for alternative-
fuel fueling stations:
Path 1. Electric Vehicle Charging
Install electrical vehicle supply equipment (EVSE) in 2% of all
parking spaces used by the project.
Clearly identify and reserve these spaces for the sole use by
plug-in electric vehicles. EVSE parking
spaces must be provided in addition to preferred parking spaces
for green vehicles.
The EVSE must:
Provide a Level 2 charging capacity (208 – 240 volts) or
greater.
electrical connectors, such as SAE
Surface Vehicle Recommended Practice J1772, SAE Electric
Vehicle Conductive Charge
Coupler or IEC 62196 of the International Electrotechnical
Commission for projects outside the
U.S.
participating in a demand-response
program or time-of-use pricing to encourage off-peak charging.
OR
Path 2. Liquid, gas, or battery facilities
Install liquid or gas alternative fuel fueling facilities or a
battery switching station capable of refueling a
number of vehicles per day equal to at least 2% of all parking
spaces.
OR
Option 2: Green buses or school-owned vehicles
Develop and implement a plan for every bus serving the school
to meet the following emissions standards
within seven years of the building certificate of occupancy:
or less per
brake horsepower-hour; and
horsepower-hour.
Emission standards must be met for each bus and not by an
average of the entire fleet serving the
school.
30
Updated to reflect the April 14, 2017 LEED v4 Building Design
and Construction Addenda
Develop and implement a plan for 100% of all other (non-bus)
vehicles owned or leased to serve the
school to be green vehicles. Green vehicles must achieve a
minimum green score of 45 on the American
Council for an Energy Efficient Economy (ACEEE) annual
vehicle rating guide (or local equivalent for
projects outside the U.S).
WAREHOUSES & DISTRIBUTION CENTERS
Option 1. Alternative-Fuel Vehicles (1 point)
Provide an on-site fleet with at least one yard tractor that is
powered by electricity, propane, or natural
gas. Provide on-site charging or refueling stations for the
vehicles. Liquid or gas refueling stations must
be separately ventilated or located outdoors.
OR
Option 2. Reduced Truck Idling (1 point)
Provide an electrical connection for at least 50% of all dock
door locations to limit truck idling at the dock.
31
Updated to reflect the April 14, 2017 LEED v4 Building Design
and Construction Addenda
SUSTAINABLE SITES (SS)
SS PREREQUISITE: CONSTRUCTION ACTIVITY
POLLUTION PREVENTION
Required
BD&C
This prerequisite applies to
pitality
Intent
To reduce pollution from construction activities by controlling
soil erosion, waterway sedimentation,
and airborne dust.
Requirements
NC, CS, SCHOOLS, RETAIL, DATA CENTERS,
WAREHOUSES & DISTRIBUTION CENTERS,
HOSPITALITY,
HEALTHCARE
Create and implement an erosion and sedimentation control plan
for all construction activities
associated with the project. The plan must conform to the
erosion and sedimentation requirements of
the 2012 U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA)
Construction General Permit (CGP) or local
equivalent, whichever is more stringent. Projects must apply the
CGP regardless of size. The plan
must describe the measures implemented.
32
Updated to reflect the April 14, 2017 LEED v4 Building Design
and Construction Addenda
SS PREREQUISITE: ENVIRONMENTAL SITE ASSESSMENT
Required
BD&C
This prerequisite applies to
Intent
To protect the health of vulnerable populations by ensuring that
the site is assessed for environmental
contamination and that any environmental contamination has
been remediated.
Requirements
SCHOOLS, HEALTHCARE
Conduct a Phase I Environmental Site Assessment as described
in ASTM E1527–05 (or a local
equivalent) to determine whether environmental contamination
exists at the site. If contamination is
suspected, conduct a Phase II Environmental Site Assessment as
described in ASTM E1903–11 (or a
local equivalent).
If a site is contaminated, remediate the site to meet local, state,
or national environmental protection
agency region residential (unrestricted) standards, whichever
are most stringent.
33
Updated to reflect the April 14, 2017 LEED v4 Building Design
and Construction Addenda
SS CREDIT: SITE ASSESSMENT
BD&C
1 point
This credit applies to
Healthcare (1 point)
Intent
To assess site conditions before design to evaluate sustainable
options and inform related decisions
about site design.
Requirements
NC, CS, SCHOOLS, RETAIL, DATA CENTERS,
WAREHOUSES & DISTRIBUTION CENTERS,
HOSPITALITY,
HEALTHCARE
Complete and document a site survey or assessment1 that
includes the following information:
slope stability risks.
kes,
streams, shorelines, rainwater
collection and reuse opportunities, TR-55 initial water storage
capacity of the site (or local
equivalent for projects outside the U.S.).
sun angles, prevailing winds,
monthly precipitation and temperature ranges.
significant tree mapping, threatened or
endangered species, unique habitat, invasive plant species.
nservation Service soils
delineation, U.S. Department of Agriculture
prime farmland, healthy soils, previous development, disturbed
soils (local equivalent standards
may be used for projects outside the U.S.).
n infrastructure,
adjacent properties, construction
materials with existing recycle or reuse potential.
adjacent physical activity
opportunities, proximity to major sources of air pollution.
The survey or assessment should demonstrate the relationships
between the site features and topics
listed above and how these features influenced the project
design; give the reasons for not addressing
any of those topics.
1 Components adapted from the Sustainable Sites Initiative:
Guidelines and Performance Benchmarks 2009, Prerequisite 2.1:
Site
Assessment.
34
Updated to reflect the April 14, 2017 LEED v4 Building Design
and Construction Addenda
SS CREDIT: SITE DEVELOPMENT—PROTECT OR
RESTORE HABITAT
BD&C
1–2 points
This credit applies to
–2 points)
–2 points)
–2 points)
–2 points)
–2 points)
–2 points)
–2 points)
Intent
To conserve existing natural areas and restore damaged areas to
provide habitat and promote
biodiversity.
Requirements
NC, CS, SCHOOLS, RETAIL, DATA CENTERS,
WAREHOUSES & DISTRIBUTION CENTERS,
HOSPITALITY,
HEALTHCARE
Preserve and protect from all development and construction
activity 40% of the greenfield area on the site
(if such areas exist).
AND
Option 1. On-Site Restoration (2 points except Healthcare, 1
point Healthcare)
Using native or adapted vegetation, restore 30% (including the
building footprint) of all portions of the site
identified as previously disturbed. Projects that achieve a
density of 1.5 floor-area ratio may include
vegetated roof surfaces in this calculation if the plants are
native or adapted, provide habitat, and promote
biodiversity.
Restore all disturbed or compacted soils that will be revegetated
within the project’s development footprint
to meet the following requirements2:
comparable to their original function.
may not include the following:
o soils defined regionally by the Natural Resources
Conservation Service web soil survey (or
local equivalent for projects outside the U.S.) as prime
farmland, unique farmland, or
farmland of statewide or local importance; or
o soils from other greenfield sites, unless those soils are a
byproduct of a construction process.
categories 1–3 and meet the criteria of
either category 4 or 5:
1. organic matter;
2. compaction;
3. infiltration rates;
4. soil biological function; and
5. soil chemical characteristics.
2 Components adapted from the Sustainable Sites Initiative:
Guidelines and Performance Benchmarks 2009, Credit 7.2:
Restore
Soils Disturbed During Construction
35
Updated to reflect the April 14, 2017 LEED v4 Building Design
and Construction Addenda
Project teams may exclude vegetated landscape areas that are
constructed to accommodate rainwater
infiltration from the vegetation and soils requirements, provided
all such rainwater infiltration areas are
treated consistently with SS Credit Rainwater Management.
Schools only:
Dedicated athletic fields that are solely for athletic uses are
exempted from the soil restoration criteria.
These areas may not count toward the minimum required area.
OR
Option 2. Financial Support (1 point)
Provide financial support equivalent to at least $0.40 per square
foot (US$4 per square meter) for the
total site area (including the building footprint).
Financial support must be provided to a nationally or locally
recognized land trust or conservation
organization within the same EPA Level III ecoregion or the
project’s state (or within 100 miles of the
project [160 kilometers] for projects outside the U.S.). For U.S.
projects, the land trust must be
accredited by the Land Trust Alliance.
36
Updated to reflect the April 14, 2017 LEED v4 Building Design
and Construction Addenda
SS CREDIT: OPEN SPACE
BD&C
1 point
This credit applies to
Intent
To create exterior open space that encourages interaction with
the environment, social interaction,
passive recreation, and physical activities.
Requirements
NC, CS, SCHOOLS, RETAIL, DATA CENTERS,
WAREHOUSES & DISTRIBUTION CENTERS,
HOSPITALITY,
HEALTHCARE
Provide outdoor space greater than or equal to 30% of the total
site area (including building footprint). A
minimum of 25% of that outdoor space must be vegetated (turf
grass does not count as vegetation) or
have overhead vegetated canopy.
The outdoor space must be physically accessible and be one or
more of the following:
-oriented paving or turf area with physical site
elements that accommodate outdoor
social activities;
-oriented paving or turf area with physical site
elements that encourage physical
activity;
species that provide opportunities for
year-round visual interest;
production;
Credit Site Development—Protect or
Restore Habitat and also includes elements of human
interaction.
For projects that achieve a density of 1.5 floor-area ratio (FAR),
and are physically accessible, extensive
or intensive vegetated roofs can be used toward the minimum
25% vegetation requirement, and
qualifying roof-based physically accessible paving areas can be
used toward credit compliance.
Wetlands or naturally designed ponds may count as open space
if the side slope gradients average 1:4
(vertical : horizontal) or less and are vegetated.
For projects that are part of a multitenant complex only
Open space can be either adjacent to the building or at another
location in the site master plan. The
open space may be at another master plan development site as
long as it is protected from
development. If the open space is not adjacent to the building,
provide documentation showing that
the requirements have been met and the land is in a natural state
or has been returned to a natural
state and conserved for the life of the building.
37
Updated to reflect the April 14, 2017 LEED v4 Building Design
and Construction Addenda
SS CREDIT: RAINWATER MANAGEMENT
BD&C
1–3 points
This credit applies to
–3 points)
–3 points)
–3 points)
–3 points)
–3 points)
–3 points)
–3 points)
–2 points)
Intent
To reduce runoff volume and improve water quality by
replicating the natural hydrology and water balance
of the site, based on historical conditions and undeveloped
ecosystems in the region.
Requirements
NC, CS, SCHOOLS, RETAIL, DATA CENTERS,
WAREHOUSES & DISTRIBUTION CENTERS,
HOSPITALITY,
HEALTHCARE
Option 1. Percentile of Rainfall Events
Path 1. 95th Percentile (2 points except Healthcare, 1 point
Healthcare)
In a manner best replicating natural site hydrology processes,
manage on site the runoff from the
developed site for the 95th percentile of regional or local
rainfall events using low-impact development
(LID) and green infrastructure.
Use daily rainfall data and the methodology in the U.S.
Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) Technical
Guidance on Implementing the Stormwater Runoff
Requirements for Federal Projects under Section 438
of the Energy Independence and Security Act to determine the
95th percentile amount.
OR
Path 2. 98th Percentile (3 points except Healthcare, 2 points
Healthcare)
Achieve Path 1 but for the 98th percentile of regional or local
rainfall events, using LID and green
infrastructure.
OR
Path 3. Zero Lot Line projects only – 85th Percentile (3 points
except Healthcare, 2 points
Healthcare)
The following requirement applies to zero lot line projects in
urban areas with a minimum density of 1.5
FAR. In a manner best replicating natural site hydrology
processes, manage on site the runoff from the
developed site for the 85th percentile of regional or local
rainfall events, using LID and green
infrastructure.
OR
Option 2. Natural Land Cover Conditions (3 points except
Healthcare, 2 points Healthcare)
Manage on site the annual increase in runoff volume from the
natural land cover condition to the
postdeveloped condition.
38
Updated to reflect the April 14, 2017 LEED v4 Building Design
and Construction Addenda
Projects that are part of a multitenant complex only
The credit requirements may be met using a coordinated
approach affecting the defined project site that
is within the master plan boundary. Distributed techniques
based on a watershed approach are then
required.
39
Updated to reflect the April 14, 2017 LEED v4 Building Design
and Construction Addenda
SS CREDIT: HEAT ISLAND REDUCTION
BD&C
1–2 points
This credit applies to
-2 points)
-2 points)
-2 points)
-2 points)
-2 points)
-2 points)
-2 points)
Intent
To minimize effects on microclimates and human and wildlife
habitats by reducing heat islands.
Requirements
NC, CS, SCHOOLS, RETAIL, DATA CENTERS,
WAREHOUSES & DISTRIBUTION CENTERS,
HOSPITALITY,
HEALTHCARE
Choose one of the following options:
Option 1. Nonroof and Roof (2 points except Healthcare, 1 point
Healthcare)
Meet the following criterion:
Area of
Nonroof
Measures
Area of High-
Reflectance Roof
Area of
Vegetated Roof
Total Site
Paving Area
Total Roof Area
—————
—
+ —————— + —————— ≥ +
0.5 0.75 0.75
Alternatively, an SRI and SR weighted average approach may
be used to calculate compliance.
Use any combination of the following strategies.
Nonroof Measures
shade over paving areas (including
playgrounds) on the site within 10 years of planting. Install
vegetated planters. Plants must be in
place at the time of occupancy permit and cannot include
artificial turf.
systems, such as solar thermal
collectors, photovoltaics, and wind turbines.
Provide shade with architectural devices or structures that
have a three-year aged solar
reflectance (SR) value of at least 0.28. If three-year aged value
information is not available, use
materials with an initial SR of at least 0.33 at installation,
-year aged solar reflectance
(SR) value of at least 0.28. If three-
year aged value information is not available, use materials with
an initial SR of at least 0.33 at
installation.
-grid pavement system (at least 50% unbound).
40
Updated to reflect the April 14, 2017 LEED v4 Building Design
and Construction Addenda
High-Reflectance Roof
Use roofing materials that have an SRI equal to or greater than
the values in Table 1. Meet the three-year
aged SRI value. If three-year aged value information is not
available, use materials that meet the initial
SRI value.
Table 1. Minimum solar reflectance index value, by roof slope
Slope Initial SRI
3-year
aged SRI
Low-sloped roof
≤ 2:12
82
64
Steep-sloped roof
> 2:12
39
32
Vegetated Roof
Install a vegetated roof.
OR
Option 2. Parking under Cover (1 point)
Place a minimum of 75% of parking spaces under cover. Any
roof used to shade or cover parking must
(1) have a three-year aged SRI of at least 32 (if three-year aged
value information is not available, use
materials with an initial SRI of at least 39 at installation), (2)
be a vegetated roof, or (3) be covered by
energy generation systems, such as solar thermal collectors,
photovoltaics, and wind turbines .
41
Updated to reflect the April 14, 2017 LEED v4 Building Design
and Construction Addenda
SS CREDIT: LIGHT POLLUTION REDUCTION
BD&C
1 point
This credit applies to
Intent
To increase night sky access, improve nighttime visibility, and
reduce the consequences of
development for wildlife and people.
Requirements
NC, CS, SCHOOLS, RETAIL, DATA CENTERS,
WAREHOUSES & DISTRIBUTION CENTERS,
HOSPITALITY,
HEALTHCARE
Meet uplight and light trespass requirements, using either the
backlight-uplight-glare (BUG) method
(Option 1) or the calculation method (Option 2). Projects may
use different options for uplight and light
trespass.
Meet these requirements for all exterior luminaires located
inside the project boundary (except those
listed under “Exemptions”), based on the following:
mounted in the same orientation and tilt
as specified in the project design; and
construction begins). Classify the project
under one lighting zone using the lighting zones definitions
provided in the Illuminating
Engineering Society and International Dark Sky Association
(IES/IDA) Model Lighting Ordinance
(MLO) User Guide.
Additionally, meet the internally illuminated signage
requirement.
Uplight
Option 1. BUG Rating Method
Do not exceed the following luminaire uplight ratings, based on
the specific light source installed in the
luminaire, as defined in IES TM-15-11, Addendum A.
Table 1. Maximum uplight ratings for luminaires
MLO lighting zone Luminaire uplight
rating
LZ0 U0
LZ1 U1
LZ2 U2
LZ3 U3
42
Updated to reflect the April 14, 2017 LEED v4 Building Design
and Construction Addenda
LZ4 U4
OR
Option 2. Calculation Method
Do not exceed the following percentages of total lumens emitted
above horizontal.
Table 2. Maximum percentage of total lumens emitted above
horizontal, by lighting
zone
MLO lighting zone Maximum allowed percentage of total
luminaire lumens emitted above horizontal
LZ0 0%
LZ1 0%
LZ2 1.5%
LZ3 3%
LZ4 6%
AND
Light Trespass
Option 1. BUG Rating Method
Do not exceed the following luminaire backlight and glare
ratings (based on the specific light source
installed in the luminaire), as defined in IES TM-15-11,
Addendum A, based on the mounting location
and distance from the lighting boundary.
Table 3. Maximum backlight and glare ratings
MLO lighting zone
Luminaire mounting LZ0 LZ1 LZ2 LZ3 LZ4
Allowed backlight ratings
> 2 mounting heights from lighting
boundary
B1 B3 B4 B5 B5
1 to 2 mounting heights from lighting
boundary and properly oriented
B1 B2 B3 B4 B4
0.5 to 1 mounting height to
lighting boundary and properly
oriented
B0 B1 B2 B3 B3
< 0.5 mounting height to lighting
boundary and properly oriented B0 B0 B0 B1 B2
Allowed glare ratings
Building-mounted > 2 mounting
heights from any lighting
boundary
G0 G1 G2 G3 G4
43
Updated to reflect the April 14, 2017 LEED v4 Building Design
and Construction Addenda
Building-mounted 1–2 mounting
heights from any lighting
boundary
G0 G0 G1 G1 G2
Building-mounted 0.5 to 1
mounting heights from any
lighting boundary
G0 G0 G0 G1 G1
Building-mounted < 0.5 mounting
heights from any lighting
boundary
G0 G0 G0 G0 G1
All other luminaires G0 G1 G2 G3 G4
The lighting boundary is located at the property lines of the
property, or properties, that the LEED
project occupies. The lighting boundary can be modified under
the following conditions:
is not limited to, a walkway,
bikeway, plaza, or parking lot, the lighting boundary may be
moved to 5 feet (1.5 meters)
beyond the property line.
corridor, the lighting
boundary may be moved to the center line of that street, alley,
or corridor.
re are additional properties owned by the same
entity that are contiguous to the
property, or properties, that the LEED project is within and
have the same or higher MLO
lighting zone designation as the LEED project, the lighting
boundary may be expanded to
include those properties.
Orient all luminaires less than two mounting heights from the
lighting boundary such that the backlight
points toward the nearest lighting boundary line. Building-
mounted luminaires with the backlight
oriented toward the building are exempt from the backlight
rating requirement.
OR
Option 2. Calculation Method
Do not exceed the following vertical illuminances at the
lighting boundary (use the definition of lighting
boundary in Option 1). Calculation points may be no more than
5 feet (1.5 meters) apart. Vertical
illuminances must be calculated on vertical planes running
parallel to the lighting boundary, with the
normal to each plane oriented toward the property and
perpendicular to the lighting boundary,
extending from grade level to 33 feet (10 meters) above the
height of the highest luminaire.
Table 4. Maximum vertical illuminance at lighting boundary, by
lighting zone
MLO lighting zone Vertical illuminance
LZ0 0.05 fc (0.5 lux)
LZ1 0.05 fc (0.5 lux)
LZ2 0.10 fc (1 lux)
LZ3 0.20 fc (2 lux)
LZ4 0.60 fc (6 lux)
FC = footcandle.
AND
Internally Illuminated Exterior Signage
Do not exceed a luminance of 200 cd/m2 (nits) during nighttime
hours and 2000 cd/m2 (nits) during
daytime hours.
44
Updated to reflect the April 14, 2017 LEED v4 Building Design
and Construction Addenda
Exemptions from Uplight and Light Trespass Requirements
The following exterior lighting is exempt from the
requirements, provided it is controlled separately from
the nonexempt lighting:
transportation;
in MLO lighting zones 3 and 4, and is
automatically turned off from midnight until 6 a.m.;
performances;
-mandated roadway lighting;
helipads;
ones 2, 3, or
4; and
45
Updated to reflect the April 14, 2017 LEED v4 Building Design
and Construction Addenda
SS CREDIT: SITE MASTER PLAN
BD&C
1 point
This credit applies to
Intent
To ensure that the sustainable site benefits achieved by the
project continue, regardless of future
changes in programs or demographics.
Requirements
SCHOOLS
The project must achieve at least four of the following six
credits, using the associated calculation
methods. The achieved credits must then be recalculated using
the data from the master plan.
—Protect or Restore Habitat
ment
A site master plan for the school must be developed in
collaboration with school authorities. Previous
sustainable site design measures should be considered in all
master-planning efforts so that existing
infrastructure is retained whenever possible. The master plan
must therefore include current construction
activity plus future construction (within the building’s lifespan)
that affects the site. The master plan
development footprint must also include parking, paving, and
utilities.
Projects where no future development is planned are not eligible
for this credit.
46
Updated to reflect the April 14, 2017 LEED v4 Building Design
and Construction Addenda
SS CREDIT: TENANT DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION
GUIDELINES
BD&C
1 point
This credit applies to
Intent
To educate tenants in implementing sustainable design and
construction features in their tenant
improvement build-outs.
Requirements
CS
Publish for tenants an illustrated document with the following
content, as applicable:
features incorporated in the core and
shell project and the project’s sustainability goals and
objectives, including those for tenant
spaces;
strategies, products, materials, and
services; and
and construction with the
building systems when pursuing the following LEED v4 for
Interior Design and Construction
prerequisites and credits:
o WE Prerequisite: Indoor Water Use Reduction
o WE Credit: Indoor Water Use Reduction
o EA Prerequisite: Minimum Energy Performance
o EA Prerequisite: Fundamental Refrigerant Management
o EA Credit: Optimize Energy Performance
o EA Credits: Advanced Energy Metering
o EA Credit: Renewable Energy Production
o EA Credit: Enhanced Refrigerant Management
o MR Prerequisite: Storage and Collection of Recyclables
o EQ Prerequisite: Minimum Indoor Air Quality Performance
o EQ Prerequisite: Environmental Tobacco Smoke Control
o EQ Credit: Enhanced Indoor Air Quality Strategies
o EQ Credit: Low-Emitting Materials
o EQ Credit: Construction Indoor Air Quality Management Plan
o EQ Credit: Indoor Air Quality Assessment
o EQ Credit: Thermal Comfort
o EQ Credit: Interior Lighting
o EQ Credit: Daylight
o EQ Credit: Quality Views
o EQ Credit: Acoustic Performance
Provide the guidelines to all tenants before signing the lease.
47
Updated to reflect the April 14, 2017 LEED v4 Building Design
and Construction Addenda
SS CREDIT: PLACES OF RESPITE
BD&C
1 point
This credit applies to
Intent
To provide patients, staff, and visitors with the health benefits
of the natural environment by creating
outdoor places of respite on the healthcare campus.
Requirements
HEALTHCARE
Provide places of respite that are accessible to patients and
visitors, equal to 5% of the net usable
program area of the building.
Provide additional dedicated places of respite for staff, equal to
2% of the net usable program area of the
building.
Places of respite must be outdoors, or be located in interior
atria, greenhouses, solaria, or conditioned
spaces; such interior spaces may be used to meet up to 30% of
the required area if 90% of each
qualifying space’s gross floor area achieves a direct line of
sight to unobstructed views of nature.
All areas must meet the following requirements.
within 200 feet (60 meters) of a
building entrance or access point.
medical care is delivered.
r indirect sun are provided, with at least
one seating space per 200 square
feet (18.5 square meters) of each respite area, with one
wheelchair space per five seating
spaces..
-use
gardens unavailable to all
building occupants may account for no more than 50% of the
required area.
-access natural trails that are available to visitors,
staff, or patients may account for
no more than 30% of the required area, provided the trailhead is
within 200 feet (60 meters) of
a building entrance.
Additionally, outdoor areas must meet the following
requirements.
vegetated at the ground plane (not
including turf grass) or have overhead vegetated canopy.
elements.
Construction of Health Care
Facilities (Section 1.2-6.3 and Appendix A1.2-6.3:Wayfinding).
of respite may not be within 25 feet (7.6 meters) of a
smoking area (see EQ
Prerequisite Environmental Tobacco Smoke Control).
Existing places of respite on the hospital campus may qualify if
they otherwise meet the credit
requirements.
48
Updated to reflect the April 14, 2017 LEED v4 Building Design
and Construction Addenda
SS CREDIT: DIRECT EXTERIOR ACCESS
BD&C
1 point
This credit applies to
Intent
To provide patients and staff with the health benefits associated
with direct access to the natural
environment.
Requirements
HEALTHCARE
Provide direct access to an exterior courtyard, terrace, garden,
or balcony. The space must be at least 5
square feet (0.5 square meters) per patient for 75% of all
inpatients and 75% of qualifying outpatients
whose clinical length of stay (LOS) exceeds four hours.
Patients whose length of stay exceeds four hours, and whose
treatment makes them unable to move,
such as emergency, stage 1 surgical recovery, and critical care
patients, may be excluded.
Places of respite outside the building envelope that meet the
requirements of SS Credit Places of Respite
that are immediately adjacent to clinical areas or with direct
access from inpatient units may be included.
Qualifying spaces must be designated as nonsmoking The
spaces must also meet the requirements for
outdoor air contaminant concentrations enumerated in EQ
Credit Enhanced Indoor Air Quality Strategies,
Option 2 and be located more than 100 feet (30 meters) from
building exhaust air locations, loading
docks, and roadways with idling vehicles.
49
Updated to reflect the April 14, 2017 LEED v4 Building Design
and Construction Addenda
SS CREDIT: JOINT USE OF FACILITIES
BD&C
1 point
This credit applies to
Intent
To integrate the school with the community by sharing the
building and its playing fields for nonschool
events and functions.
Requirements
SCHOOLS
Option 1. Make Building Space Open to the General Public (1
point)
In collaboration with the school authorities, ensure that at least
three of the following types of spaces in
the school are accessible to and available for shared use by the
general public:
classrooms;
Provide access to toilets in joint-use areas after normal school
hours.
OR
Option 2. Contract with Specific Organizations to Share
Building Space (1 point)
In collaboration with the school authorities, contract with
community or other organizations to provide at
least two types of dedicated-use spaces in the building, such as
the following:
state or local
offices);
Provide access to toilets in joint-use areas after normal school
hours.
OR
Option 3. Use Shared Space Owned by Other Organizations (1
point)
In collaboration with the school authorities, ensure that at least
two of the following six types of spaces
that are owned by other organizations or agencies are accessible
to students:
eteria;
50
Updated to reflect the April 14, 2017 LEED v4 Building Design
and Construction Addenda
Provide direct pedestrian access to these spaces from the
school. In addition, provide signed joint-use
agreements with the other organizations or agencies that
stipulate how these spaces will be shared.
51
Updated to reflect the April 14, 2017 LEED v4 Building Design
and Construction Addenda
WATER EFFICIENCY (WE)
WE PREREQUISITE: OUTDOOR WATER USE REDUCTION
Required
BD&C
This prerequisite applies to
Intent
To reduce outdoor water consumption.
Requirements
NC, CS, SCHOOLS, RETAIL, DATA CENTERS,
WAREHOUSES & DISTRIBUTION CENTERS,
HOSPITALITY,
HEALTHCARE
Reduce outdoor water use through one of the following options.
Nonvegetated surfaces, such as
permeable or impermeable pavement, should be excluded from
the landscape area calculations. Athletic
fields and playgrounds (if vegetated) and food gardens may be
included or excluded at the project team’s
discretion.
Option 1. No Irrigation Required
Show that the landscape does not require a permanent irrigation
system beyond a maximum two-year
establishment period.
OR
Option 2. Reduced Irrigation
Reduce the project’s landscape water requirement by at least
30% from the calculated baseline for the
site’s peak watering month. Reductions must be achieved
through plant species selection and irrigation
system efficiency, as calculated by the Environmental
Protection Agency (EPA) WaterSense Water
Budget Tool.
52
Updated to reflect the April 14, 2017 LEED v4 Building Design
and Construction Addenda
WE PREREQUISITE: INDOOR WATER USE REDUCTION
Required
BD&C
This prerequisite applies to
nters
Intent
To reduce indoor water consumption.
Requirements
NC, CS, SCHOOLS, NC-RETAIL, DATA CENTERS,
WAREHOUSES & DISTRIBUTION CENTERS, NC-
HOSPITALITY,
HEALTHCARE
Building Water Use
For the fixtures and fittings listed in Table 1, as applicable to
the project scope, reduce aggregate water
consumption by 20% from the baseline. Base calculations on the
volumes and flow rates shown in Table 1.
All newly installed toilets, urinals, private lavatory faucets, and
showerheads that are eligible for labeling
must be WaterSense labeled (or a local equivalent for projects
outside the U.S.).
Table 1. Baseline water consumption of fixtures and fittings
Fixture or fitting Baseline (IP units) Baseline (SI units)
Toilet (water closet)* 1.6 gpf
6 lpf
Urinal* 1.0 gpf 3.8 lpf
Public lavatory (restroom)
faucet
0.5 gpm at 60 psi** all others except
private applications
1.9 lpm at 415 kPa, all others
except private applications
Private lavatory faucets 2.2 gpm at 60 psi 8.3 lpm at 415 kPa
Kitchen faucet (excluding
faucets used exclusively for
filling operations)
2.2 gpm at 60 psi 8.3 lpm at 415 kPa
Showerhead* 2.5 gpm at 80 psi per shower stall 9.5 lpm at 550
kPa per shower
stall
53
Updated to reflect the April 14, 2017 LEED v4 Building Design
and Construction Addenda
* WaterSense label available for this
product type
gpf = gallons per flush
gpm = gallons per minute
psi = pounds per square inch
lpf = liters per flush
lpm = liters per minute
kPa = kilopascals
Appliance and Process Water Use
Install appliances, equipment, and processes within the project
scope that meet the requirements listed in
the tables below.
Table 2. Standards for appliances
Appliance Requirement
Residential clothes washers ENERGY STAR or performance
equivalent
Commercial clothes washers CEE Tier 3A
Residential dishwashers (standard and compact) ENERGY
STAR or performance equivalent
Prerinse spray valves ≤ 1.3 gpm (4.9 lpm)
Ice machine ENERGY STAR or performance equivalent and use
either air-cooled or closed-loop cooling, such as
chilled or condenser water system
gpm = gallons per minute
lpm = liters per minute
Table 3. Standards for processes
Process Requirement
Heat rejection and cooling No once-through cooling with
potable water for any
equipment or appliances that reject heat
Cooling towers and evaporative condensers Equip with
ity controllers and overflow alarms
maximum of 0.002% of recirculated water
volume for counterflow towers and 0.005% of
recirculated water flow for cross-flow towers
Healthcare, Retail, Schools, and Hospitality Only
In addition, water-consuming appliances, equipment, and
processes must meet the requirements listed in
Tables 4 and 5.
54
Updated to reflect the April 14, 2017 LEED v4 Building Design
and Construction Addenda
Table 4. Standards for appliances
Kitchen equipment Requirement (IP units) Requirement (SI
units)
Dishwasher Undercounter ≤ 1.6 gal/rack ≤ 6.0 liters/rack
Stationary,
single tank,
door
≤ 1.4 gal/rack ≤ 5.3 liters/rack
Single tank,
conveyor
≤ 1.0 gal/rack ≤ 3.8 liters/rack
Multiple tank,
conveyor
≤ 0.9 gal/rack ≤ 3.4 liters/rack
Flight machine ≤ 180 gal/hour ≤ 680 liters/hour
Food steamer Batch ≤ 6 gal/hour/pan ≤ 23 liters/hour/pan
Cook-to-order ≤ 10 gal/hour/pan ≤ 38 liters/hour/pan
Combination
oven,
Countertop or
stand
≤ 3.5 gal/hour/pan ≤ 13 liters/hour/pan
Roll-in ≤ 3.5 gal/hour/pan ≤ 13 liters/hour/pan
Table 5. Process requirements
Discharge water temperature tempering Where local
requirements limit discharge
temperature of fluids into drainage system, use
tempering device that runs water only when
equipment discharges hot water
OR
Provide thermal recovery heat exchanger that cools
drained discharge water below code-required
maximum discharge temperatures while
simultaneously preheating inlet makeup water
OR
If fluid is steam condensate, return it to boiler
Venturi-type flow-through vacuum generators or
aspirators
Use no device that generates vacuum by means of
water flow through device into drain
55
Updated to reflect the April 14, 2017 LEED v4 Building Design
and Construction Addenda
WE PREREQUISITE: BUILDING-LEVEL WATER METERING
Required
BD&C
This prerequisite applies to
Intent
To support water management and identify opportunities for
additional water savings by tracking water
consumption.
Requirements
NC, CS, SCHOOLS, RETAIL, DATA CENTERS,
WAREHOUSES & DISTRIBUTION CENTERS,
HOSPITALITY,
HEALTHCARE
Install permanent water meters that measure the total potable
water use for the building and associated
grounds. Meter data must be compiled into monthly and annual
summaries; meter readings can be
manual or automated.
Commit to sharing with USGBC the resulting whole-project
water usage data for a five-year period
beginning on the date the project accepts LEED certification or
typical occupancy, whichever comes first.
This commitment must carry forward for five years or until the
building changes ownership or lessee.
56
Updated to reflect the April 14, 2017 LEED v4 Building Design
and Construction Addenda
WE CREDIT: OUTDOOR WATER USE REDUCTION
BD&C
1–2 points
This credit applies to
–2 points)
–2 points)
–2 points)
–2 points)
–2 points)
–2 points)
1–2 points)
Intent
To reduce outdoor water consumption.
Requirements
NC, CS, SCHOOLS, RETAIL, DATA CENTERS,
WAREHOUSES & DISTRIBUTION CENTERS,
HOSPITALITY,
HEALTHCARE
Reduce outdoor water use through one of the following options.
Nonvegetated surfaces, such as
permeable or impermeable pavement, should be excluded from
landscape area calculations. Athletic
fields and playgrounds (if vegetated) and food gardens may be
included or excluded at the project team’s
discretion.
Option 1. No Irrigation Required (2 points except Healthcare, 1
point Healthcare)
Show that the landscape does not require a permanent irrigation
system beyond a maximum two-year
establishment period.
OR
Option 2. Reduced Irrigation (1-2 points except Healthcare, 1
point Healthcare)
Reduce the project’s landscape water requirement (LWR) by at
least 50% from the calculated baseline for
the site’s peak watering month. Reductions must first be
achieved through plant species selection and
irrigation system efficiency as calculated in the Environmental
Protection Agency (EPA) WaterSense
Water Budget Tool.
Additional reductions beyond 30% may be achieved using any
combination of efficiency, alternative water
sources, and smart scheduling technologies.
Table 1. Points for reducing irrigation water
Percentage reduction from baseline
Points (except
Healthcare)
Points
(Healthcare)
50% 1 1
100% 2 —
57
Updated to reflect the April 14, 2017 LEED v4 Building Design
and Construction Addenda
WE CREDIT: INDOOR WATER USE REDUCTION
BD&C
1–7 points
This credit applies to
–6 points)
–6 points)
–7 points)
–7 points)
–6 points)
–6 points)
–6 points)
–7 points)
Intent
To reduce indoor water consumption.
Requirements
NC, CS, SCHOOLS, NC-RETAIL, DATA CENTERS,
WAREHOUSES & DISTRIBUTION CENTERS, NC-
HOSPITALITY,
HEALTHCARE
Further reduce fixture and fitting water use from the calculated
baseline in WE Prerequisite Indoor Water
Use Reduction. Additional potable water savings can be earned
above the prerequisite level using
alternative water sources. Include fixtures and fittings
necessary to meet the needs of the occupants.
Some of these fittings and fixtures may be outside the tenant
space (for Commercial Interiors) or project
boundary (for New Construction). Points are awarded according
to Table 1.
Table 1. Points for reducing water use
Percentage
reduction
Points
(BD&C)
Points
(Schools,
Retail,
Hospitality,
Healthcare)
25% 1 1
30% 2 2
35% 3 3
40% 4 4
45% 5 5
50% 6 --
Schools, Retail, Hospitality, and Healthcare only
Meet the percentage reduction requirements above.
AND
58
Updated to reflect the April 14, 2017 LEED v4 Building Design
and Construction Addenda
Appliance and Process Water. Install equipment within the
project scope that meets the minimum
requirements in Table 2, 3, 4, or 5 . One point is awarded for
meeting all applicable requirements in any
one table. All applicable equipment listed in each table must
meet the standard.
Schools, Retail, and Healthcare projects can earn a second point
for meeting the requirements of two
tables.
Table 2. Compliant commercial washing machines
To use Table 2, the project must process at least 120,000 lbs (57
606 kg) of laundry per year.
Washing machine Requirement (IP units)
Requirement (SI units)
On-premise, minimum capacity
2,400 lbs (1 088 kg) per 8-hour
shift
Maximum 1.8 gals per pound * Maximum 7 liters per 0.45
kilograms *
* Based on equal quantities of heavy, medium, and light soil
laundry.
Table 3. Standards for commercial kitchen equipment
To use Table 3, the project must serve at least 100 meals per
day of operation. All process and appliance
equipment listed in the category of kitchen equipment and
present on the project must comply with the
standards.
Kitchen equipment
Requirement (IP units)
Requirement (SI units)
Dishwasher Undercounter ENERGY STAR ENERGY STAR or
performance
equivalent
Stationary,
single tank,
door
ENERGY STAR
ENERGY STAR or performance
equivalent
Single tank,
conveyor
ENERGY STAR ENERGY STAR or performance
equivalent
Multiple tank,
conveyor
ENERGY STAR ENERGY STAR or performance
equivalent
Flight machine ENERGY STAR ENERGY STAR or
performance
equivalent
Food steamer Batch (no
drain
connection)
≤ 2 gal/hour/pan including
condensate cooling water
≤ 7.5 liters/hour/pan including
condensate cooling water
Cook-to-order
(with drain
connection)
≤ 5 gal/hour/pan including
condensate cooling water
≤ 19 liters/hour/pan including
condensate cooling water
Combination
oven,
Countertop or
stand
≤ 1.5 gal/hour/panincluding
condensate cooling water
≤ 5.7 liters/hour/pan including
condensate cooling water
59
Updated to reflect the April 14, 2017 LEED v4 Building Design
and Construction Addenda
Roll-in ≤ 1.5 gal/hour/pan including
condensate cooling water
≤ 5.7 liters/hour/pan including
condensate cooling water
Food waste
disposer
Disposer 3-8 gpm, full load condition, 10
minute automatic shutoff; or 1 gpm,
no-load condition
11–30 lpm, full load condition,
10-min automatic shutoff; or 3.8
lpm, no-load condition
Scrap
collector
Maximum 2 gpm makeup water Maximum 7.6 lpm makeup
water
Pulper Maximum 2 gpm makeup water Maximum 7.6 lpm
makeup water
Strainer
basket
No additional water usage No additional water usage
gpm = gallons per minute
gph = gallons per hour
lpm = liters per minute
lph = liters per hour
Table 4. Compliant laboratory and medical equipment
To use Table 4, the project must be a medical or laboratory
facility.
Lab equipment Requirement (IP units)
Requirement (SI units)
Reverse-osmosis water purifier 75% recovery 75% recovery
Steam sterilizer For 60-inch sterilizer, 6.3 gal/U.S.
tray
For 48-inch sterilizer, 7.5 gal/U.S.
tray
For 1520-mm sterilizer, 28.5
liters/DIN tray
For 1220-mm sterilizer, 28.35
liters/DIN tray
Sterile process washer 0.35 gal/U.S. tray 1.3 liters/DIN tray
X-ray processor, 150 mm or
more in any dimension
Film processor water recycling unit
Digital imager, all sizes No water use
Table 5. Compliant municipal steam systems
To use Table 5, the project must be connected to a municipal or
district steam system that does not allow
the return of steam condensate.
Steam system Standard
Steam condensate disposal Cool municipally supplied steam
condensate (no return) to
drainage system with heat recovery system or reclaimed water
OR
Reclaim and use steam condensate 100% recovery and reuse
60
Updated to reflect the April 14, 2017 LEED v4 Building Design
and Construction Addenda
WE CREDIT: COOLING TOWER WATER USE
BD&C
1–2 points
This credit applies to
–2 points)
–2 points)
–2 points)
–2 points)
–2 points)
–2 points)
–2 points)
–2 points)
Intent
To conserve water used for cooling tower makeup while
controlling microbes, corrosion, and scale in the
condenser water system.
Requirements
NC, CS, SCHOOLS, RETAIL, DATA CENTERS,
WAREHOUSES & DISTRIBUTION CENTERS,
HOSPITALITY,
HEALTHCARE,
For cooling towers and evaporative condensers, conduct a one-
time potable water analysis, measuring at
least the five control parameters listed in Table 1.
Table 1. Maximum concentrations for parameters in condenser
water
Parameter Maximum level
Ca (as CaCO3) 1000 ppm
Total alkalinity 1000 ppm
SiO2 100 ppm
Cl- 250 ppm
Conductivity 2000 µS/cm
ppm = parts per million
µS/cm = micro siemens per centimeter
Calculate the number of cooling tower cycles by dividing the
maximum allowed concentration level of
each parameter by the actual concentration level of each
parameter found in the potable makeup water.
Limit cooling tower cycles to avoid exceeding maximum values
for any of these parameters.
Table 2. Points for cooling tower cycles
Cooling tower cycles Points
Maximum number of cycles achieved without exceeding any
filtration
levels or affecting operation of condenser water system (up to
maximum
of 10 cycles)
1
61
Updated to reflect the April 14, 2017 LEED v4 Building Design
and Construction Addenda
Achieve a minimum 10 cycles by increasing the level of
treatment in
condenser or make-up water
OR
Meet the minimum number of cycles to earn 1 point and use a
minimum
20% recycled nonpotable water
2
62
Updated to reflect the April 14, 2017 LEED v4 Building Design
and Construction Addenda
WE CREDIT: WATER METERING
BD&C
1 point
This credit applies to
thcare (1 point)
Intent
To support water management and identify opportunities for
additional water savings by tracking water
consumption.
Requirements
NC, CS, SCHOOLS, RETAIL, DATA CENTERS,
WAREHOUSES & DISTRIBUTION CENTERS,
HOSPITALITY,
HEALTHCARE
Install permanent water meters for two or more of the following
water subsystems, as applicable to the
project:
irrigated landscaped area. Calculate
the percentage of irrigated landscape area served as the total
metered irrigated landscape area
divided by the total irrigated landscape area. Landscape areas
fully covered with xeriscaping or
native vegetation that requires no routine irrigation may be
excluded from the calculation.
serving at least 80% of the indoor
fixtures and fitting described in WE Prerequisite Indoor Water
Use Reduction, either directly or by
deducting all other measured water use from the measured total
water consumption of the
building and grounds.
installed domestic hot water heating
capacity (including both tanks and on-demand heaters).
d annual water use of 100,000
gallons (378 500 liters) or more, or
boiler of more than 500,000 BtuH (150 kW). A single makeup
meter may record flows for multiple
boilers.
A reclaimed water system with a
makeup water connection must also be metered so that the true
reclaimed water component can
be determined.
water consumption for process end
uses, such as humidification systems, dishwashers, clothes
washers, pools, and other
subsystems using process water.
Healthcare Projects only
In addition to the requirements above, install water meters in
any five of the following:
-osmosis, de-ionized);
63
Updated to reflect the April 14, 2017 LEED v4 Building Design
and Construction Addenda
and processing department;
areas;
-looped hydronic system makeup water; and
-water makeup for domestic hot water systems.
64
Updated to reflect the April 14, 2017 LEED v4 Building Design
and Construction Addenda
ENERGY AND ATMOSPHERE
EA PREREQUISITE: FUNDAMENTAL COMMISSIONING
AND VERIFICATION
Required
BD&C
This prerequisite applies to
Intent
To support the design, construction, and eventual operation of a
project that meets the owner’s project
requirements for energy, water, indoor environmental quality,
and durability.
Requirements
NC, CS, SCHOOLS, RETAIL, DATA CENTERS,
WAREHOUSES & DISTRIBUTION CENTERS,
HOSPITALITY,
HEALTHCARE
Commissioning Process Scope
Complete the following commissioning (Cx) process activities
for mechanical, electrical, plumbing, and
renewable energy systems and assemblies, in accordance with
ASHRAE Guideline 0-2005 and ASHRAE
Guideline 1.1–2007 for HVAC&R Systems, as they relate to
energy, water, indoor environmental quality,
and durability.
Requirements for exterior enclosures are limited to inclusion in
the owner’s project requirements (OPR)
and basis of design (BOD), as well as the review of the OPR,
BOD and project design. NIBS Guideline 3-
2012 for Exterior Enclosures provides additional guidance.
The commissioning authority (CxA) must do the following:
to the
construction documents.
process.
nt all findings and recommendations and report
directly to the owner throughout the
process.
The review of the exterior enclosure design may be performed
by a qualified member of the design or
65
Updated to reflect the April 14, 2017 LEED v4 Building Design
and Construction Addenda
construction team (or an employee of that firm) who is not
directly responsible for design of the building
envelope.
Commissioning Authority
By the end of the design development phase, engage a
commissioning authority with the following
qualifications.
experience on at least two building
projects with a similar scope of work. The experience must
extend from early design phase
through at least 10 months of occupancy;
independent consultant, or an employee
of the design or construction firm who is not part of the
project’s design or construction team, or a
disinterested subcontractor of the design or construction team.
o For projects smaller than 20,000 square feet (1 860 square
meters), the CxA may be a
qualified member of the design or construction team. In all
cases, the CxA must report
his or her findings directly to the owner.
Project teams that intend to pursue EA Credit Enhanced
Commissioning should note a difference in the
CxA qualifications: for the credit, the CxA may not be an
employee of the design or construction firm nor a
subcontractor to the construction firm.
Current Facilities Requirements and Operations and
Maintenance Plan
Prepare and maintain a current facilities requirements and
operations and maintenance plan that contains
the information necessary to operate the building efficiently.
The plan must include the following:
-time schedules;
any changes in schedules or setpoints for different seasons,
days of the week, and times of day;
systems and equipment;
described in the systems narrative; and
commissioning requirements, ongoing
commissioning tasks, and continuous tasks for critical facilities.
Data Centers only
For small projects with computer room peak cooling loads less
than 2,000,000 Btu/h (600 kW) or a total
computer room peak cooling load less than 600,000 Btu/h (175
kW), the CxA may be a qualified
employee of the design or construction team.
66
Updated to reflect the April 14, 2017 LEED v4 Building Design
and Construction Addenda
EA PREREQUISITE: MINIMUM ENERGY PERFORMANCE
Required
BD&C
This prerequisite applies to
itality
Intent
To reduce the environmental and economic harms of excessive
energy use by achieving a minimum level
of energy efficiency for the building and its systems.
Requirements
NC, CS, SCHOOLS, RETAIL, WAREHOUSES &
DISTRIBUTION CENTERS, HOSPITALITY, HEALTHCARE
Option 1. Whole-Building Energy Simulation
Demonstrate an improvement of 5% for new construction, 3%
for major renovations, or 2% for core and
shell projects in the proposed building performance rating
compared with the baseline building
performance rating. Calculate the baseline building performance
according to ANSI/ASHRAE/IESNA
Standard 90.1–2010, Appendix G, with errata (or a USGBC-
approved equivalent standard for projects
outside the U.S.), using a simulation model.
Projects must meet the minimum percentage savings before
taking credit for renewable energy systems.
The proposed design must meet the following criteria:
ANSI/ASHRAE/IESNA Standard 90.1–2010, with
errata (or a USGBC-approved equivalent standard for projects
outside the U.S.);
associated with the building project;
and
Standard 90.1–2010, Appendix G,
with errata (or a USGBC-approved equivalent standard for
projects outside the U.S.).
Document the energy modeling input assumptions for
unregulated loads. Unregulated loads should be
modeled accurately to reflect the actual expected energy
consumption of the building.
If unregulated loads are not identical for both the baseline and
the proposed building performance rating,
and the simulation program cannot accurately model the
savings, follow the exceptional calculation
method (ANSI/ASHRAE/IESNA Standard 90.1–2010, G2.5).
Alternatively, use the COMNET Modeling
Guidelines and Procedures to document measures that reduce
unregulated loads.
Retail only
For Option 1, Whole-Building Energy Simulation, process loads
for retail may include refrigeration
equipment, cooking and food preparation, clothes washing, and
other major support appliances. Many of
the industry standard baseline conditions for commercial
kitchen equipment and refrigeration are defined
67
Updated to reflect the April 14, 2017 LEED v4 Building Design
and Construction Addenda
in Appendix 3, Tables 1–4. No additional documentation is
necessary to substantiate these predefined
baseline systems as industry standard.
OR
Option 2. Prescriptive Compliance: ASHRAE 50% Advanced
Energy Design Guide
Comply with the mandatory and prescriptive provisions of
ANSI/ASHRAE/IESNA Standard 90.1–2010,
with errata (or a USGBC-approved equivalent standard for
projects outside the U.S.).
Comply with the HVAC and service water heating requirements,
including equipment efficiency,
economizers, ventilation, and ducts and dampers, in Chapter 4,
Design Strategies and Recommendations
by Climate Zone, for the appropriate ASHRAE 50% Advanced
Energy Design Guide and climate zone:
Medium Office Buildings, for office
buildings smaller than 100,000 square feet (9 290 square
meters);
Large Box Retail Buildings, for
retail buildings with 20,000 to 100,000 square feet (1 860 to 9
290 square meters);
–12
School Buildings; or
Hospitals, for hospitals over 100,000
square feet (9 290 square meters).
For projects outside the U.S., consult
ASHRAE/ASHRAE/IESNA Standard 90.1–2010, Appendixes B
and
D, to determine the appropriate climate zone.
OPTION 3. Prescriptive Compliance: Advanced Buildings™
Core Performance™ Guide
Comply with the mandatory and prescriptive provisions of
ANSI/ASHRAE/IESNA Standard 90.1-2010,
with errata (or USGBC approved equivalent standard for
projects outside the U.S.).
Comply with Section 1: Design Process Strategies, Section 2:
Core Performance Requirements, and the
following three strategies from Section 3: Enhanced
Performance Strategies, as applicable. Where
standards conflict, follow the more stringent of the two. For
projects outside the U.S., consult
ANSI/ASHRAE/IESNA Standard 90.1-2010, Appendixes B and
D, to determine the appropriate climate
zone.
3.5 Supply Air Temperature Reset (VAV)
3.9 Premium Economizer Performance
3.10 Variable Speed Control
To be eligible for Option 3, the project must be less than
100,000 square feet (9 290 square meters).
Note: Healthcare, warehouse or laboratory projects are
ineligible for Option 3.
DATA CENTERS
Whole-Building Energy Simulation
Demonstrate a 5% improvement in the proposed performance
rating over the baseline performance
rating. To determine total energy cost savings, create two
models, one for building energy cost and the
other for IT equipment energy cost. Calculate the baseline
building performance according to
ANSI/ASHRAE/IESNA Standard 90.1–2010, Appendix G, with
errata (or a USGBC-approved equivalent
standard for projects outside the U.S.), using a simulation
model for the whole building and data center
modeling guidelines.
Determine the power utilization effectiveness (PUE) value of
the proposed design.
68
Updated to reflect the April 14, 2017 LEED v4 Building Design
and Construction Addenda
For this prerequisite, a minimum of 2% of the 5% energy
savings must come from building power and
cooling infrastructure.
Projects must meet the minimum percentage savings before
taking credit for renewable energy systems.
The proposed design must meet the following criteria:
ANSI/ASHRAE/IESNA Standard 90.1–2010, with
errata (or a USGBC-approved equivalent standard for projects
outside the U.S.);
associated with the building project;
and
ANSI/ASHRAE/IESNA Standard
90.1–2010, Appendix G, with errata (or a USGBC-approved
equivalent standard for projects
outside the U.S.), and data center modeling guidelines.
For data centers, regulated energy includes cooling units for
computer and data processing rooms, critical
power conditioning equipment, critical distribution equipment,
heat rejection plants, and mechanical and
electrical support rooms.
Include in process loads both the unregulated load and the IT
equipment load. The IT load comprises
critical systems and electrical power transformation, which may
include servers, storage and networking
power use, and operations affecting monthly server CPU
utilization percentages.
Develop two sets of IT load models using two scenarios, one at
the maximum estimated IT load rating
and the second at the startup IT rating expected at the time of
commissioning.
Document the energy modeling input assumptions for
unregulated loads. Unregulated loads should be
modeled accurately to reflect the actual expected energy
consumption of the building.
If unregulated loads are not identical for both the baseline and
the proposed building performance rating,
and the simulation model cannot accurately model the savings,
follow the exceptional calculation method
(ANSI/ASHRAE/IESNA Standard 90.1–2010, G2.5) to
document measures that reduce unregulated
loads.
69
Updated to reflect the April 14, 2017 LEED v4 Building Design
and Construction Addenda
EA PREREQUISITE: BUILDING-LEVEL ENERGY
METERING
Required
BD&C
This prerequisite applies to
Intent
To support energy management and identify opportunities for
additional energy savings by tracking
building-level energy use.
Requirements
NC, SCHOOLS, RETAIL, DATA CENTERS, WAREHOUSES &
DISTRIBUTION CENTERS, HOSPITALITY, HEALTHCARE
Install new or use existing building-level energy meters, or
submeters that can be aggregated to provide
building-level data representing total building energy
consumption (electricity, natural gas, chilled water,
steam, fuel oil, propane, biomass, etc). Utility-owned meters
capable of aggregating building-level
resource use are acceptable.
Commit to sharing with USGBC the resulting energy
consumption data and electrical demand data (if
metered) for a five-year period beginning on the date the project
accepts LEED certification. At a
minimum, energy consumption must be tracked at one-month
intervals.
This commitment must carry forward for five years or until the
building changes ownership or lessee.
CS
Install new or use existing base building-level energy meters, or
submeters that can be aggregated to
provide base building-level data representing total building
energy consumption (electricity, natural gas,
chilled water, steam, fuel oil, propane, etc.). Utility-owned
meters capable of aggregating base building-
level resource use are acceptable.
Commit to sharing with USGBC the resulting energy
consumption data and electrical demand data (if
metered) for a five-year period beginning on the date the project
accepts LEED certification or typical
occupancy, whichever comes first. At a minimum, energy
consumption must be tracked at one-month
intervals.
This commitment must carry forward for five years or until the
building changes ownership or lessee.
70
Updated to reflect the April 14, 2017 LEED v4 Building Design
and Construction Addenda
EA PREREQUISITE: FUNDAMENTAL REFRIGERANT
MANAGEMENT
Required
BD&C
This prerequisite applies to
Intent
To reduce stratospheric ozone depletion.
Requirements
NC, CS, SCHOOLS, RETAIL, DATA CENTERS,
WAREHOUSES & DISTRIBUTION CENTERS,
HOSPITALITY,
HEALTHCARE
Do not use chlorofluorocarbon (CFC)-based refrigerants in new
heating, ventilating, air-conditioning, and
refrigeration (HVAC&R) systems. When reusing existing
HVAC&R equipment, complete a comprehensive
CFC phase-out conversion before project completion. Phase-out
plans extending beyond the project
completion date will be considered on their merits.
Existing small HVAC&R units (defined as containing less than
0.5 pound [225 grams] of refrigerant) and
other equipment, such as standard refrigerators, small water
coolers, and any other equipment that
contains less than 0.5 pound (225 grams) of refrigerant, are
exempt.
71
Updated to reflect the April 14, 2017 LEED v4 Building Design
and Construction Addenda
EA CREDIT: ENHANCED COMMISSIONING
BD&C
2-6 points
This credit applies to
-6 points)
-6 points)
-6 points)
-6 points)
-6 points)
-6 points)
-6 points)
-6 points)
Intent
To further support the design, construction, and eventual
operation of a project that meets the owner’s
project requirements for energy, water, indoor environmental
quality, and durability.
Requirements
NC, CS, SCHOOLS, RETAIL, DATA CENTERS,
WAREHOUSES & DISTRIBUTION CENTERS,
HOSPITALITY,
HEALTHCARE
Implement, or have in place a contract to implement, the
following commissioning process activities in
addition to those required under EA Prerequisite Fundamental
Commissioning and Verification.
Commissioning Authority
experience on at least two building
projects with a similar scope of work. The experience must
extend from early design phase
through at least 10 months of occupancy;
mployee of the owner, an
independent consultant, or a disinterested
subcontractor of the design team.
Option 1. Enhanced Systems Commissioning (3-4 points)
Path 1: Enhanced Commissioning (3 points)
Complete the following commissioning process (CxP) activities
for mechanical, electrical, plumbing, and
renewable energy systems and assemblies in accordance with
ASHRAE Guideline 0–2005 and ASHRAE
Guideline 1.1–2007 for HVAC&R systems, as they relate to
energy, water, indoor environmental quality,
and durability.
The commissioning authority must do the following:
construction documents.
requirements in construction documents.
effectiveness.
completion.
on-going commissioning plan.
Include all enhanced commissioning tasks in the OPR and BOD.
72
Updated to reflect the April 14, 2017 LEED v4 Building Design
and Construction Addenda
OR
Path 2: Enhanced and Monitoring-Based Commissioning (4
points)
Achieve Path 1.
AND
Develop monitoring-based procedures and identify points to be
measured and evaluated to assess
performance of energy- and water-consuming systems.
Include the procedures and measurement points in the
commissioning plan. Address the following:
data access);
trend monitoring;
es for tracked points and metered
values (where appropriate,
predictive algorithms may be used to compare ideal values with
actual values);
between systems, out-of-sequence
operation of systems components, and energy and water usage
profiles;
errors and deficiencies;
analyses in the first year of occupancy (at
least quarterly).
Update the systems manual with any modifications or new
settings, and give the reason for any
modifications from the original design.
AND/OR
Option 2. Envelope Commissioning (2 points)
Fulfill the requirements in EA Prerequisite Fundamental
Commissioning and Verification as they apply to
the building’s thermal envelope in addition to mechanical and
electrical systems and assemblies.
Complete the following commissioning process (CxP) activities
for the building’s thermal envelope in
accordance with ASHRAE Guideline 0–2005 and the National
Institute of Building Sciences (NIBS)
Guideline 3–2012, Exterior Enclosure Technical Requirements
for the Commissioning Process, as they
relate to energy, water, indoor environmental quality, and
durability.
Commissioning authority must complete the following:
construction documents.
on of operator and occupant training
requirements in construction documents.
effectiveness.
0 months after substantial
completion.
-going commissioning plan.
Data Centers only
Projects that select Option 1 must complete the following
commissioning process.
73
Updated to reflect the April 14, 2017 LEED v4 Building Design
and Construction Addenda
For small projects with peak cooling loads less than 2,000,000
Btu/h (600 kW), or a total computer room
peak cooling load less than 600,000 Btu/h (175 kW), the CxA
must perform the following activities:
ast one commissioning verification review of the
owner’s project requirements, basis
of design, and design documents before mid-construction
documents development;
-check the review comments in all subsequent design
submissions; and
an additional full verification review at 95%
completion of the design documents and
basis of design.
For projects with peak cooling loads 2,000,000 Btu/h (600 kW)
or more, or a total computer room peak
cooling load 600,000 Btu/h (175 kW) or more, the CxA must
conduct at least three verification reviews of
the basis of design:
of design development;
midconstruction documents; and
documents, verifying achievement of the
owner’s project requirements and adjudication of previous
review comments.
74
Updated to reflect the April 14, 2017 LEED v4 Building Design
and Construction Addenda
EA CREDIT: OPTIMIZE ENERGY PERFORMANCE
BD&C
1–20 points
This credit applies to
–18 points)
–18 points)
–16 points)
–18 points)
–18 points)
–18 points)
–18 points)
–20 points)
Intent
To achieve increasing levels of energy performance beyond the
prerequisite standard to reduce
environmental and economic harms associated with excessive
energy use.
Requirements
NC, CS, SCHOOLS, RETAIL, WAREHOUSES &
DISTRIBUTION CENTERS, HOSPITALITY, HEALTHCARE
Establish an energy performance target no later than the
schematic design phase. The target must be
established as kBtu per square foot-year (kW per square meter-
year) of source energy use.
Choose one of the options below.
Option 1. Whole-Building Energy Simulation (1–18 points
except Schools and Healthcare, 1–16
points Schools, 1–20 points Healthcare)
Analyze efficiency measures during the design process and
account for the results in design decision
making. Use energy simulation of efficiency opportunities, past
energy simulation analyses for similar
buildings, or published data (e.g., Advanced Energy Design
Guides) from analyses for similar buildings.
Analyze efficiency measures, focusing on load reduction and
HVAC-related strategies (passive measures
are acceptable) appropriate for the facility. Project potential
energy savings and holistic project cost
implications related to all affected systems.
Project teams pursuing the Integrative Process credit must
complete the basic energy analysis for that
credit before conducting the energy simulation.
Follow the criteria in EA Prerequisite Minimum Energy
Performance to demonstrate a percentage
improvement in the proposed building performance rating
compared with the baseline. Points are
awarded according to Table 1.
Table 1. Points for percentage improvement in energy
performance
New
Construction
Major Renovation
Core and Shell
Points
(except
Schools,
Healthcare)
Points
Healthcare
Points Schools
6% 4% 3% 1 3 1
75
Updated to reflect the April 14, 2017 LEED v4 Building Design
and Construction Addenda
8% 6% 5% 2 4 2
10% 8% 7% 3 5 3
12% 10% 9% 4 6 4
14% 12% 11% 5 7 5
16% 14% 13% 6 8 6
18% 16% 15% 7 9 7
20% 18% 17% 8 10 8
22% 20% 19% 9 11 9
24% 22% 21% 10 12 10
26% 24% 23% 11 13 11
29% 27% 26% 12 14 12
32% 30% 29% 13 15 13
35% 33% 32% 14 16 14
38% 36% 35% 15 17 15
42% 40% 39% 16 18 16
46% 44% 43% 17 19 -
50% 48% 47% 18 20 -
Retail only
For all process loads, define a clear baseline for comparison
with the proposed improvements. The
baselines in Appendix 3, Tables 1–4, represent industry
standards and may be used without additional
documentation. Calculate the baseline and design as follows:
covered in Tables 1–4, indicate
hourly energy use for proposed and budget equipment, along
with estimated daily use hours. Use
the total estimated appliance/equipment energy use in the
energy simulation model as a plug
load. Reduced use time (schedule change) is not a category of
energy improvement in this credit.
ENERGY STAR ratings and evaluations are a valid basis for
performing this calculation.
-by-space
method of determining allowed
lighting power under ANSI/ASHRAE/IESNA Standard 90.1–
2010, with errata (or a USGBC-
approved equivalent standard for projects outside the U.S.), to
determine the appropriate
baseline for both the general building space and the display
lighting.
-wired refrigeration loads, model the
effect of energy performance
improvements with a simulation program designed to account
for refrigeration equipment.
OR
Option 2. Prescriptive Compliance: ASHRAE Advanced Energy
Design Guide (1–6 points)
To be eligible for Option 2, projects must use Option 2 in EA
Prerequisite Minimum Energy Performance.
Implement and document compliance with the applicable
recommendations and standards in Chapter 4,
Design Strategies and Recommendations by Climate Zone, for
the appropriate ASHRAE 50% Advanced
76
Updated to reflect the April 14, 2017 LEED v4 Building Design
and Construction Addenda
Energy Design Guide and climate zone. For projects outside the
U.S., consult ASHRAE/ASHRAE/IESNA
Standard 90.1–2010, Appendixes B and D, to determine the
appropriate climate zone.
ASHRAE 50% Advanced Energy Design Guide for Small to
Medium Office Buildings
and continuous air barriers (1
point)
(1 point)
ASHRAE 50% Advanced Energy Design Guide for Medium to
Large Box Retail Buildings
uilding envelope, opaque: roofs, walls, floors, slabs, doors,
and vestibules (1 point)
- all orientations (1
point)
floor (1 point)
l interior lighting for sales floor (1 point)
point)
ASHRAE 50% Advanced Energy Design Guide for K–12 School
Buildings
ls, floors, slabs, and
doors (1 point)
(1 point)
controls, and
kitchen equipment (1 point)
ASHRAE 50% Advanced Energy Design Guide for Large
Hospitals
vestibules, and continuous air
barriers (1 point)
: vertical fenestration (1 point)
driven) and interior finishes (1
point)
kitchen equipment (1 point)
Retail only
Meet the requirements of Option 2 and comply with the
prescriptive measures in Appendix 3, Tables 1–4,
for 90% of total energy consumption for all process equipment.
DATA CENTERS
Whole-Building Energy Simulation
Analyze efficiency measures focused on IT load reduction and
HVAC-related strategies (air-side
economizers, hot aisle–cold aisle, etc.). Project the potential
energy savings and cost implications for all
affected systems.
Follow the criteria in EA Prerequisite Minimum Energy
Performance to demonstrate a percentage
improvement in the proposed performance rating compared with
the baseline.
Use energy cost savings from both the building and IT to
determine the total percentage reduction.
77
Updated to reflect the April 14, 2017 LEED v4 Building Design
and Construction Addenda
EA CREDIT: ADVANCED ENERGY METERING
BD&C
1 point
This credit applies to
ata Centers (1 point)
Intent
To support energy management and identify opportunities for
additional energy savings by tracking
building-level and system-level energy use.
Requirements
NC, SCHOOLS, RETAIL, DATA CENTERS, WAREHOUSES &
DISTRIBUTION CENTERS, HOSPITALITY, HEALTHCARE
Install advanced energy metering for the following:
-building energy sources used by the building; and
the total annual consumption of the
building.
The advanced energy metering must have the following
characteristics.
one hour or less, and transmit data to
a remote location.
Whole-building electricity meters
should record the power factor, if appropriate.
network,
building automation system, wireless
network, or comparable communication infrastructure.
least 36 months.
t be capable of reporting hourly,
daily, monthly, and annual energy
use.
CS
Install meters for future tenant spaces so that tenants will be
capable of independently metering energy
consumption (electricity, chilled water, etc.) for all systems
dedicated to their space. Provide a sufficient
number of meters to capture total tenant energy use with a
minimum of one meter per energy source per
floor.
Install advanced energy metering for all base building energy
sources used by the building.
The advanced energy metering must have the following
characteristics.
one hour or less, and transmit data to
a remote location.
Whole-building electricity meters
should record the power factor, if appropriate.
78
Updated to reflect the April 14, 2017 LEED v4 Building Design
and Construction Addenda
building automation system, wireless
network, or comparable communication infrastructure.
least 36 months.
hourly,
daily, monthly, and annual energy
use.
79
Updated to reflect the April 14, 2017 LEED v4 Building Design
and Construction Addenda
EA CREDIT: DEMAND RESPONSE
BD&C
1–2 points
This credit applies to
–2 points)
Core & Shell (1–2 points)
–2 points)
–2 points)
–2 points)
–2 points)
–2 points)
–2 points)
Intent
To increase participation in demand response technologies and
programs that make energy generation
and distribution systems more efficient, increase grid
reliability, and reduce greenhouse gas emissions.
Requirements
NC, CS, SCHOOLS, RETAIL, DATA CENTERS,
WAREHOUSES & DISTRIBUTION CENTERS,
HOSPITALITY,
HEALTHCARE
Design building and equipment for participation in demand
response programs through load shedding or
shifting. On-site electricity generation does not meet the intent
of this credit.
Case 1. Demand Response Program Available (2 points)
complete the following
activities. Design a system with the capability for real-time,
fully-automated DR based on
external initiation by a DR Program Provider. Semi-automated
DR may be utilized in practice.
-year DR participation amount
contractual commitment with a
qualified DR program provider, with the intention of multiyear
renewal, for at least 10% of the
estimated peak electricity demand. Peak demand is determined
under EA Prerequisite
Minimum Energy Performance.
commitment during a Demand
Response event.
commissioning authority, including
participation in at least one full test of the DR plan.
Case 2. Demand Response Program Not Available (1 point)
Provide infrastructure to take advantage of future demand
response programs or dynamic, real-time
pricing programs and complete the following activities.
ability for the building automation
system to accept an external price or control signal.
0% of
building estimated peak
electricity demand. Peak demand is determined under EA
Prerequisite Minimum Energy
Performance.
commissioning authority, including
participation in at least one full test of the DR plan.
in future DR programs.
80
Updated to reflect the April 14, 2017 LEED v4 Building Design
and Construction Addenda
EA CREDIT: RENEWABLE ENERGY PRODUCTION
BD&C
1–3 points
This credit applies to
–3 points)
–3 points)
–3 points)
–3 points)
–3 points)
–3 points)
–3 points)
–3 points)
Intent
To reduce the environmental and economic harms associated
with fossil fuel energy by increasing self-
supply of renewable energy.
Requirements
NC, CS, SCHOOLS, RETAIL, DATA CENTERS,
WAREHOUSES & DISTRIBUTION CENTERS,
HOSPITALITY,
HEALTHCARE
Use renewable energy systems to offset building energy costs.
Calculate the percentage of renewable
energy with the following equation:
% renewable energy =
Equivalent cost of usable energy produced by the renewable
energy
system
Total building annual energy cost
Use the building’s annual energy cost, calculated in EA
Prerequisite Minimum Energy Performance, if
Option 1 was pursued; otherwise use the U.S. Department of
Energy’s Commercial Buildings Energy
Consumption Survey (CBECS) database to estimate energy use
and cost.
The use of solar gardens or community renewable energy
systems is allowed if both of the following
requirements are met.
lease agreement
for a period of at least 10
years.
facility claiming the use.
Credit is based on the percentage of ownership or percentage of
use assigned in the lease agreement.
Points are awarded according to Table 1.
81
Updated to reflect the April 14, 2017 LEED v4 Building Design
and Construction Addenda
Table 1. Points for renewable energy
Percentage renewable
energy
Points
(except CS) Points (CS)
1% 1 1
3% — 2
5% 2 3
10% 3 —
82
Updated to reflect the April 14, 2017 LEED v4 Building Design
and Construction Addenda
EA CREDIT: ENHANCED REFRIGERANT MANAGEMENT
BD&C
1 point
This credit applies to
l (1 point)
Intent
To reduce ozone depletion and support early compliance with
the Montreal Protocol while minimizing
direct contributions to climate change.
Requirements
NC, CS, SCHOOLS, DATA CENTERS, WAREHOUSES &
DISTRIBUTION CENTERS, HOSPITALITY, HEALTHCARE
Option 1. No Refrigerants or Low-Impact Refrigerants (1 point)
Do not use refrigerants, or use only refrigerants (naturally
occurring or synthetic) that have an ozone
depletion potential (ODP) of zero and a global warming
potential (GWP) of less than 50.
OR
Option 2. Calculation of Refrigerant Impact (1 point)
Select refrigerants that are used in heating, ventilating, air-
conditioning, and refrigeration (HVAC&R)
equipment to minimize or eliminate the emission of compounds
that contribute to ozone depletion and
climate change. The combination of all new and existing base
building and tenant HVAC&R equipment
that serve the project must comply with the following formula:
IP units
LCGW
P
+
LCOD
P
x
10
5
≤ 100
SI units
LCGW
P
+
LCOD
P
x
10
5
≤ 13
Calculation definitions for LCGWP + LCODP x
105 ≤ 100
(IP units)
Calculation definitions for LCGWP + LCODP x
105 ≤ 13
(SI units)
LCODP = [ODPr x (Lr x Life +Mr) x Rc]/Life LCODP = [ODPr
x (Lr x Life +Mr) x Rc]/Life
LCGWP = [GWPr x (Lr x Life +Mr) x Rc]/Life LCGWP =
[GWPr x (Lr x Life +Mr) x Rc]/Life
LCODP: Lifecycle Ozone Depletion Potential
(lb CFC 11/Ton-Year)
LCODP: Lifecycle Ozone Depletion Potential
(kg CFC 11/(kW/year))
LCGWP: Lifecycle Direct Global Warming
Potential
LCGWP: Lifecycle Direct Global Warming
Potential
83
Updated to reflect the April 14, 2017 LEED v4 Building Design
and Construction Addenda
(lb CO2/Ton-Year) (kg CO2/kW-year)
GWPr: Global Warming Potential of Refrigerant
(0 to 12,000 lb CO2/lbr)
GWPr: Global Warming Potential of Refrigerant
(0 to 12,000 kg CO2/kg r)
ODPr: Ozone Depletion Potential of Refrigerant
(0 to 0.2 lb CFC 11/lbr)
ODPr: Ozone Depletion Potential of Refrigerant
(0 to 0.2 kg CFC 11/kg r)
Lr: Refrigerant Leakage Rate
(2.0%)
Lr: Refrigerant Leakage Rate
(2.0%)
Mr: End-of-life Refrigerant Loss
(10%)
Mr: End-of-life Refrigerant Loss
(10%)
Rc: Refrigerant Charge
(0.5 to 5.0 lbs of refrigerant per ton of gross AHRI
rated cooling capacity)
Rc: Refrigerant Charge
(0.065 to 0.65 kg of refrigerant per kW of AHRI
rated or Eurovent Certified cooling capacity)
Life: Equipment Life
(10 years; default based on equipment type,
unless otherwise demonstrated)
Life: Equipment Life
(10 years; default based on equipment type,
unless otherwise demonstrated)
For multiple types of equipment, calculate a weighted average
of all base building HVAC&R equipment,
using the following formula:
IP units SI units
[ ∑ ( LCGWP + LCODP x 105 ) x Qunit ]
≤ 100
[ ∑ ( LCGWP + LCODP x 105 ) x Qunit ]
≤ 13
——————————————————
Qtotal
——————————————————
Qtotal
Calculation definitions for
[ ∑ (LCGWP + LCODP x 105) x Qunit ] / Qtotal
≤ 100
(IP units)
Calculation definitions for
[ ∑ (LCGWP + LCODP x 105) x Qunit ] / Qtotal
≤ 13
(SI units)
Qunit = Gross AHRI rated cooling capacity of an
individual HVAC or refrigeration unit (Tons)
Qunit = Eurovent Certified cooling capacity of an
individual HVAC or refrigeration unit (kW)
Qtotal = Total gross AHRI rated cooling capacity
of all HVAC or refrigeration
Qtotal = Total Eurovent Certified cooling
capacity of all HVAC or refrigeration (kW)
RETAIL NC
Meet Option 1 or 2 for all HVAC systems.
Stores with commercial refrigeration systems must comply with
the following.
-ozone-depleting refrigerants.
no more than 1.75 pounds of
refrigerant per 1,000 Btu/h (2.72 kg of refrigerant per kW) total
evaporator cooling load.
84
Updated to reflect the April 14, 2017 LEED v4 Building Design
and Construction Addenda
-wide annual refrigerant
emissions rate of no more than 15%.
Conduct leak testing using the procedures in GreenChill’s best
practices guideline for leak
tightness at installation.
Alternatively, stores with commercial refrigeration systems may
provide proof of attainment of EPA
GreenChill’s silver-level store certification for newly
constructed stores.
85
Updated to reflect the April 14, 2017 LEED v4 Building Design
and Construction Addenda
EA CREDIT: GREEN POWER AND CARBON OFFSETS
BD&C
1–2 points
This credit applies to
–2 points)
–2 points)
–2 points)
–2 points)
–2 points)
–2 points)
–2 points)
–2 points)
Intent
To encourage the reduction of greenhouse gas emissions
through the use of grid-source, renewable
energy technologies and carbon mitigation projects.
Requirements
NC, CS, SCHOOLS, RETAIL, DATA CENTERS,
WAREHOUSES & DISTRIBUTION CENTERS,
HOSPITALITY,
HEALTHCARE
Engage in a contract for qualified resources that have come
online since January 1, 2005, for a minimum
of five years, to be delivered at least annually. The contract
must specify the provision of at least 50% or
100% of the project’s energy from green power, carbon offsets,
or renewable energy certificates (RECs).
Green power and RECs must be Green-e Energy certified or the
equivalent. RECs can only be used to
mitigate the effects of Scope 2, electricity use.
Carbon offsets may be used to mitigate Scope 1 or Scope 2
emissions on a metric ton of carbon dioxide–
equivalent basis and must be Green-e Climate certified, or the
equivalent.
For U.S. projects, the offsets must be from greenhouse gas
emissions reduction projects within the U.S.
Determine the percentage of green power or offsets based on the
quantity of energy consumed, not the
cost. Points are awarded according to Table 1.
Table 1. Points for energy from green power or carbon offsets
Percentage of total energy addressed by green power,
RECs and/or offsets
Points
50% 1
100% 2
Use the project’s annual energy consumption, calculated in EA
Prerequisite Minimum Energy
Performance, if Option 1 was pursued; otherwise use the U.S.
Department of Energy’s Commercial
Buildings Energy Consumption Survey (CBECS) database to
estimate energy use.
CS Only
A core and shell building’s energy is defined as the energy
usage of the core and shell floor area as
defined by the Building Owners and Managers Association
(BOMA) standards, but not less than 15% of
the project’s floor area.
86
Updated to reflect the April 14, 2017 LEED v4 Building Design
and Construction Addenda
MATERIALS AND RESOURCES (MR)
MR PREREQUISITE: STORAGE AND COLLECTION OF
RECYCLABLES
Required
BD&C
This prerequisite applies to
ls
Intent
To reduce the waste that is generated by building occupants and
hauled to and disposed of in landfills.
Requirements
NC, CS, SCHOOLS, DATA CENTERS, WAREHOUSES &
DISTRIBUTION CENTERS, HOSPITALITY NC,
HEALTHCARE
Provide dedicated areas accessible to waste haulers and building
occupants for the collection and
storage of recyclable materials for the entire building.
Collection and storage areas may be separate
locations. Recyclable materials must include mixed paper,
corrugated cardboard, glass, plastics, and
metals. Take appropriate measures for the safe collection,
storage, and disposal of two of the following:
batteries, mercury-containing lamps, and electronic waste.
RETAIL NC
Conduct a waste stream study to identify the retail project’s top
five recyclable waste streams, by either
weight or volume, using consistent metrics. Based on the waste
stream study, list the top four waste
streams for which collection and storage space will be provided.
If no information is available on waste
streams for the project, use data from similar operations to
make projections. Retailers with existing
stores of similar size and function can use historical
information from their other locations.
Provide dedicated areas accessible to waste haulers and building
occupants for the separation,
collection, and storage of recyclable materials for at least the
top four recyclable waste streams identified
by the waste study. Locate the collection and storage bins close
the source of recyclable waste. If any of
the top four waste streams are batteries, mercury-containing
lamps, or electronic waste, take appropriate
measures for safe collection, storage, and disposal.
87
Updated to reflect the April 14, 2017 LEED v4 Building Design
and Construction Addenda
MR PREREQUISITE: CONSTRUCTION AND DEMOLITION
WASTE MANAGEMENT
PLANNING
Required
BD&C
This prerequisite applies to
ruction
Intent
To reduce construction and demolition waste disposed of in
landfills and incineration facilities by
recovering, reusing, and recycling materials.
Requirements
NC, CS, SCHOOLS, RETAIL NC, DATA CENTERS,
WAREHOUSES & DISTRIBUTION CENTERS, HOSPITALITY
NC,
HEALTHCARE
Develop and implement a construction and demolition waste
management plan:
h waste diversion goals for the project by identifying
at least five materials (both structural
and nonstructural) targeted for diversion. Approximate a
percentage of the overall project waste
that these materials represent.
will be separated or comingled and
describe the diversion strategies
planned for the project. Describe where the material will be
taken and how the recycling facility
will process the material.
Provide a final report detailing all major waste streams
generated, including disposal and diversion rates.
Alternative daily cover (ADC) does not qualify as material
diverted from disposal. Include materials
destined for ADC in the calculations as waste. Land-clearing
debris is not considered construction,
demolition, or renovation waste that can contribute to waste
diversion.
88
Updated to reflect the April 14, 2017 LEED v4 Building Design
and Construction Addenda
MR PREREQUISITE: PBT SOURCE REDUCTION—
MERCURY
Required
BD&C
This prerequisite applies to
Intent
To reduce mercury-containing products and devices and
mercury release through product substitution,
capture, and recycling.
Requirements
HEALTHCARE
As part of the project’s recycling collection system, identify the
following:
-containing products and devices to be
collected;
program; and
Applicable mercury-containing products and devices include,
but are not limited to, lamps (such as linear
and circular fluorescents, integrally ballasted and nonintegrally
ballasted compact fluorescents and HIDs)
and dental wastes (such as scrap amalgam, chair side traps, and
separator wastes).
In facilities delivering dental care, specify and install amalgam
separation devices that meet or exceed the
ISO-11143 standard.
Comply with the mercury elimination requirements outlined
below, from the 2010 FGI Guidelines for
Design and Construction of Health Care Facilities, Section
A1.3- 4b, Mercury Elimination.
mercury-containing equipment,
including thermostats, switching devices, and other building
system sources. Lamps are
excluded.
to phase out mercury-containing
products and upgrade current mercury-containing lamps to high-
efficiency, low-mercury, or
mercury-free lamp technology.
Do not specify or install preheat, T-9, T-10, or T-12
fluorescents or mercury vapor high-intensity discharge
(HID) lamps in the project. Do not specify probe-start metal
halide HID lamps in any interior spaces.
Specify and install illuminated exit signs that do not contain
mercury and use less than 5 watts of
electricity.
Fluorescent and high-pressure sodium lamps must meet the
criteria in Table 1.
Table 1. Maximum mercury content of lamps
Lamp Maximum content
T-8 fluorescent, eight-foot 10 mg mercury
T-8 fluorescent, four-foot 3.5 mg mercury
T-8 fluorescent, U-bent 6 mg mercury
T-5 fluorescent, linear 2.5 mg mercury
T-5 fluorescent, circular 9 mg mercury
Compact fluorescent, nonintegral ballast 3.5 mg mercury
89
Updated to reflect the April 14, 2017 LEED v4 Building Design
and Construction Addenda
Compact fluorescent, integral ballast 3.5 mg mercury, ENERGY
STAR qualified
High-pressure sodium, up to 400 watts 10 mg mercury
High-pressure sodium, above 400 watts 32 mg mercury
mg = milligram
90
Updated to reflect the April 14, 2017 LEED v4 Building Design
and Construction Addenda
MR CREDIT: BUILDING LIFE-CYCLE IMPACT REDUCTION
BD&C
2–6 points
This credit applies to
–5 points)
–6 points)
–5 points)
–5 points)
–5 points)
–5 points)
–5 points)
–5 points)
Intent
To encourage adaptive reuse and optimize the environmental
performance of products and materials.
Requirements
NC, CS, SCHOOLS, RETAIL NC, DATA CENTERS,
WAREHOUSES & DISTRIBUTION CENTERS, HOSPITALITY
NC,
HEALTHCARE
Demonstrate reduced environmental effects during initial
project decision-making by reusing existing
building resources or demonstrating a reduction in materials use
through life-cycle assessment. Achieve
one of the following options.
Option 1. Historic Building Reuse (5 points BD&C, 6 points
Core and Shell)
Maintain the existing building structure, envelope, and interior
nonstructural elements of a historic
building or contributing building in a historic district. To
qualify, the building or historic district must be
listed or eligible for listing in the local, state, or national
register of historic places. Do not demolish
any part of a historic building or contributing building in a
historic district unless it is deemed
structurally unsound or hazardous. For buildings listed locally,
approval of any demolition must be
granted by the local historic preservation review board. For
buildings listed in a state register or the
U.S. National Register of Historic Places (or local equivalent
for projects outside the U.S.), approval
must appear in a programmatic agreement with the state historic
preservation office or National Park
Service (or local equivalent for projects outside the U.S.).
Any alteration (preservation, restoration, or rehabilitation) of a
historic building or a contributing
building in a historic district on the project site must be done in
accordance with local or national
standards for rehabilitation, whichever are applicable. If
building is not subject to historic review,
include on the project team a preservation professional who
meets U.S. federal qualifications for
historic architects (or local equivalent for projects outside the
U.S.); the preservation professional
must confirm conformance to the Secretary of Interior’s
Standards for the Treatment of Historic
Properties (or local equivalent for projects outside the U.S.).
OR
Option 2. Renovation of Abandoned or Blighted Building (5
points BD&C, 6 points Core and Shell)
Maintain at least 50%, by surface area, of the existing building
structure, enclosure, and interior
structural elements for buildings that meet local criteria of
abandoned or are considered blight. The
building must be renovated to a state of productive occupancy.
Up to 25% of the building surface
area may be excluded from credit calculation because of
deterioration or damage.
91
Updated to reflect the April 14, 2017 LEED v4 Building Design
and Construction Addenda
OR
Option 3. Building and Material Reuse (2–4 points BD&C, 2-5
points Core and Shell)
Reuse or salvage building materials from off site or on site as a
percentage of the surface area, as
listed in Table 1. Include structural elements (e.g., floors, roof
decking), enclosure materials (e.g.,
skin, framing), and permanently installed interior elements
(e.g., walls, doors, floor coverings, ceiling
systems). Exclude from the calculation window assemblies and
any hazardous materials that are
remediated as a part of the project.
Materials contributing toward this credit may not contribute
toward MR Credit Material Disclosure and
Optimization.
Table 1. Points for reuse of building materials
Percentage of
completed project
surface area reused
Points BD&C
Points BD&C
(Core and
Shell)
25% 2 2
50% 3 3
75% 4 5
OR
Option 4. Whole-Building Life-Cycle Assessment (3 points)
For new construction (buildings or portions of buildings),
conduct a life-cycle assessment of the
project’s structure and enclosure that demonstrates a minimum
of 10% reduction, compared with a
baseline building, in at least three of the six impact categories
listed below, one of which must be
global warming potential. No impact category assessed as part
of the life-cycle assessment may
increase by more than 5% compared with the baseline building.
The baseline and proposed buildings must be of comparable
size, function, orientation, and operating
energy performance as defined in EA Prerequisite Minimum
Energy Performance. The service life of
the baseline and proposed buildings must be the same and at
least 60 years to fully account for
maintenance and replacement. Use the same life-cycle
assessment software tools and data sets to
evaluate both the baseline building and the proposed building,
and report all listed impact categories.
Data sets must be compliant with ISO 14044.
Select at least three of the following impact categories for
reduction:
-11;
SO2;
eutrophication, in kg nitrogen or kg phosphate;
ethene; and
92
Updated to reflect the April 14, 2017 LEED v4 Building Design
and Construction Addenda
Healthcare only
For all options in this credit, building materials demolished to
create courtyards to increase daylighting
may be counted as retained in calculations, provided the new
courtyards meet the requirements of EQ
Credits Daylight and Quality Views.
93
Updated to reflect the April 14, 2017 LEED v4 Building Design
and Construction Addenda
MR CREDIT: BUILDING PRODUCT DISCLOSURE AND
OPTIMIZATION—
ENVIRONMENTAL PRODUCT DECLARATIONS
BD&C
1–2 points
This credit applies to
–2 points)
–2 points)
–2 points)
–2 points)
–2 points)
–2 points)
–2 points)
1–2 points)
Intent
To encourage the use of products and materials for which life-
cycle information is available and that have
environmentally, economically, and socially preferable life-
cycle impacts. To reward project teams for
selecting products from manufacturers who have verified
improved environmental life-cycle impacts.
Requirements
NC, CS, SCHOOLS, RETAIL, DATA CENTERS,
WAREHOUSES & DISTRIBUTION CENTERS,
HOSPITALITY,
HEALTHCARE
Achieve one or more of the options below, for a maximum of 2
points.
Option 1. Environmental Product Declaration (EPD) (1 point)
Use at least 20 different permanently installed products sourced
from at least five different manufacturers
that meet one of the disclosure criteria below.
-specific declaration.
o Products with a publicly available, critically reviewed life-
cycle assessment conforming to
ISO 14044 that have at least a cradle to gate scope are valued as
one quarter (1/4) of a
product for the purposes of credit achievement calculation.
14025, 14040, 14044, and EN 15804
or ISO 21930 and have at least a cradle to gate scope.
o Industry-wide (generic) EPD -- Products with third-party
certification (Type III), including
external verification, in which the manufacturer is explicitly
recognized as a participant by
the program operator are valued as one half (1/2) of a product
for purposes of credit
achievement calculation.
o Product-specific Type III EPD -- Products with third-party
certification (Type III), including
external verification in which the manufacturer is explicitly
recognized as the participant
by the program operator are valued as one whole product for
purposes of credit
achievement calculation.
– Products that comply with other
USGBC approved environmental
product declaration frameworks.
Option 2. Multi-Attribute Optimization (1 point)
Use products that comply with one of the criteria below for
50%, by cost, of the total value of permanently
installed products in the project. Products will be valued as
below.
reduction below industry average in at least
94
Updated to reflect the April 14, 2017 LEED v4 Building Design
and Construction Addenda
three of the following categories are valued at 100% of their
cost for credit achievement
calculations.
o global warming potential (greenhouse gases), in CO2e;
o depletion of the stratospheric ozone layer, in kg CFC-11;
o acidification of land and water sources, in moles H+ or kg
SO2;
o eutrophication, in kg nitrogen or kg phosphate;
o formation of tropospheric ozone, in kg NOx, kg O3 eq, or kg
ethene; and
depletion of nonrenewable energy resources, in MJ.
-- Products that comply with other
USGBC approved multi-attribute
frameworks.
For credit achievement calculation, products sourced (extracted,
manufactured, purchased) within 100
miles (160 km) of the project site are valued at 200% of their
base contributing cost.
Structure and enclosure materials may not constitute more than
30% of the value of compliant building
products.
95
Updated to reflect the April 14, 2017 LEED v4 Building Design
and Construction Addenda
MR CREDIT: BUILDING PRODUCT DISCLOSURE AND
OPTIMIZATION –
SOURCING OF RAW MATERIALS
BD&C
1–2 points
This credit applies to
–2 points)
–2 points)
–2 points)
–2 points)
–2 points)
–2 points)
–2 points)
–2 points)
Intent
To encourage the use of products and materials for which life
cycle information is available and that have
environmentally, economically, and socially preferable life
cycle impacts. To reward project teams for
selecting products verified to have been extracted or sourced in
a responsible manner.
Requirements
NC, CS, SCHOOLS, RETAIL NC, DATA CENTERS,
WAREHOUSES & DISTRIBUTION CENTERS, HOSPITALITY
NC,
HEALTHCARE
Option 1. Raw Material Source and Extraction Reporting (1
point)
Use at least 20 different permanently installed products from at
least five different manufacturers that
have publicly released a report from their raw material suppliers
which include raw material supplier
extraction locations, a commitment to long-term ecologically
responsible land use, a commitment to
reducing environmental harms from extraction and/or
manufacturing processes, and a commitment to
meeting applicable standards or programs voluntarily that
address responsible sourcing criteria
-declared
reports are valued as one half (1/2) of a
product for credit achievement.
-party verified corporate sustainability reports (CSR)
which include environmental impacts of
extraction operations and activities associated with the
manufacturer’s product and the product’s
supply chain, are valued as one whole product for credit
achievement calculation. Acceptable
CSR frameworks include the following:
o Global Reporting Initiative (GRI) Sustainability Report
o Organisation for Economic Co-operation and Develoment
(OECD) Guidelines for
Multinational Enterprises
o U.N. Global Compact: Communication of Progress
o ISO 26000: 2010 Guidance on Social Responsibility
o USGBC approved program: Other USGBC approved programs
meeting the CSR criteria.
Option 2. Leadership Extraction Practices (1 point)
Use products that meet at least one of the responsible extraction
criteria below for at least 25%, by cost,
of the total value of permanently installed building products in
the project.
manufacturer (producer) that
participates in an extended producer responsibility program or
is directly responsible for extended
96
Updated to reflect the April 14, 2017 LEED v4 Building Design
and Construction Addenda
producer responsibility. Products meeting extended producer
responsibility criteria are valued at
50% of their cost for the purposes of credit achievement
calculation.
-based materials. Bio-based products must meet the
Sustainable Agriculture Network’s
Sustainable Agriculture Standard. Bio-based raw materials
must be tested using ASTM Test
Method D6866 and be legally harvested, as defined by the
exporting and receiving country.
Exclude hide products, such as leather and other animal skin
material. Products meeting bio-
based materials criteria are valued at 100% of their cost for the
purposes of credit achievement
calculation.
Forest Stewardship Council or USGBC-
approved equivalent. Products meeting wood products criteria
are valued at 100% of their cost for
the purposes of credit achievement calculation.
reused products. Products meeting
materials reuse criteria are valued at 100% of their cost for the
purposes of credit achievement
calculation.
postconsumer recycled content plus one-half
the preconsumer recycled content, based on cost. Products
meeting recycled content criteria are
valued at 100% of their cost for the purposes of credit
achievement calculation
programs meeting leadership extraction
criteria.
For credit achievement calculation, products sourced (extracted,
manufactured and purchased) within
100 miles (160 km) of the project site are valued at 200% of
their base contributing cost. For credit
achievement calculation, the base contributing cost of
individual products compliant with multiple
responsible extraction criteria is not permitted to exceed 100%
its total actual cost (before regional
multipliers) and double counting of single product components
compliant with multiple responsible
extraction criteria is not permitted and in no case is a product
permitted to contribute more than 200% of
its total actual cost.
Structure and enclosure materials may not constitute more than
30% of the value of compliant building
products.
97
Updated to reflect the April 14, 2017 LEED v4 Building Design
and Construction Addenda
MR CREDIT: BUILDING PRODUCT DISCLOSURE AND
OPTIMIZATION –
MATERIAL INGREDIENTS
BD&C
1-2 points
This credit applies to
-2 points)
-2 points)
-2 points)
-2 points)
-2 points)
-2 points)
-2 points)
-2 points)
Intent
To encourage the use of products and materials for which life-
cycle information is available and that have
environmentally, economically, and socially preferable life-
cycle impacts. To reward project teams for
selecting products for which the chemical ingredients in the
product are inventoried using an accepted
methodology and for selecting products verified to minimize the
use and generation of harmful
substances. To reward raw material manufacturers who produce
products verified to have improved life-
cycle impacts.
Requirements
NC, CS, SCHOOLS, RETAIL NC, DATA CENTERS,
WAREHOUSES & DISTRIBUTION CENTERS, HOSPITALITY
NC,
HEALTHCARE
Option 1. Material Ingredient Reporting (1 point)
Use at least 20 different permanently installed products from at
least five different manufacturers that use
any of the following programs to demonstrate the chemical
inventory of the product to at least 0.1% (1000
ppm).
complete content inventory for the
product following these guidelines:
o A publicly available inventory of all ingredients identified by
name and Chemical Abstract
Service Registration Number (CASRN) and/or European
Community Number (EC Number).
o Materials defined as trade secret or intellectual property may
withhold the name and/or
CASRN/EC Number but must disclose role, amount and hazard
screen using either:
Labeling of Chemicals
rev.6 (2015) (GHS)
ingredient and
the inventory lists the hazard category for each of the health
hazards
included in Part 3 of GHS (e.g. “GHS Category 2 Carcinogen”).
classification
cannot be made because there are insufficient data for a
particular
endpoint(s).
published, complete Health Product
Declaration with full disclosure of known hazards in compliance
with the Health Product
Declaration open Standard.
98
Updated to reflect the April 14, 2017 LEED v4 Building Design
and Construction Addenda
the Cradle to Cradle v2 Basic level or
Cradle to Cradle v3 Bronze level.
l must indicate that all
ingredients have been evaluated and
disclosed down to 1000 ppm.
documentation from the assessor or
scorecard from BIFMA must demonstrate the product earned at
least 3 points under 7.5.1.3
Advanced Level in e3-2014 or 3 points under 7.4.1.3 Advanced
Level in e3-2012.
has been certified at the Bronze level or
higher and at least 90% of materials are assessed by weight.
– NSF/ANSI 336: Sustainability Assessment for
Commercial Furnishings Fabric at any
certification level.
meeting the material ingredient
reporting criteria.
AND/OR
Option 2: Material Ingredient Optimization (1 point)
Use products that document their material ingredient
optimization using the paths below for at least 25%,
by cost, of the total value of permanently installed products in
the project.
inventoried chemical ingredients to 100
ppm that have no Benchmark 1 hazards:
o If any ingredients are assessed with the GreenScreen List
Translator, value these
products at 100% of cost.
o If all ingredients are have undergone a full GreenScreen
Assessment, value these
products at 150% of cost.
Cradle to Cradle. Products will be
valued as follows:
o Cradle to Cradle v2 Gold: 100% of cost
o Cradle to Cradle v2 Platinum: 150% of cost
o Cradle to Cradle v3 Silver: 100% of cost
o Cradle to Cradle v3 Gold or Platinum: 150% of cost
– REACH
Optimization. End use products and
materials have fully inventoried chemical ingredients to 100
ppm and assess each substance
against the Authorization List – Annex XIV, the Restriction list
– Annex XVII and the SVHC
candidate list, (the version in effect June 2013,) proving that no
such substance is included in the
product. If the product contains no ingredients listed on the
REACH Authorization, Restriction,
and Candidate list, value at 100% of cost.
USGGBC approved building product
optimization criteria.
AND/OR
Option 3: Product Manufacturer Supply Chain Optimization (1
point)
Use building products for at least 25%, by cost, of the total
value of permanently installed products in
the project that:
o Are sourced from product manufacturers who engage in
validated and robust safety, health,
hazard, and risk programs which at a minimum document at
least 99% (by weight) of the
ingredients used to make the building product or building
material, and
o Are sourced from product manufacturers with independent
third party verification of their
supply chain that at a minimum verifies:
http://new.usgbc.org/glossary/term/4727
99
Updated to reflect the April 14, 2017 LEED v4 Building Design
and Construction Addenda
ocesses are in place to communicate and transparently
prioritize chemical ingredients
along the supply chain according to available hazard, exposure
and use information to
identify those that require more detailed evaluation
identify, document, and
communicate information on health,
safety and environmental characteristics of chemical ingredients
health, safety and
environmental hazard and risk of chemical ingredients
environmental impacts when
designing and improving chemical ingredients
chemical ingredient safety
and stewardship information along the supply chain
ingredients is publicly available
from all points along the supply chain
Products meeting Option 3 criteria are valued at 100% of their
cost for the purposes of credit achievement
calculation.
For credit achievement calculation of options 2 and 3, products
sourced (extracted, manufactured,
purchased) within 100 miles (160 km) of the project site are
valued at 200% of their base contributing
cost. For credit achievement calculation, the value of
individual products compliant with either option 2 or
3 can be combined to reach the 25% threshold but products
compliant with both option 2 and 3 may only
be counted once.
Structure and enclosure materials may not constitute more than
30% of the value of compliant building
products.
100
Updated to reflect the April 14, 2017 LEED v4 Building Design
and Construction Addenda
MR CREDIT: PBT SOURCE REDUCTION—MERCURY
BD&C
1 point
This credit applies to
Intent
To reduce the release of persistent, bioaccumulative, and toxic
(PBTs) chemicals associated with the life
cycle of building materials.
Requirements
HEALTHCARE
Specify and install fluorescent lamps with both low mercury
content (MR Prerequisite PBT Source
Reduction—Mercury) and long lamp life, as listed in Table 1.
Table 1. Criteria for rated life of low-mercury lamps
Lamp Maximum content Lamp life (hrs)
T-8 fluorescent, eight-foot 10 mg mercury Standard output -
24,000 rated
hours on instant start ballasts (3-
hour starts)
High output – 18,000 rated hours
on instant start ballasts or
program start ballasts (3-hour
starts)
T-8 fluorescent, four-foot 3.5 mg mercury Both standard and
high output -
30,000 rated hours on instant
start ballasts, or 36,000 rated
hours on program start ballasts
(3 hour starts)
T-8 fluorescent, two-foot and three-
foot
3.5 mg mercury 24,000 rated hours on instant
start ballasts or program start
ballasts (3-hour starts)
T-8 fluorescent, U-bent 6 mg mercury 18,000 rated hours on
instant
start ballasts, or 24,000 rated
hours on program start ballasts
(3-hour starts)
T-5 fluorescent, linear 2.5 mg mercury Both standard and high-
output -
25,000 rated hours on program
start ballasts
T-5 fluorescent, circular 9 mg mercury Both standard and high-
output –
25,000 rated hours on program
start ballasts
Compact fluorescent, nonintegral
ballast
3.5 mg mercury 12,000 rated hours
Compact florescent, integral
ballast, bare bulb
3.5 mg mercury, ENERGY
STAR qualified
Bare bulb - 10,000 rated hours
Covered models such as globes,
reflectors, A-19s – 8,000 hours
101
Updated to reflect the April 14, 2017 LEED v4 Building Design
and Construction Addenda
High-pressure sodium, up to 400
watts
10 mg mercury Use noncycling type or replace
with LED lamps or induction
lamps
High-pressure sodium, above 400
watts
32 mg mercury Use noncycling type or replace
with LED lamps or induction
lamps
Do not specify or install circular fluorescent lamps or probe
start metal halide lamps.
102
Updated to reflect the April 14, 2017 LEED v4 Building Design
and Construction Addenda
MR CREDIT: PBT SOURCE REDUCTION—LEAD,
CADMIUM, AND COPPER
BD&C
2 points
This credit applies to
Intent
To reduce the release of persistent, bioaccumulative, and toxic
(PBT) chemicals associated with the life
cycle of building materials.
Requirements
HEALTHCARE
Specify substitutes for materials manufactured with lead and
cadmium, as follows.
Lead
solder and flux to connect plumbing
pipe on site that meets the California AB1953 standard, which
specifies that solder not contain
more than 0.2% lead, and flux not more than a weighted average
of 0.25% lead for wetted
surfaces. The “lead free” label as defined by the Safe Drinking
Water Act (SDWA) ) does not
provide adequate screening for the purposes of this credit
because the SDWA defines “lead free”
as solders and flux containing 0.2% lead or less.
pipes, pipe fittings, plumbing fittings,
and faucets that meet the California law AB1953 of a weighted
average lead content of the
wetted surface area of not more than 0.25% lead.
-free roofing and flashing.
less than 300 parts per million.
taining lead.
disposal of disconnected wires with
lead stabilizers, consistent with the 2002 National Electric Code
requirements.
Lead used for radiation shielding and copper used for MRI
shielding are exempt.
Cadmium
intentionally added cadmium.
Copper
-
related sources of copper corrosion:
o use mechanically crimped copper joint systems; or
o specify that all solder joints comply with ASTM B828 2002,
and specify and use ASTM
B813 2010 for flux.
103
Updated to reflect the April 14, 2017 LEED v4 Building Design
and Construction Addenda
MR CREDIT: FURNITURE AND MEDICAL FURNISHINGS
BD&C
1–2 points
This credit applies to
Intent
To enhance the environmental and human health performance
attributes associated with freestanding
furniture and medical furnishings.
Requirements
HEALTHCARE
Use at least 30% (1 point) or 40% (2 points), by cost, of all
freestanding furniture and medical furnishings
(e.g., mattresses, foams, panel fabrics, cubicle curtains, window
coverings, other textiles) that meet the
criteria in one of the following three options.
Include built-in casework and built-in millwork in the base
building calculations, even if manufactured off
site. The dollar value of any individual product may be included
in the total qualifying value if the product
meets the criteria.
Option 1. Minimal Chemical Content
All components that constitute at least 5%, by weight, of a
furniture or medical furnishing assembly,
including textiles, finishes, and dyes, must contain less than 100
parts per million (ppm) of at least four of
the five following chemical groups:
antimony;
European Union Directive on the
Restriction of the Use of Certain Hazardous Substances (EU
RoHS);
compounds (PFCs), including
perfluorooctanoic acid (PFOA); and
AND/OR
Option 2. Testing and Modeling of Chemical Content
All components of a furniture or medical furnishing assembly,
including textiles, finishes, and dyes, must
contain less than 100 parts per million (ppm) of at least two of
the five chemicals or materials listed in
Option 1.
New furniture or medical furnishing assemblies must be in
accordance with ANSI/BIFMA Standard
Method M7.1–2011. Comply with ANSI/BIFMA e3-2010
Furniture Sustainability Standard, Sections 7.6.1
and 7.6.2, using either the concentration modeling approach or
the emissions factor approach. Model the
test results using the open plan, private office, or seating
scenario in ANSI/BIFMA M7.1, as appropriate.
USGBC-approved equivalent testing methodologies and
contaminant thresholds are also
acceptable. Documentation submitted for furniture must
indicate the modeling scenarioused to determine
compliance.
Salvaged and reused furniture more than one year old at the
time of use is considered compliant,
provided it meets the requirements for any site-applied paints,
coatings, adhesives, and sealants.
104
Updated to reflect the April 14, 2017 LEED v4 Building Design
and Construction Addenda
AND/OR
Option 3: Multi-Attribute Assessment of Products
Use products that meet at least one of the criteria below. Each
product can receive credit for each
criterion met. The scope of any environmental product
declaration (EPD) must be at least cradle to
gate.
-specific declaration.
o Products with a publicly available, critically reviewed life-
cycle assessment conforming to
ISO 14044 that have at least a cradle to gate scope are valued as
one quarter (1/4) of a
product for the purposes of credit achievement calculation.
14025, 14040, 14044, and EN 15804
or ISO 21930 and have at least a cradle to gate scope.
o Industry-wide (generic) EPD -- Products with third-party
certification (Type III), including
external verification, in which the manufacturer is explicitly
recognized as a participant by
the program operator are valued as one half (1/2) of a product
for purposes of credit
achievement calculation.
o Product-specific Type III EPD -- Products with third-party
certification (Type III), including
external verification in which the manufacturer is explicitly
recognized as the participant
by the program operator are valued as one whole product for
purposes of credit
achievement calculation.
products.
se products with recycled content.
Recycled content is the sum of post-
consumer recycled content plus one-half the pre-consumer
recycled content.
manufacturer (producer) that
participates in an extended producer responsibility program or
is directly responsible for extended
producer responsibility.
-based materials. Bio-based products must meet the
Sustainable Agriculture Network’s
Sustainable Agriculture Standard. Bio-based raw materials
must be tested using ASTM Test
Method D6866 and be legally harvested, as defined by the
exporting and receiving country.
Exclude hide products, such as leather and other animal skin
material.
ed by the
Forest Stewardship Council or USGBC-
approved equivalent.
Products that meet the above criteria are valued according to
source location (extraction,
manufacture, and purchase point must be within the distances
noted below):
For credit achievement calculation, products sourced (extracted,
manufactured, purchased) within 100
miles (160 km) of the project site are valued at 200% of their
base contributing cost.
105
Updated to reflect the April 14, 2017 LEED v4 Building Design
and Construction Addenda
MR CREDIT: DESIGN FOR FLEXIBILITY
BD&C
1 point
This credit applies to
Intent
Conserve resources associated with the construction and
management of buildings by designing for
flexibility and ease of future adaptation and for the service life
of components and assemblies.
Requirements
HEALTHCARE
Increase building flexibility and ease of adaptive use over the
life of the structure by employing at least
three of the following strategies.
ial space. Design distribution zone utility
systems and equipment including HVAC,
plumbing, electrical, information technology, medical gases,
and life safety systems to serve the
occupied zones and have the capacity to control multiple zones
in clinical spaces.
storage, equal to at least 5% of
departmental gross area (DGA). Locate soft space adjacent to
clinical departments that anticipate
growth. Determine a strategy for future accommodation of
displaced soft space.
such that it can be occupied without
displacing occupied space.
treatment or other clinical space equal to
at least 30% of existing floor area (excluding inpatient units)
without demolition of occupied space
(other than at the connection point). Reconfiguration of
additional existing occupied space that
has been constructed with demountable partition systems is
permitted.
roof, ensuring that existing operations
and service systems can continue at or near capacity during the
expansion.
-grade parking structures
equal to 50% of existing on-grade
parking capacity, with direct access to the main hospital lobby
or circulation. Vertical
transportation pathways that lead directly to the main hospital
lobby or circulation are acceptable.
titions for 50% of applicable areas.
casework and custom millwork. Base the
calculation on the combined value of casework and millwork, as
determined by the cost estimator
or contractor.
106
Updated to reflect the April 14, 2017 LEED v4 Building Design
and Construction Addenda
MR CREDIT: CONSTRUCTION AND DEMOLITION WASTE
MANAGEMENT
BD&C
1–2 points
This credit applies to
–2 points)
–2 points)
–2 points)
–2 points)
–2 points)
–2 points)
–2 points)
–2 points)
Intent
To reduce construction and demolition waste disposed of in
landfills and incineration facilities by
recovering, reusing, and recycling materials.
Requirements
NC, CS, SCHOOLS, RETAIL NC, DATA CENTERS,
WAREHOUSES & DISTRIBUTION CENTERS, HOSPITALITY
NC,
HEALTHCARE
Recycle and/or salvage nonhazardous construction and
demolition materials. Calculations can be by
weight or volume but must be consistent throughout.
Exclude excavated soil, land-clearing debris from calculations.
Include materials destined for alternative
daily cover (ADC) in the calculations as waste (not diversion).
Include wood waste converted to fuel
(biofuel) in the calculations; other types of waste-to-energy are
not considered diversion for this credit.
However, for projects that cannot meet credit requirements
using reuse and recycling methods, waste-to-
energy systems may be considered waste diversion if the
European Commission Waste Framework
Directive 2008/98/EC and Waste Incineration Directive
2000/76/EC are followed and Waste to Energy
facilities meet applicable European Committee for
Standardization (CEN) EN 303 standards.
Option 1. Diversion (1–2 points)
Path 1. Divert 50% and Three Material Streams (1 point)
Divert at least 50% of the total construction and demolition
material; diverted materials must include
at least three material streams.
OR
Path 2. Divert 75% and Four Material Streams (2 points)
Divert at least 75% of the total construction and demolition
material; diverted materials must include
at least four material streams.
OR
Option 2. Reduction of Total Waste Material (2 points)
Do not generate more than 2.5 pounds of construction waste per
square foot (12.2 kilograms of waste per
square meter) of the building’s floor area.
107
Updated to reflect the April 14, 2017 LEED v4 Building Design
and Construction Addenda
INDOOR ENVIRONMENTAL QUALITY (EQ)
EQ PREREQUISITE: MINIMUM INDOOR AIR QUALITY
PERFORMANCE
Required
BD&C
This prerequisite applies to
Intent
To contribute to the comfort and well-being of building
occupants by establishing minimum standards for
indoor air quality (IAQ).
Requirements
NC, CS, SCHOOLS, RETAIL, DATA CENTERS,
WAREHOUSES & DISTRIBUTION CENTERS, HOSPITALITY
Meet the requirements for both ventilation and monitoring.
Ventilation
Mechanically Ventilated Spaces
Option 1. ASHRAE Standard 62.1–2010
For mechanically ventilated spaces (and for mixed-mode
systems when the mechanical ventilation is
activated), determine the minimum outdoor air intake flow for
mechanical ventilation systems using the
ventilation rate procedure from ASHRAE 62.1–2010 or a local
equivalent, whichever is more stringent.
Meet the minimum requirements of ASHRAE Standard 62.1–
2010, Sections 4–7, Ventilation for
Acceptable Indoor Air Quality (with errata), or a local
equivalent, whichever is more stringent.
Option 2. CEN Standards EN 15251–2007 and EN 13779–2007
Projects outside the U.S. may instead meet the minimum
outdoor air requirements of Annex B of Comité
Européen de Normalisation (CEN) Standard EN 15251–2007,
Indoor environmental input parameters for
design and assessment of energy performance of buildings
addressing indoor air quality, thermal
environment, lighting and acoustics; and meet the requirements
of CEN Standard EN 13779–2007,
Ventilation for nonresidential buildings, Performance
requirements for ventilation and room conditioning
systems, excluding Section 7.3, Thermal environment; 7.6,
Acoustic environment; A.16; and A.17.
Naturally Ventilated Spaces
For naturally ventilated spaces (and for mixed-mode systems
when the mechanical ventilation is
inactivated), determine the minimum outdoor air opening and
space configuration requirements using the
natural ventilation procedure from ASHRAE Standard 62.1–
2010 or a local equivalent, whichever is more
stringent. Confirm that natural ventilation is an effective
strategy for the project by following the flow
108
Updated to reflect the April 14, 2017 LEED v4 Building Design
and Construction Addenda
diagram in the Chartered Institution of Building Services
Engineers (CIBSE) Applications Manual AM10,
March 2005, Natural Ventilation in Nondomestic Buildings,
Figure 2.8, and meet the requirements of
ASHRAE Standard 62.1–2010, Section 4, or a local equivalent,
whichever is more stringent.
All Spaces
The indoor air quality procedure defined in ASHRAE Standard
62.1–2010 may not be used to comply with
this prerequisite.
Monitoring
Mechanically Ventilated Spaces
For mechanically ventilated spaces (and for mixed-mode
systems when the mechanical ventilation is
activated), monitor outdoor air intake flow as follows:
airflow measurement device capable of
measuring the minimum outdoor air intake flow. This device
must measure the minimum outdoor
air intake flow with an accuracy of +/–10% of the design
minimum outdoor airflow rate, as defined
by the ventilation requirements above. An alarm must indicate
when the outdoor airflow value
varies by 15% or more from the outdoor airflow setpoint.
-volume systems, balance outdoor airflow to the
design minimum outdoor airflow rate
defined by ASHRAE Standard 62.1–2010 (with errata), or
higher. Install a current transducer on
the supply fan, an airflow switch, or similar monitoring device.
Naturally Ventilated Spaces
For naturally ventilated spaces (and for mixed-mode systems
when the mechanical ventilation is
inactivated), comply with at least one of the following
strategies.
of measuring the exhaust airflow.
This device must measure the exhaust airflow with an accuracy
of +/–10% of the design minimum
exhaust airflow rate. An alarm must indicate when airflow
values vary by 15% or more from the
exhaust airflow setpoint.
ventilation openings intended to meet the
minimum opening requirements. An alarm must indicate when
any one of the openings is closed
during occupied hours.
thermal zone. CO2 monitors must be
between 3 and 6 feet (900 and 1 800 millimeters) above the
floor and within the thermal zone.
CO2 monitors must have an audible or visual indicator or alert
the building automation system if
the sensed CO2 concentration exceeds the setpoint by more than
10%. Calculate appropriate
CO2 setpoints using the methods in ASHRAE 62.1–2010,
Appendix C.
CS only
Mechanical ventilation systems installed during core and shell
construction must be capable of meeting
projected ventilation levels and monitoring based on the
requirements of anticipated future tenants.
Residential only
In addition to the requirements above, if the project building
contains residential units, each dwelling unit
must meet all of the following requirements.
ances (e.g., decorative logs) are
not allowed.
each unit.
enclosures or doors that seal when
closed.
laces and woodstoves that are not closed
combustion or power-vented must pass
a backdraft potential test to ensure that depressurization of the
combustion appliance zone is less
than 5 Pa.
109
Updated to reflect the April 14, 2017 LEED v4 Building Design
and Construction Addenda
- and water-heating equipment that involves combustion
must be designed and installed
with closed combustion (i.e., sealed supply air and exhaust
ducting) or with power-vented
exhaust, or located in a detached utility building or open-air
facility.
-risk areas for radon, EPA Radon Zone 1
(or local equivalent for projects
outside the U.S.), design and construct any dwelling unit on
levels one through four above grade
with radon-resistant construction techniques. Follow the
techniques prescribed in EPA Building
Radon Out; NFPA 5000, Chapter 49; International Residential
Code, Appendix F; CABO,
Appendix F; ASTM E1465; or a local equivalent, whichever is
most stringent.
HEALTHCARE
Meet the following requirements for both ventilation and
monitoring.
Ventilation
Mechanically Ventilated Spaces
For mechanically ventilated spaces (and for mixed-mode
systems when the mechanical ventilation is
activated), determine the minimum outdoor air intake flow for
mechanical ventilations systems using the
ventilation rates in ASHRAE Standard 170–2008, Section 7; the
requirements of the 2010 FGI Guidelines
for Design and Construction of Health Care Facilities (Table
2.1–2); or a local equivalent, whichever is
most stringent. For any area not covered in 170 or the FGI
guidelines, follow ASHRAE 62.1 or a local
equivalent, whichever is more stringent and meet the minimum
requirements of ASHRAE Standard 170–
2008, Sections 6–8, Ventilation of Health Care Facilities (with
errata) or a USGBC-approved equivalent
standard for projects outside the U.S.
Naturally Ventilated Spaces
For naturally ventilated spaces (and for mixed-mode systems
when the mechanical ventilation is
inactivated), determine the minimum outdoor air opening and
space configuration requirements using the
natural ventilation procedure of ASHRAE Standard 62.1–2010
(with errata) or a local equivalent,
whichever is more stringent. Confirm that natural ventilation is
an effective strategy for the project by
following the flow diagram in Figure 2.8 of the Chartered
Institution of Building Services Engineers
(CIBSE) Applications Manual AM10, March 2005, Natural
Ventilation in Nondomestic Buildings.
Monitoring
Mechanically Ventilated Spaces
For mechanically ventilated spaces (and for mixed-mode
systems when the mechanical ventilation is
activated), provide a direct outdoor airflow measurement device
capable of measuring the minimum
outdoor air intake flow. This device must measure the minimum
outdoor air intake flow with an accuracy
of +/–10% of the design minimum outdoor airflow rate defined
by the ventilation requirements above. An
alarm must alert staff whenever the outdoor airflow value varies
by 15% or more from the outdoor airflow
setpoint.
Naturally Ventilated Spaces
For naturally ventilated spaces (and for mixed-mode systems
when the mechanical ventilation is
inactivated), comply with at least one of the following
strategies.
airflow measurement device capable
of measuring the exhaust airflow
with an accuracy of +/–10% of the design minimum exhaust
airflow rate. An alarm must indicate
when airflow values vary by 15% or more from the exhaust
airflow setpoint.
matic indication devices on all natural
ventilation openings intended to meet the
minimum opening requirements. An alarm must indicate when
any one of the openings is closed
during occupied hours.
ch
thermal zone. CO2 monitors must be
between 3 and 6 feet (900 and 1 800 millimeters) above the
floor and within the thermal zone.
CO2 monitors must have an audible or visual indicator or alert
the building automation system if
110
Updated to reflect the April 14, 2017 LEED v4 Building Design
and Construction Addenda
the sensed CO2 concentration exceeds the setpoint by more than
10%. Calculate appropriate
CO2 setpoints by using the methods in ASHRAE 62.1–2010,
Appendix C.
111
Updated to reflect the April 14, 2017 LEED v4 Building Design
and Construction Addenda
EQ PREREQUISITE: ENVIRONMENTAL TOBACCO SMOKE
CONTROL
Required
BD&C
This prerequisite applies to
Intent
To prevent or minimize exposure of building occupants, indoor
surfaces, and ventilation air distribution
systems to environmental tobacco smoke.
Requirements
NC, CS, RETAIL, DATA CENTERS, WAREHOUSES &
DISTRIBUTION CENTERS, HOSPITALITY, HEALTHCARE
Prohibit smoking inside the building.
Prohibit smoking outside the building except in designated
smoking areas located at least 25 feet (7.5
meters) from all entries, outdoor air intakes, and operable
windows. Also prohibit smoking outside the
property line in spaces used for business purposes.
If the requirement to prohibit smoking within 25 feet (7.5
meters) cannot be implemented because of
code, provide documentation of these regulations.
Signage must be posted within 10 feet (3 meters) of all building
entrances indicating the no-smoking
policy.
Residential only
Option 1. No Smoking
Meet the requirements above.
OR
Option 2. Compartmentalization of Smoking Areas
Prohibit smoking inside all common areas of the building. The
prohibition must be communicated in
building rental or lease agreements or condo or coop association
covenants and restrictions. Make
provisions for enforcement.
Prohibit smoking outside the building except in designated
smoking areas located at least 25 feet (7.5
meters) from all entries, outdoor air intakes, and operable
windows. The no-smoking policy also applies to
spaces outside the property line used for business purposes.
If the requirement to prohibit smoking within 25 feet (7.5
meters) cannot be implemented because of
code, provide documentation of these regulations.
112
Updated to reflect the April 14, 2017 LEED v4 Building Design
and Construction Addenda
Signage must be posted within 10 feet (3 meters) of all building
entrances indicating the no-smoking
policy.
Each unit must be compartmentalized to prevent excessive
leakage between units:
-strip all exterior doors and operable windows in the
residential units to minimize leakage
from outdoors.
-strip all doors leading from residential units into
common hallways.
and other indoor air pollutants between
residential units by sealing penetrations in the walls, ceilings,
and floors and by sealing vertical
chases (including utility chases, garbage chutes, mail drops, and
elevator shafts) adjacent to the
units.
per
minute per square foot (1.17 liters per
second per square meter) at 50 Pa of enclosure (i.e., all surfaces
enclosing the apartment,
including exterior and party walls, floors, and ceilings).
SCHOOLS
Prohibit smoking on site.
Signage must be posted at the property line indicating the no-
smoking policy.
113
Updated to reflect the April 14, 2017 LEED v4 Building Design
and Construction Addenda
EQ PREREQUISITE: MINIMUM ACOUSTIC PERFORMANCE
Required
BD&C
This prerequisite applies to
Intent
To provide classrooms that facilitate teacher-to-student and
student-to-student communication through
effective acoustic design.
Requirements
SCHOOLS
HVAC Background Noise
Achieve a maximum background noise level of 40 dBA from
heating, ventilating, and air-conditioning
(HVAC) systems in classrooms and other core learning spaces.
Follow the recommended methodologies
and best practices for mechanical system noise control in ANSI
Standard S12.60–2010, Part 1, Annex
A.1; the 2011 HVAC Applications ASHRAE Handbook, Chapter
48, Noise and Vibration Control (with
errata); AHRI Standard 885–2008; or a local equivalent for
projects outside the U.S.
Exterior Noise
For high-noise sites (peak-hour Leq above 60 dBA during
school hours), implement acoustic treatment
and other measures to minimize noise intrusion from exterior
sources and control sound transmission
between classrooms and other core learning spaces. Projects at
least one-half mile (800 meters) from
any significant noise source (e.g., aircraft overflights,
highways, trains, industry) are exempt.
Reverberation Time
Adhere to the following reverberation time requirements.
Classrooms and Core Learning Spaces < 20,000 Cubic Feet (566
Cubic Meters)
Design classrooms and other core learning spaces to include
sufficient sound-absorptive finishes for
compliance with the reverberation time requirements specified
in ANSI Standard S12.60–2010, Part 1,
Acoustical Performance Criteria, Design Requirements and
Guidelines for Schools, or a local equivalent
for projects outside the U.S.
Option 1
For each room, confirm that the total surface area of acoustic
wall panels, ceiling finishes, and other
sound-absorbent finishes equals or exceeds the total ceiling area
of the room (excluding lights, diffusers,
and grilles). Materials must have an NRC of 0.70 or higher to
be included in the calculation.
OR
Option 2
Confirm through calculations described in ANSI Standard
S12.60-2010 that rooms are designed to meet
reverberation time requirements as specified in that standard.
Classrooms and Core Learning Spaces ≥ 20,000 Cubic Feet (566
Cubic Meters)
Meet the recommended reverberation times for classrooms and
core learning spaces described in the
NRC-CNRC Construction Technology Update No. 51,
Acoustical Design of Rooms for Speech (2002), or
a local equivalent for projects outside the U.S.
Exceptions
114
Updated to reflect the April 14, 2017 LEED v4 Building Design
and Construction Addenda
Exceptions to the requirements because of a limited scope of
work or to observe historic preservation
requirements will be considered.
115
Updated to reflect the April 14, 2017 LEED v4 Building Design
and Construction Addenda
EQ CREDIT: ENHANCED INDOOR AIR QUALITY
STRATEGIES
BD&C
1–2 points
This credit applies to
–2 points)
–2 points)
–2 points)
–2 points)
–2 points)
–2 points)
–2 points)
–2 points)
Intent
To promote occupants’ comfort, well-being, and productivity by
improving indoor air quality.
Requirements
NC, CS, SCHOOLS, RETAIL, DATA CENTERS,
WAREHOUSES & DISTRIBUTION CENTERS,
HOSPITALITY,
HEALTHCARE
Option 1. Enhanced IAQ Strategies (1 point)
Comply with the following requirements, as applicable.
Mechanically ventilated spaces:
A. entryway systems;
B. interior cross-contamination prevention; and
C. filtration.
Naturally ventilated spaces:
A. entryway systems; and
D. natural ventilation design calculations.
Mixed-mode systems:
A. entryway systems;
B. interior cross-contamination prevention;
C. filtration;
D. natural ventilation design calculations; and
E. mixed-mode design calculations.
A. Entryway Systems
Install permanent entryway systems at least 10 feet (3 meters)
long in the primary direction of travel
to capture dirt and particulates entering the building at regularly
used exterior entrances. Acceptable
entryway systems include permanently installed grates, grilles,
slotted systems that allow for cleaning
underneath, rollout mats, and any other materials manufactured
as entryway systems with equivalent
or better performance. Maintain all on a weekly basis.
Warehouses & Distribution Centers only
Entryway systems are not required at doors leading from the
exterior to the loading dock or garage
but must be installed between these spaces and adjacent office
areas.
Healthcare only
116
Updated to reflect the April 14, 2017 LEED v4 Building Design
and Construction Addenda
In addition to the entryway system, provide pressurized
entryway vestibules at high-volume building
entrances.
B. Interior Cross-Contamination Prevention
Sufficiently exhaust each space where hazardous gases or
chemicals may be present or used (e.g.,
garages, housekeeping and laundry areas, copying and printing
rooms), using the exhaust rates
determined in EQ Prerequisite Minimum Indoor Air Quality
Performance or a minimum of 0.50 cfm
per square foot (2.54 l/s per square meter), to create negative
pressure with respect to adjacent
spaces when the doors to the room are closed. For each of these
spaces, provide self-closing doors
and deck-to-deck partitions or a hard-lid ceiling.
C. Filtration
Each ventilation system that supplies outdoor air to occupied
spaces must have particle filters or air-
cleaning devices that meet one of the following filtration media
requirements:
um efficiency reporting value (MERV) of 13 or higher,
in accordance with ASHRAE
Standard 52.2–2007; or
–
2002, Particulate Air Filters for
General Ventilation, Determination of the Filtration
Performance.
Replace all air filtration media after completion of construction
and before occupancy.
Data Centers only
The above filtration media requirements are required only for
ventilation systems serving regularly
occupied spaces.
D. Natural Ventilation Design Calculations
Demonstrate that the system design for occupied spaces
employs the appropriate strategies in
Chartered Institution of Building Services Engineers (CIBSE)
Applications Manual AM10, March
2005, Natural Ventilation in Non-Domestic Buildings, Section
2.4.
E. Mixed-Mode Design Calculations
Demonstrate that the system design for occupied spaces
complies with CIBSE Applications Manual
13–2000, Mixed Mode Ventilation.
Option 2. Additional Enhanced IAQ Strategies (1 point)
Comply with the following requirements, as applicable.
Mechanically ventilated spaces (select one):
A. exterior contamination prevention;
B. increased ventilation;
C. carbon dioxide monitoring; or
D. additional source control and monitoring.
Naturally ventilated spaces (select one):
A. exterior contamination prevention;
D. additional source control and monitoring; or
E. natural ventilation room by room calculations.
Mixed-mode systems (select one):
A. exterior contamination prevention;
B. increased ventilation;
D. additional source control and monitoring; or
E. natural ventilation room-by-room calculations.
A. Exterior Contamination Prevention
Design the project to minimize and control the entry of
pollutants into the building. Ensure through the
results of computational fluid dynamics modeling, Gaussian
dispersion analyses, wind tunnel
117
Updated to reflect the April 14, 2017 LEED v4 Building Design
and Construction Addenda
modeling, or tracer gas modeling that outdoor air contaminant
concentrations at outdoor air intakes
are below the thresholds listed in Table 1 (or local equivalent
for projects outside the U.S., whichever
is more stringent).
Table 1. Maximum concentrations of pollutants at outdoor air
intakes
Pollutants Maximum concentration Standard
Those regulated
by National
Ambient Air
Quality Standards
(NAAQS)
Allowable annual average
OR
8-hour or 24-hour average
where an annual standard
does not exist
OR
Rolling 3-month average
National Ambient Air Quality Standards
(NAAQS)
B. Increased Ventilation
Increase breathing zone outdoor air ventilation rates to all
occupied spaces by at least 30% above the
minimum rates as determined in EQ Prerequisite Minimum
Indoor Air Quality Performance.
C. Carbon Dioxide Monitoring
Monitor CO2 concentrations within all densely occupied spaces.
CO2 monitors must be between 3
and 6 feet (900 and 1 800 millimeters) above the floor. CO2
monitors must have an audible or visual
indicator or alert the building automation system if the sensed
CO2 concentration exceeds the
setpoint by more than 10%. Calculate appropriate CO2 setpoints
using methods in ASHRAE 62.1–
2010, Appendix C.
D. Additional Source Control and Monitoring
For spaces where air contaminants are likely, evaluate potential
sources of additional air
contaminants besides CO2. Develop and implement a materials-
handling plan to reduce the likelihood
of contaminant release. Install monitoring systems with sensors
designed to detect the specific
contaminants. An alarm must indicate any unusual or unsafe
conditions.
E. Natural Ventilation Room-by-Room Calculations
Follow CIBSE AM10, Section 4, Design Calculations, to predict
that room-by-room airflows will
provide effective natural ventilation.
118
Updated to reflect the April 14, 2017 LEED v4 Building Design
and Construction Addenda
EQ CREDIT: LOW-EMITTING MATERIALS
BD&C
1–3 points
This credit applies to
–3 points)
ll (1–3 points)
–3 points)
–3 points)
–3 points)
–3 points)
–3 points)
–3 points)
Intent
To reduce concentrations of chemical contaminants that can
damage air quality, human health,
productivity, and the environment.
Requirements
NC, CS, SCHOOLS, RETAIL, DATA CENTERS,
WAREHOUSES & DISTRIBUTION CENTERS,
HOSPITALITY,
HEALTHCARE
This credit includes requirements for product manufacturing as
well as project teams. It covers volatile
organic compound (VOC) emissions in the indoor air and the
VOC content of materials, as well as the
testing methods by which indoor VOC emissions are
determined. Different materials must meet different
requirements to be considered compliant for this credit. The
building interior and exterior are organized in
seven categories, each with different thresholds of compliance.
The building interior is defined as
everything within the waterproofing membrane. The building
exterior is defined as everything outside and
inclusive of the primary and secondary weatherproofing system,
such as waterproofing membranes and
air- and water-resistive barrier materials.
Option 1. Product Category Calculations
Achieve the threshold level of compliance with emissions and
content standards for the number of
product categories listed in Table 2.
Table 1. Thresholds of compliance with emissions and content
standards for 7 categories of
materials
Category Threshold
Emissions and content
requirements
Interior paints and coatings
applied on site
At least 90%, by volume, for
emissions; 100% for VOC
content
for paints and coatings applied
to walls, floors, and ceilings
wet applied products
Interior adhesives and
sealants applied on site
(including flooring adhesive)
At least 90%, by volume, for
emissions; 100% for VOC
content
ent requirements for
wet applied products
Flooring 100% General Emissions Evaluation
Composite wood 100% not covered by other
categories
Composite Wood Evaluation
119
Updated to reflect the April 14, 2017 LEED v4 Building Design
and Construction Addenda
Ceilings, walls, thermal, and
acoustic insulation
Additional insulation
requirements
Furniture (include in
calculations if part of scope of
work)
At least 90%, by cost Furniture Evaluation
Healthcare and Schools
Projects only: Exterior
applied products
At least 90%, by volume Exterior Applied Products
Table 2. Points for number of compliant categories of products
Compliant categories Points
New Construction, Core Shell, Retail, Data
Centers, Warehouse and Distribution Centers,
Hospitality projects without furniture
2 1
4 2
5 3
New Construction, Core Shell, Retail, Data
Centers, Warehouse and Distribution Centers,
Hospitality projects with furniture
3 1
5 2
6 3
Schools, Healthcare without furniture
3 1
5 2
6 3
Schools, Healthcare with furniture
4 1
6 2
7 3
Option 2. Budget Calculation Method
If some products in a category do not meet the criteria, project
teams may use the budget calculation
method (Table 3).
Table 3. Points for percentage compliance, under budget
calculation method
Percentage of total Points
≥ 50% and < 70% 1
≥ 70% and < 90% 2
≥ 90% 3
The budget method organizes the building interior into six
assemblies:
120
Updated to reflect the April 14, 2017 LEED v4 Building Design
and Construction Addenda
Include furniture in the calculations if it is part of the scope of
work. Walls, ceilings, and flooring are
defined as building interior products; each layer of the
assembly, including paints, coatings, adhesives,
and sealants, must be evaluated for compliance. Insulation is
tracked separately.
Determine the total percentage of compliant materials according
to Equation 1.
Equation 1. Total percentage compliance
Total %
compliant for
projects
without
furniture =
(% compliant walls + % compliant ceilings + % compliant
flooring + % compliant insulation)
4
Total %
compliant for
projects with
furniture =
(% compliant walls + % compliant ceilings + % compliant
flooring + % compliant insulation) +
(% compliant furniture)
5
Equation 2. System percentage compliant
Flooring,
walls,
ceilings,
insulation
%
compliant =
(compliant surface area of layer 1 + compliant surface area of
layer 2 + compliant
surface area of layer 3 + …)
total surface area of layer 1 + total surface area of layer 2 +
total surface area of layer 3
+ …)
X 100
Equation 3. Furniture systems compliant, using ANSI/BIFMA
evaluation
%
compliant
for furniture
=
0.5 x cost compliant with §7.6.1 of ANSI/BIFMA e3-2011 +
cost compliant with §7.6.2 of
ANSI/BIFMA e3-2011
total furniture cost
X 100
Calculate surface area of assembly layers based on the
manufacturer’s documentation for application.
If 90% of an assembly meets the criteria, the system counts as
100% compliant. If less than 50% of an
assembly meets the criteria, the assembly counts as 0%
compliant.
Manufacturers’ claims. Both first-party and third-party
statements of product compliance must follow the
guidelines in CDPH SM V1.1–2010, Section 8. Organizations
that certify manufacturers’ claims must be
accredited under ISO Guide 65.
Laboratory requirements. Laboratories that conduct the tests
specified in this credit must be accredited
under ISO/IEC 17025 for the test methods they use.
Emissions and Content Requirements
To demonstrate compliance, a product or layer must meet all of
the following requirements, as applicable.
Inherently nonemitting sources. Products that are inherently
nonemitting sources of VOCs (stone,
ceramic, powder-coated metals, plated or anodized metal, glass,
concrete, clay brick, and unfinished or
untreated solid wood flooring) are considered fully compliant
without any VOC emissions testing if they do
not include integral organic-based surface coatings, binders, or
sealants.
General emissions evaluation. Building products must be tested
and determined compliant in accordance
with California Department of Public Health (CDPH) Standard
Method v1.1–2010, using the applicable
exposure scenario. The default scenario is the private office
scenario. The manufacturer’s or third-party
certification must state the exposure scenario used to determine
compliance. Claims of compliance for
wet-applied products must state the amount applied in mass per
surface area.
121
Updated to reflect the April 14, 2017 LEED v4 Building Design
and Construction Addenda
Manufacturers’ claims of compliance with the above
requirements must also state the range of total VOCs
after 14 days (336 hours), measured as specified in the CDPH
Standard Method v1.1:
Projects outside the U.S. may use products tested and deemed
compliant in accordance with either (1)
the CDPH standard method (2010) or (2) the German AgBB
Testing and Evaluation Scheme (2010).
Test products either with (1) the CDPH Standard Method
(2010), (2) the German AgBB Testing and
Evaluation Scheme (2010), (3) ISO 16000-3: 2010, ISO 16000-
6: 2011, ISO 16000-9: 2006, ISO 16000-
11:2006 either in conjunction with AgBB, or with French
legislation on VOC emission class labeling, or (4)
the DIBt testing method (2010). If the applied testing method
does not specify testing details for a
product group for which the CDPH standard method does
provide details, use the specifications in the
CDPH standard method. U.S. projects must follow the CDPH
standard method.
Additional VOC content requirements for wet-applied products.
In addition to meeting the general
requirements for VOC emissions (above), on-site wet-applied
products must not contain excessive levels
of VOCs, for the health of the installers and other tradesworkers
who are exposed to these products. To
demonstrate compliance, a product or layer must meet the
following requirements, as applicable.
Disclosure of VOC content must be made by the manufacturer.
Any testing must follow the test method
specified in the applicable regulation.
-applied on site must meet the
applicable VOC limits of the California
Air Resources Board (CARB) 2007, Suggested Control Measure
(SCM) for Architectural
Coatings, or the South Coast Air Quality Management District
(SCAQMD) Rule 1113, effective
June 3, 2011.
-applied on site must meet the
applicable chemical content
requirements of SCAQMD Rule 1168, July 1, 2005, Adhesive
and Sealant Applications, as
analyzed by the methods specified in Rule 1168. The provisions
of SCAQMD Rule 1168 do not
apply to adhesives and sealants subject to state or federal
consumer product VOC regulations.
and sealants wet-applied on site
must either meet the technical requirements of the above
regulations, or comply with applicable
national VOC control regulations, such as the European
Decopaint Directive (2004/42/EC), the
Canadian VOC Concentration Limits for Architectural Coatings,
or the Hong Kong Air Pollution
Control (VOC) Regulation.
traction of exempt
compounds, any content of
intentionally added exempt compounds larger than 1% weight
by mass (total exempt compounds)
must be disclosed.
testing of VOC content must comply
with ASTM D2369-10; ISO 11890, part 1; ASTM D6886-03; or
ISO 11890-2.
perchloroethylene may not be intentionally
added in paints, coatings, adhesives, or sealants.
Composite Wood Evaluation. Composite wood, as defined by
the California Air Resources Board,
Airborne Toxic Measure to Reduce Formaldehyde Emissions
from Composite Wood Products Regulation,
must be documented to have low formaldehyde emissions that
meet the California Air Resources Board
ATCM for formaldehyde requirements for ultra-low-emitting
formaldehyde (ULEF) resins or no added
formaldehyde resins.
Salvaged and reused architectural millwork more than one year
old at the time of occupancy is
considered compliant, provided it meets the requirements for
any site-applied paints, coatings, adhesives,
and sealants.
Furniture evaluation. New furniture and furnishing items must
be tested in accordance with ANSI/BIFMA
Standard Method M7.1–2011. Comply with ANSI/BIFMA e3-
2011 Furniture Sustainability Standard,
122
Updated to reflect the April 14, 2017 LEED v4 Building Design
and Construction Addenda
Sections 7.6.1 (for half credit, by cost) OR 7.6.2 (for full credit,
by cost), using either the concentration
modeling approach or the emissions factor approach. Model the
test results using the open plan, private
office, or seating scenario in ANSI/BIFMA M7.1, as
appropriate. USGBC-approved equivalent testing
methodologies and contaminant thresholds are also acceptable.
For classroom furniture, use the
standard school classroom model in CDPH Standard Method
v1.1. Documentation submitted for furniture
must indicate the modeling scenario used to determine
compliance.
Salvaged and reused furniture more than one year old at the
time of use is considered compliant,
provided it meets the requirements for any site-applied paints,
coatings, adhesives, and sealants.
Healthcare, Schools only
Additional insulation requirements. Batt insulation products
may contain no added formaldehyde,
including urea formaldehyde, phenol formaldehyde, and urea-
extended phenol formaldehyde.
Exterior applied products. Adhesives, sealants, coatings,
roofing, and waterproofing materials applied on
site must meet the VOC limits of California Air Resources
Board (CARB) 2007 Suggested Control
Measure (SCM) for Architectural Coatings, and South Coast Air
Quality Management District (SCAQMD),
Rule 1168, effective July 1, 2005. Small containers of adhesives
and sealants subject to state or federal
consumer product VOC regulations are exempt.
Projects outside North America may use either the jurisdictional
VOC content requirements or comply
with the European Decopaint Directive (2004/42/EC, to be
updated to most current version when
available) Phase II, for water-borne coatings, as analyzed
according to ISO 11890 parts 1 and 2, instead
of the CARB and SCAQMD regulatory standards.
Two materials are prohibited and do not count toward total
percentage compliance: hot-mopped asphalt
for roofing, and coal tar sealants for parking lots and other
paved surfaces.
123
Updated to reflect the April 14, 2017 LEED v4 Building Design
and Construction Addenda
EQ CREDIT: CONSTRUCTION INDOOR AIR QUALITY
MANAGEMENT PLAN
BD&C
1 point
This credit applies to
Intent
To promote the well-being of construction workers and building
occupants by minimizing indoor air quality
problems associated with construction and renovation.
Requirements
NC, CS, SCHOOLS, RETAIL, DATA CENTERS,
WAREHOUSES & DISTRIBUTION CENTERS, HOSPITALITY
Develop and implement an indoor air quality (IAQ) management
plan for the construction and
preoccupancy phases of the building. The plan must address all
of the following.
During construction, meet or exceed all applicable
recommended control measures of the Sheet Metal
and Air Conditioning National Contractors Association
(SMACNA) IAQ Guidelines for Occupied Buildings
under Construction, 2nd edition, 2007, ANSI/SMACNA 008–
2008, Chapter 3.
Protect absorptive materials stored on-site and installed from
moisture damage.
Do not operate permanently installed air-handling equipment
during construction unless filtration media
with a minimum efficiency reporting value (MERV) of 8, as
determined by ASHRAE 52.2–2007, with
errata (or equivalent filtration media class of F5 or higher, as
defined by CEN Standard EN 779–2002,
Particulate Air Filters for General Ventilation, Determination of
the Filtration Performance), are installed at
each return air grille and return or transfer duct inlet opening
such that there is no bypass around the
filtration media. Immediately before occupancy, replace all
filtration media with the final design filtration
media, installed in accordance with the manufacturer’s
recommendations.
Prohibit the use of tobacco products inside the building and
within 25 feet (7.5 meters) of the building
entrance during construction.
HEALTHCARE
Moisture. Develop and implement a moisture control plan to
protect stored on-site and installed
absorptive materials from moisture damage. Immediately
remove from site and properly dispose of any
materials susceptible to microbial growth and replace with new,
undamaged materials. Also include
strategies for protecting the building from moisture intrusion
and preventing occupants’ exposure to mold
spores.
Particulates. Do not operate permanently installed air-handling
equipment during construction unless
filtration media with a minimum efficiency reporting value
(MERV) of 8, as determined by ASHRAE 52.2–
2007, with errata (or equivalent filtration media class of F5 or
higher, as defined by CEN Standard EN
779–2002, Particulate Air Filters for General Ventilation,
Determination of the Filtration Performance), are
installed at each return air grille and return or transfer duct inlet
opening such that there is no bypass
124
Updated to reflect the April 14, 2017 LEED v4 Building Design
and Construction Addenda
around the filtration media. Immediately before occupancy,
replace all filtration media with the final design
filtration media, installed in accordance with the manufacturer’s
recommendations.
VOCs. Schedule construction procedures to minimize exposure
of absorbent materials to VOC emissions.
Complete painting and sealing before storing or installing “dry”
materials, which may accumulate
pollutants and release them over time. Store fuels, solvents, and
other sources of VOCs separately from
absorbent materials.
Outdoor emissions. For renovation projects involving
waterproofing, repairing asphalt roofing, sealing
parking lots, or other outdoor activities that generate high VOC
emissions, develop a plan to manage
fumes and avoid infiltration to occupied spaces. Comply with
the procedures established by NIOSH,
Asphalt Fume Exposures during the Application of Hot Asphalt
to Roofs (Publication 2003–112).
Tobacco. Prohibit the use of tobacco products inside the
building and within 25 feet (7.5 meters) of the
building entrance during construction.
Noise and vibration. Develop a plan based on the British
Standard (BS 5228) to reduce noise emissions
and vibrations from construction equipment and other nonroad
engines by specifying low-noise emission
design or the lowest decibel level available that meets
performance requirements in the British Standard.
Construction crews must wear ear protection in areas where
sound levels exceed 85 dB for extended
periods.
Infection control. For renovations and additions adjacent to
occupied facilities or phased occupancy in
new construction, follow the FGI 2010 Guidelines for Design
and Construction of Health Care Facilities
and the Joint Commission on Standards to establish an
integrative infection control team comprising the
owner, designer, and contractor to evaluate infection control
risk and document the required precautions
in a project-specific plan. Use the infection control risk
assessment standard published by the American
Society of Healthcare Engineering and the U.S. Centers for
Disease Control and Prevention (CDC) as a
guideline to assess risk and to select mitigation procedures for
construction activities.
125
Updated to reflect the April 14, 2017 LEED v4 Building Design
and Construction Addenda
EQ CREDIT: INDOOR AIR QUALITY ASSESSMENT
BD&C
1–2 points
This credit applies to
–2 points)
–2 points)
–2 points)
–2 points)
–2 points)
–2 points)
–2 points)
Intent
To establish better quality indoor air in the building after
construction and during occupancy.
Requirements
NC, SCHOOLS, RETAIL, DATA CENTERS, WAREHOUSES &
DISTRIBUTION CENTERS, HOSPITALITY, HEALTHCARE
Select one of the following two options, to be implemented after
construction ends and the building has
been completely cleaned. All interior finishes, such as
millwork, doors, paint, carpet, acoustic tiles, and
movable furnishings (e.g., workstations, partitions), must be
installed, and major VOC punch list items
must be finished. The options cannot be combined.
Option 1. Flush-Out (1 point)
Path 1. Before Occupancy
Install new filtration media and perform a building flush-out by
supplying a total air volume of 14,000 cubic
feet of outdoor air per square foot (4 267 140 liters of outdoor
air per square meter) of gross floor area
while maintaining an internal temperature of at least 60°F
relative humidity no higher than 60%.
OR
Path 2. During Occupancy
If occupancy is desired before the flush-out is completed, the
space may be occupied only after delivery
of a minimum of 3,500 cubic feet of outdoor air per square foot
(1 066 260 liters of outdoor air per square
meter) of gross floor area while maintaining an internal
temperature of at least 60°F (15°C) and no higher
Once the space is occupied, it must be ventilated at a minimum
rate of 0.30 cubic foot per minute (cfm)
per square foot of outdoor air (1.5 liters per second per square
meter of outside air) or the design
minimum outdoor air rate determined in EQ Prerequisite
Minimum Indoor Air Quality Performance,
whichever is greater. During each day of the flush-out period,
ventilation must begin at least three hours
before occupancy and continue during occupancy. These
conditions must be maintained until a total of
14,000 cubic feet per square foot of outdoor air (4 270 liters of
outdoor air per square meter) has been
delivered to the space.
OR
Option 2. Air Testing (2 points)
After construction ends and before occupancy, but under
ventilation conditions typical for occupancy,
conduct baseline IAQ testing using protocols consistent with the
methods listed in Table 1 for all occupied
spaces. Use current versions of ASTM standard methods, EPA
compendium methods, or ISO methods,
as indicated. Laboratories that conduct the tests for chemical
analysis of formaldehyde and volatile
126
Updated to reflect the April 14, 2017 LEED v4 Building Design
and Construction Addenda
organic compounds must be accredited under ISO/IEC 17025 for
the test methods they use. Retail
projects may conduct the testing within 14 days of occupancy.
Demonstrate that contaminants do not exceed the concentration
levels listed in Table 1.
Table 1. Maximum concentration levels, by contaminant and
testing method
Contaminant
Maximum
concentration
ASTM and U.S. EPA
methods
ISO method
Particulates PM10 (for all buildings) 50 μg/m3
Healthcare only: 20
μg/m3
EPA Compendium
Method IP-10
ISO 7708
PM2.5 (for buildings in EPA
nonattainment areas for PM2.5, or
local equivalent)
15 μg/m3
Ozone (for buildings in EPA nonattainment areas for
Ozone, or local equivalent)
0.075 ppm ASTM D5149 - 02 ISO 13964
Carbon monoxide (CO) 9 ppm; no more than 2
ppm above outdoor levels
EPA Compendium
Method IP-3
ISO 4224
Total volatile organic compounds (TVOCs) 500 μg/m3
Healthcare only: 200
μg/m3
EPA TO-1, TO-17, or
EPA Compendium
Method IP-1
ISO 16000-6
Formaldehyde 27 ppb
Healthcare only: 16.3 ppb
ASTM D5197, EPA TO-
11, or
EPA Compendium
Method IP-6
ISO 16000-3
Target volatile
organic
compounds*
1 Acetaldehyde 140 μg/m3
2 Benzene 3 μg/m3
ASTM D5197;
EPA TO-1, TO-17, or
EPA Compendium
Method IP-1
ISO 16000-3,
ISO 16000-6
3 Carbon disulfide 800 μg/m3
4 Carbon tetrachloride 40 μg/m3
5 Chlorobenzene 1000 μg/m3
6 Chloroform 300 μg/m3
7 Dichlorobenzene (1,4-) 800μg/m3
8 Dichloroethylene (1,1) 70 μg/m3
9 Dimethylformamide (N,N-) 80 μg/m3
10 Dioxane (1,4-) 3000 μg/m3
11 Epichlorohydrin 3 μg/m3
12 Ethylbenzene 2000 μg/m3
13 Ethylene glycol 400 μg/m3
14
Ethylene glycol monoethyl
ether
70 μg/m3
15
Ethylene glycol monoethyl
ether acetate
300 μg/m3
16
Ethylene glycol monomethyl
ether
60 μg/m3
17
Ethylene glycol monomethyl
ether acetate
90 μg/m3
127
Updated to reflect the April 14, 2017 LEED v4 Building Design
and Construction Addenda
19 Hexane (n-) 7000 μg/m3
20 Isophorone 2000 μg/m3
21 Isopropanol 7000 μg/m3
22 Methyl chloroform 1000 μg/m3
23 Methylene chloride 400 μg/m3
24 Methyl t-butyl ether 8000 μg/m3
25 Naphthalene 9 μg/m3
26 Phenol 200 μg/m3
27
Propylene glycol
monomethyl ether
7000 μg/m3
28 Styrene 900 μg/m3
29
Tetrachloroethylene
(Perchloroethylene)
35 μg/m3
30 Toluene 300 μg/m3
31 Trichloroethylene 600 μg/m3
32 Vinyl acetate 200 μg/m3
33-
35
Xylenes, technical mixture
(m-, o-, p-xylene combined)
700 μg/m3
ppb = parts per billion; ppm = parts per million; μg/cm =
micrograms per cubic meter
*The target volatile organic compounds are from CDPH
Standard Method v1.1, Table 4-1. The Maximum
concentration limits for these target compounds are the full
CREL adopted by Cal/EPA OEHHA in effect on June
2014 http://oehha.ca.gov/air/allrels.html.
Conduct all measurements before occupancy but during normal
occupied hours, with the building
ventilation system started at the normal daily start time and
operated at the minimum outdoor airflow rate
for the occupied mode throughout the test.
For each sampling point where the concentration exceeds the
limit, take corrective action and retest for
the noncompliant contaminants at the same sampling points.
Repeat until all requirements are met.
http://oehha.ca.gov/air/allrels.html
128
Updated to reflect the April 14, 2017 LEED v4 Building Design
and Construction Addenda
EQ CREDIT: THERMAL COMFORT
BD&C
1 point
This credit applies to
Intent
To promote occupants’ productivity, comfort, and well-being by
providing quality thermal comfort.
Requirements
Meet the requirements for both thermal comfort design and
thermal comfort control.
Thermal Comfort Design
NC, SCHOOLS, RETAIL, DATA CENTERS, HOSPITALITY,
HEALTHCARE
Option 1. ASHRAE Standard 55-2010
Design heating, ventilating, and air-conditioning (HVAC)
systems and the building envelope to meet the
requirements of ASHRAE Standard 55–2010, Thermal Comfort
Conditions for Human Occupancy with
errata or a local equivalent.
For natatoriums, demonstrate compliance with ASHRAE HVAC
Applications Handbook, 2011 edition,
Chapter 5, Places of Assembly, Typical Natatorium Design
Conditions, with errata.
OR
Option 2. ISO and CEN Standards
Design HVAC systems and the building envelope to meet the
requirements of the applicable standard:
analytical determination and
interpretation of thermal comfort, using calculation of the PMV
and PPD indices and local thermal
comfort criteria; and
Parameters for Design and
Assessment of Energy Performance of Buildings, addressing
indoor air quality, thermal
environment, lighting, and acoustics, Section A2.
Data Centers only
Meet the above requirements for regularly occupied spaces.
WAREHOUSES & DISTRIBUTION CENTERS
Meet the above requirements for office portions of the building.
In regularly occupied areas of the building’s bulk storage,
sorting, and distribution areas, include one or
more of the following design alternatives:
129
Updated to reflect the April 14, 2017 LEED v4 Building Design
and Construction Addenda
time air, heat venting, or wind
flow;
-based
systems) or heating systems; and
-wired fans that provide air movement for
occupants’ comfort.
tegy.
Thermal Comfort Control
NC, SCHOOLS, RETAIL, DATA CENTERS, WAREHOUSES &
DISTRIBUTION CENTERS, HOSPITALITY
Provide individual thermal comfort controls for at least 50% of
individual occupant spaces. Provide group
thermal comfort controls for all shared multioccupant spaces.
Thermal comfort controls allow occupants, whether in
individual spaces or shared multioccupant spaces,
to adjust at least one of the following in their local
environment: air temperature, radiant temperature, air
speed, and humidity.
Hospitality only
Guest rooms are assumed to provide adequate thermal comfort
controls and are therefore not included in
the credit calculations.
Retail only
Meet the above requirements for at least 50% of the individual
occupant spaces in office and
administrative areas.
HEALTHCARE
Provide individual thermal comfort controls for every patient
room and at least 50% of the remaining
individual occupant spaces. Provide group thermal comfort
controls for all shared multioccupant spaces.
Thermal comfort controls allow occupants, whether in
individual spaces or shared multioccupant spaces,
to adjust at least one of the following in their local
environment: air temperature, radiant temperature, air
speed, and humidity.
130
Updated to reflect the April 14, 2017 LEED v4 Building Design
and Construction Addenda
EQ CREDIT: INTERIOR LIGHTING
BD&C
1–2 points
This credit applies to
–2 points)
–2 points)
–2 points)
–2 points)
–2 points)
Intent
To promote occupants’ productivity, comfort, and well-being by
providing high-quality lighting.
Requirements
NC, SCHOOLS, DATA CENTERS, WAREHOUSES &
DISTRIBUTION CENTERS, HOSPITALITY
Select one or both of the following two options.
Option 1. Lighting Control (1 point)
For at least 90% of individual occupant spaces, provide
individual lighting controls that enable occupants
to adjust the lighting to suit their individual tasks and
preferences, with at least three lighting levels or
scenes (on, off, midlevel). Midlevel is 30% to 70% of the
maximum illumination level (not including
daylight contributions).
For all shared multioccupant spaces, meet all of the following
requirements.
occupants to adjust the lighting to meet
group needs and preferences, with at least three lighting levels
or scenes (on, off, midlevel).
separately controlled.
space as the controlled luminaires. A
person operating the controls must have a direct line of sight to
the controlled luminaires.
Hospitality only
Guest rooms are assumed to provide adequate lighting controls
and are therefore not included in the
credit calculations.
AND/OR
Option 2. Lighting Quality (1 point)
Choose four of the following strategies.
A. For all regularly occupied spaces, use light fixtures with a
luminance of less than 2,500 cd/m2
between 45 and 90 degrees from nadir.
Exceptions include wallwash fixtures properly aimed at walls,
as specified by manufacturer’s data,
indirect uplighting fixtures, provided there is no view down into
these uplights from a regularly
occupied space above, and any other specific applications (i.e.
adjustable fixtures).
B. For the entire project, use light sources with a CRI of 80 or
higher. Exceptions include lamps or
fixtures specifically designed to provide colored lighting for
effect, site lighting, or other special use.
C. For at least 75% of the total connected lighting load, use
light sources that have a rated life (or L70
for LED sources) of at least 24,000 hours (at 3-hour per start, if
applicable).
131
Updated to reflect the April 14, 2017 LEED v4 Building Design
and Construction Addenda
D. Use direct-only overhead lighting for 25% or less of the total
connected lighting load for all regularly
occupied spaces.
E. For at least 90% of the regularly occupied floor area, meet or
exceed the following thresholds for
area-weighted average surface reflectance: 85% for ceilings,
60% for walls, and 25% for floors.
F. If furniture is included in the scope of work, select furniture
finishes to meet or exceed the following
thresholds for area-weighted average surface reflectance: 45%
for work surfaces, and 50% for
movable partitions.
G. For at least 75% of the regularly occupied floor area, meet a
ratio of average wall surface illuminance
(excluding fenestration) to average work plane (or surface, if
defined) illuminance that does not
exceed 1:10. Must also meet strategy E, strategy F, or
demonstrate area-weighted surface
reflectance of at least 60% for walls.
H. For at least 75% of the regularly occupied floor area, meet a
ratio of average ceiling illuminance
(excluding fenestration) to work surface illuminance that does
not exceed 1:10. Must also meet
strategy E, strategy F, or demonstrate area-weighted surface
reflectance of at least 85% for ceilings.
RETAIL NC
For at least 90% of the individual occupant spaces in office and
administrative areas, provide individual
lighting controls.
In sales areas, provide controls that can reduce the ambient light
levels to a midlevel (30% to 70% of the
maximum illumination level not including daylight
contributions).
HEALTHCARE
Provide individual lighting controls for at least 90% of
individual occupant spaces in staff areas.
For at least 90% of patient positions, provide lighting controls
that are readily accessible from the patient’s
bed. In multioccupant patient spaces, the controls must be
individual lighting controls. In private rooms,
also provide exterior window shades, blinds, or curtain controls
that are readily accessible from the
patient’s bed. Exceptions include in-patient critical care,
pediatric, and psychiatric patient rooms.
For all shared multioccupant spaces, provide multizone control
systems that enable occupants to adjust
the lighting to meet group needs and preferences, with at least
three lighting levels or scenes (on, off,
midlevel). Midlevel is 30% to 70% of the maximum
illumination level (not including daylight contributions).
132
Updated to reflect the April 14, 2017 LEED v4 Building Design
and Construction Addenda
EQ CREDIT: DAYLIGHT
BD&C
1–3 points
This credit applies to
–3 points)
–3 points)
chools (1–3 points)
–3 points)
–3 points)
–3 points)
–3 points)
–2 points)
Intent
To connect building occupants with the outdoors, reinforce
circadian rhythms, and reduce the use of
electrical lighting by introducing daylight into the space.
Requirements
NC, CS, SCHOOLS, RETAIL, DATA CENTERS,
WAREHOUSES & DISTRIBUTION CENTERS,
HOSPITALITY,
HEALTHCARE
Provide manual or automatic (with manual override) glare-
control devices for all regularly occupied
spaces.
Select one of the following three options.
Option 1. Simulation: Spatial Daylight Autonomy and Annual
Sunlight Exposure (2–3 points, 1-2
points Healthcare)
Demonstrate through annual computer simulations that spatial
daylight autonomy300/50% (sDA300/50%) of at
least 55%, 75%, or 90% is achieved. Use regularly occupied
floor area. Healthcare projects should use
the perimeter area determined under EQ Credit Quality Views.
Points are awarded according to Table 1.
Table 1. Points for daylit floor area: Spatial daylight autonomy
New Construction, Core and Shell, Schools, Retail,
Data Centers, Warehouses and Distribution
Centers, Hospitality Healthcare
sDA (for regularly occupied
floor area) Points
sDA (for perimeter floor
area) Points
55% 2 75% 1
75% 3 90% 2
AND
Demonstrate through annual computer simulations that annual
sunlight exposure1000,250 (ASE1000,250) of no
more than 10% is achieved. Use the regularly occupied floor
area that is daylit per the sDA300/50%
simulations.
The sDA and ASE calculation grids should be no more than 2
feet (600 millimeters) square and laid out
across the regularly occupied area at a work plane height of 30
inches (76 millimeters) above finished
floor (unless otherwise defined). Use an hourly time-step
analysis based on typical meteorological year
133
Updated to reflect the April 14, 2017 LEED v4 Building Design
and Construction Addenda
data, or an equivalent, for the nearest available weather station.
Include any permanent interior
obstructions. Moveable furniture and partitions may be
excluded.
CS only
If the finishes in the space will not be completed, use the
following default surface reflectances: 80% for
ceilings, 20% for floors, and 50% for walls. Assume that the
entire floor plate, except for the core, will be
regularly occupied space.
OR
Option 2. Simulation: Illuminance Calculations (1–2 points)
Demonstrate through computer modeling that illuminance levels
will be between 300 lux and 3,000 lux for
9 a.m. and 3 p.m., both on a clear-sky day at the equinox, for
the floor area indicated in Table 2. Use
regularly occupied floor area. Healthcare projects should use
the perimeter area determined under EQ
Credit Quality Views.
Table 2. Points for daylit floor area: Illuminance calculation
New Construction, Core and Shell, Schools, Retail,
Data Centers, Warehouses and Distribution Centers,
Hospitality Healthcare
Percentage of regularly
occupied floor area Points
Percentage of
perimeter floor area Points
75% 1 75% 1
90% 2 90% 2
Calculate illuminance intensity for sun (direct component) and
sky (diffuse component) for clear-sky
conditions as follows:
eorological year data, or an equivalent, for
the nearest available weather station.
within 15 days of March 21 that
represent the clearest sky condition.
e for the two selected days.
Exclude blinds or shades from the model. Include any
permanent interior obstructions. Moveable furniture
and partitions may be excluded.
CS only
Assume the following default surface reflectances if the finishes
in the space will not be completed: 80%
for ceilings, 20% for floors, and 50% for walls. Assume that the
entire floor plate, except for the core, will
be regularly occupied space.
OR
Option 3. Measurement (2-3 points, 1-2 points Healthcare)
Achieve illuminance levels between 300 lux and 3,000 lux for
the floor area indicated in Table 3.
Table 3. Points for daylit floor area: Measurement
New Construction, Core and Schools,
Schools, Retail, Data Centers, Warehouses
and Distribution Centers, Hospitality Healthcare
Percentage of regularly
occupied floor area Points
Percentage of perimeter floor
area
75 2 75 1
90 3 90 2
134
Updated to reflect the April 14, 2017 LEED v4 Building Design
and Construction Addenda
With furniture, fixtures, and equipment in place, measure
illuminance levels as follows:
between 9 a.m. and 3 p.m.
take a second as indicated in Table
4.
take measurements on a maximum
10 foot (3 meter) square grid.
measurements on a maximum 3
foot (900 millimeters) square grid.
Table 4. Timing of measurements for illuminance
If first measurement is taken in … take second measurement in
…
January May-September
February June-October
March June-July, November-December
April August-December
May September-January
June October-February
July November-March
August December-April
September December-January, May-June
October February-June
November March-July
December April-August
135
Updated to reflect the April 14, 2017 LEED v4 Building Design
and Construction Addenda
EQ CREDIT: QUALITY VIEWS
BD&C
1–2 points
This credit applies to
enters (1 point)
-2 points)
Intent
To give building occupants a connection to the natural outdoor
environment by providing quality views.
Requirements
NC, CS, SCHOOLS, RETAIL, DATA CENTERS,
HOSPITALITY
Achieve a direct line of sight to the outdoors via vision glazing
for 75% of all regularly occupied floor area.
View glazing in the contributing area must provide a clear
image of the exterior, not obstructed by frits,
fibers, patterned glazing, or added tints that distort color
balance.
Additionally, 75% of all regularly occupied floor area must
have at least two of the following four kinds of
views:
at least 90 degrees apart;
fauna, or sky; (2) movement; and (3)
objects at least 25 feet (7.5 meters) from the exterior of the
glazing;
the head height of the vision
glazing; and
“Windows and Offices; A Study of Office
Worker Performance and the Indoor Environment.”
Include in the calculations any permanent interior obstructions.
Movable furniture and partitions may be
excluded.
Views into interior atria may be used to meet up to 30% of the
required area.
WAREHOUSES & DISTRIBUTION CENTERS
For the office portion of the building, meet the requirements
above.
For the bulk storage, sorting, and distribution portions of the
building, meet the requirements above for
25% of the regularly occupied floor area.
HEALTHCARE
For inpatient units (IPUs), meet the requirements above (1
point).
For other areas, configure the building floor plates such that the
floor area within 15 feet (4.5 meters) of
the perimeter exceeds the perimeter area requirement (Table 1),
and meet the requirements above for
the perimeter area (1 point).
136
Updated to reflect the April 14, 2017 LEED v4 Building Design
and Construction Addenda
Table 1. Minimum compliant perimeter area, by floor plate area
Floor plate area Perimeter area
(square feet) (square meters) (square feet) (square meters)
Up to 15,000 Up to 1 400 7,348 682
20,000 1 800 8,785 816
25,000 2 300 10,087 937
30,000 2 800 11,292 1 049
35,000 3 300 12,425 1 154
40,000 3 700 13,500 1 254
45,000 4 200 14,528 1 349
50,000 and larger 4 600 and larger 15,516 1 441
137
Updated to reflect the April 14, 2017 LEED v4 Building Design
and Construction Addenda
EQ CREDIT: ACOUSTIC PERFORMANCE
BD&C
1–2 points
This credit applies to
t)
–2 points)
Intent
To provide workspaces and classrooms that promote occupants’
well-being, productivity, and
communications through effective acoustic design.
Requirements
NC, DATA CENTERS, WAREHOUSES & DISTRIBUTION
CENTERS, HOSPITALITY
For all occupied spaces, meet the following requirements, as
applicable, for HVAC background noise,
sound isolation, reverberation time, and sound reinforcement
and masking.
HVAC Background Noise
Achieve maximum background noise levels from heating,
ventilating, and air conditioning (HVAC)
systems per 2011 ASHRAE Handbook, HVAC Applications,
Chapter 48, Table 1; AHRI Standard 885-
2008, Table 15; or a local equivalent. Calculate or measure
sound levels.
For measurements, use a sound level meter that conforms to
ANSI S1.4 for type 1 (precision) or type 2
(general purpose) sound measurement instrumentation, or a
local equivalent.
Comply with design criteria for HVAC noise levels resulting
from the sound transmission paths listed in
ASHRAE 2011 Applications Handbook, Table 6; or a local
equivalent.
Sound Transmission
Meet the composite sound transmission class (STCC) ratings
listed in Table 1, or local building code,
whichever is more stringent.
Table 1. Minimum composite sound transmission class ratings
for adjacent spaces
Adjacency combinations STCC
Residence (within a multifamily
residence), hotel or motel room
Residence, hotel or motel room 55
Residence, hotel or motel room Common hallway, stairway 50
Residence, hotel or motel room Retail 60
Retail Retail 50
Standard office Standard office 45
Executive office Executive office 50
Conference room Conference room 50
Office, conference room Hallway, stairway 50
Mechanical equipment room Occupied area 60
Reverberation Time
138
Updated to reflect the April 14, 2017 LEED v4 Building Design
and Construction Addenda
Meet the reverberation time requirements in Table 2 (adapted
from Table 9.1 in the Performance
Measurement Protocols for Commercial Buildings3).
Table 2. Reverberation time requirements
Room type Application
T60 (sec), at 500 Hz, 1000 Hz,
and 2000 Hz
Apartment and condominium — < 0.6
Hotel/motel Individual room or suite < 0.6
Meeting or banquet room < 0.8
Office building Executive or private office < 0.6
Conference room < 0.6
Teleconference room < 0.6
Open-plan office without sound
masking
< 0.8
Open-plan office with sound
masking
0.8
Courtroom Unamplified speech < 0.7
Amplified speech < 1.0
Performing arts space
Drama theaters, concert and
recital halls
Varies by application
Laboratories
Testing or research with minimal
speech communication
< 1.0
Extensive phone use and
speech communication
< 0.6
Church, mosque, synagogue
General assembly with critical
music program
Varies by application
Library < 1.0
Indoor stadium, gymnasium Gymnasium and natatorium < 2.0
Large-capacity space with
speech amplification
< 1.5
Classroom — < 0.6
Sound Reinforcement and Masking Systems
Sound Reinforcement
For all large conference rooms and auditoriums seating more
than 50 persons, evaluate whether sound
reinforcement and AV playback capabilities are needed.
If needed, the sound reinforcement systems must meet the
following criteria:
common intelligibility scale (CIS)
rating of at least 0.77 at representative points within the area of
coverage to provide acceptable
intelligibility.
-level coverage within +/–3 dB at the 2000 Hz
octave band throughout the space.
Masking Systems
For projects that use masking systems, the design levels must
not exceed 48 dBA. Ensure that
loudspeaker coverage provides uniformity of +/–2 dBA and that
speech spectra are effectively masked.
SCHOOLS
3 Adapted from ASHRAE (2007d), ASA (2008), ANSI (2002),
and CEN (2007)
139
Updated to reflect the April 14, 2017 LEED v4 Building Design
and Construction Addenda
HVAC Background noise
Achieve a background noise level of 35 dBA or less from
heating, ventilating, and air-conditioning (HVAC)
systems in classrooms and other core learning spaces. Follow
the recommended methodologies and best
practices for mechanical system noise control in ANSI Standard
S12.60–2010, Part 1, Annex A.1; the
2011 HVAC Applications ASHRAE Handbook, Chapter 48,
Sound and Vibration Control, with errata;
AHRI Standard 885–2008; or a local equivalent.
Sound Transmission
Design classrooms and other core learning spaces to meet the
sound transmission class (STC)
requirements of ANSI S12.60–2010 Part 1, or a local
equivalent. Exterior windows must have an STC
rating of at least 35, unless outdoor and indoor noise levels can
be verified to justify a lower rating.
HEALTHCARE
Design the facility to meet or exceed the sound and vibration
criteria outlined below, which are adapted
from the 2010 FGI Guidelines for Design and Construction of
Health Care Facilities (“2010 FGI
Guidelines”) and the reference document on which it is based,
Sound and Vibration Design Guidelines for
Health Care Facilities (“2010 SV Guidelines”).
Option 1. Speech Privacy, Sound Isolation, and Background
Noise (1 point)
Speech Privacy and Sound Isolation
Design sound isolation to achieve speech privacy, acoustical
comfort, and minimal annoyance from
noise-producing sources. Consider sound levels at both source
and receiver locations, the background
sound at receiver locations, and the occupants’ acoustical
privacy and acoustical comfort needs. Speech
privacy is defined as “techniques … to render speech
unintelligible to casual listeners” (ANSI T1.523-
2001, Telecom Glossary 2007).
Design the facility to meet the criteria outlined in the sections
of Table 1.2-3, Design Criteria for Minimum
Sound Isolation Performance between Enclosed Rooms, and
Table 1.2-4 Speech Privacy for Enclosed
Room and Open-Plan Spaces (in the 2010 FGI Guidelines and
2010 SV Guidelines).
Calculate or measure sound isolation and speech privacy
descriptors achieved for representative
adjacencies as necessary to confirm compliance with the criteria
in the 2010 FGI Guidelines, Sections1.2-
6.1.5 and 1.2-6.1.6, and the 2010 SV Guidelines (including the
appendix).
Background Noise
Consider background noise levels generated by all building
mechanical-electrical-plumbing systems, air
distribution systems and other facility noise sources under the
purview of the project building design-
construction team.
Design the facility to meet the 2010 FGI Guidelines, Table 1.2-
2 Minimum-Maximum Design Criteria for
Noise in representative interior rooms and spaces.
Calculate or measure sound levels in representative rooms and
spaces of each type to confirm
compliance with criteria in the above-referenced table using a
sound level meter that conforms to ANSI
S1.4 for type 1 (precision) or type 2 (general purpose) sound
measurement instrumentation. For spaces
not listed in Table 1.2-2, refer to ASHRAE 2011 Handbook,
Chapter 48, Sound and Vibration Control,
Table 1.
Option 2. Acoustical Finishes and Site Exterior Noise (1 point)
Meet the requirements for acoustical finishes and site exterior
noise.
Acoustical Finishes
Specify materials, products systems installation details, and
other design features to meet the 2010 FGI
Guidelines, Table 1.2-1, Design Room Sound Absorption
Coefficients (including associated sections of
the appendix) and the 2010 SV Guidelines.
140
Updated to reflect the April 14, 2017 LEED v4 Building Design
and Construction Addenda
Calculate or measure the average sound absorption coefficients
for representative unoccupied rooms of
each type in the building to confirm conformance with the
requirements.
Site Exterior Noise
Minimize the effect on building occupants of site exterior noise
produced by road traffic, aircraft flyovers,
railroads, on-site heliports, emergency power generators during
maintenance testing, outdoor facility MEP
and building services equipment, etc. Also minimize effects on
the surrounding community from all facility
MEP equipment and activities as required to meet (1) local
applicable codes or (2) Table 1.2-1 of the
2010 FGI Guidelines, Table 1.2-1, and the 2010 SV Guidelines,
Table 1.3-1, whichever is more stringent.
Comply with the 2010 FGI Guidelines for the following noise
sources:
-3.6.2.2;
-8.3.3.1;
-8.2.1.1; and
-5.3
Measure and analyze data to determine the exterior noise
classification (A, B, C, or D) of the facility site.
See the 2010 FGI Guidelines, Categorization of Health Care
Facility Sites by Exterior Ambient Sound,
Table A1.2a, and the 2010 SV Guidelines, Table 1.3-1.
Design the building envelope composite STC rating based on
the 2010 FGI Guidelines, Categorization of
Health Care Facility Sites by Exterior Ambient Sound, and show
conformance with requirements.
For exterior site exposure categories B, C, or D, calculate or
measure the sound isolation performance of
representative elements of the exterior building envelope to
determine the composite sound transmission
class (STCc) rating for representative façade sections.
Measurements should generally conform to ASTM
E966, Standard Guide for Field Measurements of Airborne
Sound Insulation of Building Façades and
Façade Elements, current edition.
141
Updated to reflect the April 14, 2017 LEED v4 Building Design
and Construction Addenda
INNOVATION (IN)
IN CREDIT: INNOVATION
BD&C
1–5 points
This credit applies to
–5 points)
–5 points)
–5 points)
–5 points)
ters (1–5 points)
–5 points)
–5 points)
–5 points)
Intent
To encourage projects to achieve exceptional or innovative
performance.
Requirements
NC, CS, SCHOOLS, RETAIL, DATA CENTERS,
WAREHOUSES & DISTRIBUTION CENTERS,
HOSPITALITY,
HEALTHCARE
Project teams can use any combination of innovation, pilot, and
exemplary performance strategies.
Option 1. Innovation (1 point)
Achieve significant, measurable environmental performance
using a strategy not addressed in the LEED
green building rating system.
Identify the following:
; and
requirements.
AND/OR
Option 2. Pilot (1 point)
Achieve one pilot credit from USGBC’s LEED Pilot Credit
Library.
AND/OR
Option 3. Additional Strategies
-3 points)
Defined in Option 1 above.
-3 points)
Meet the requirements of Option 2.
–2 points)
Achieve exemplary performance in an existing LEED v4
prerequisite or credit that allows
exemplary performance, as specified in the LEED Reference
Guide, v4 edition. An exemplary
142
Updated to reflect the April 14, 2017 LEED v4 Building Design
and Construction Addenda
performance point is typically earned for achieving double the
credit requirements or the next
incremental percentage threshold.
143
Updated to reflect the April 14, 2017 LEED v4 Building Design
and Construction Addenda
IN CREDIT: LEED ACCREDITED PROFESSIONAL
BD&C
1 point
This credit applies to
nt)
Intent
To encourage the team integration required by a LEED project
and to streamline the application and
certification process.
Requirements
NC, CS, SCHOOLS, RETAIL NC, DATA CENTERS,
WAREHOUSES & DISTRIBUTION CENTERS,
HOSPITALITY,
HEALTHCARE
At least one principal participant of the project team must be a
LEED Accredited Professional (AP) with a
specialty appropriate for the project.
144
Updated to reflect the April 14, 2017 LEED v4 Building Design
and Construction Addenda
REGIONAL PRIORITY (RP)
RP CREDIT: REGIONAL PRIORITY
BD&C
4 points
This credit applies to
-4 points)
-4 points)
-4 points)
-4 points)
-4 points)
-4 points)
-4 points)
-4 points)
Intent
To provide an incentive for the achievement of credits that
address geographically specific environmental,
social equity, and public health priorities.
Requirements
NC, CS, SCHOOLS, RETAIL NC, DATA CENTERS,
WAREHOUSES & DISTRIBUTION CENTERS,
HOSPITALITY,
HEALTHCARE
Earn up to four of the six Regional Priority credits. These
credits have been identified by the USGBC
regional councils and chapters as having additional regional
importance for the project’s region. A
database of Regional Priority credits and their geographic
applicability is available on the USGBC
website, http://www.usgbc.org.
One point is awarded for each Regional Priority credit achieved,
up to a maximum of four.
http://www.usgbc.org/
145
Updated to reflect the April 14, 2017 LEED v4 Building Design
and Construction Addenda
APPENDICES
APPENDIX 1. USE TYPES AND CATEGORIES
Table 1. Use Types and Categories
Category Use type
Food retail Supermarket
Grocery with produce section
Community-serving
retail
Convenience store
Farmers market
Hardware store
Pharmacy
Other retail
Services Bank
Family entertainment venue (e.g., theater, sports)
Gym, health club, exercise studio
Hair care
Laundry, dry cleaner
Restaurant, café, diner (excluding those with only drive-thru
service)
Civic and community
facilities
Adult or senior care (licensed)
Child care (licensed)
Community or recreation center
Cultural arts facility (museum, performing arts)
Education facility (e.g., K—12 school, university, adult
education center,
vocational school, community college)
Government office that serves public on-site
Medical clinic or office that treats patients
Place of worship
Police or fire station
Post office
Public library
Public park
Social services center
Community anchor
uses (BD&C and ID&C
only)
Commercial office (100 or more full-time equivalent jobs)
Housing (100 or more dwelling units)
Adapted from Criterion Planners, INDEX neighborhood
completeness indicator, 2005.
146
Updated to reflect the April 14, 2017 LEED v4 Building Design
and Construction Addenda
APPENDIX 2. DEFAULT OCCUPANCY COUNTS
Use Table 1 to calculate default occupancy counts. Only use
the occupancy estimates if occupancy is
unknown.
For the calculation, use gross floor area, not net or leasable
floor area. Gross floor area is defined as the
sum of all areas on all floors of a building included within the
outside faces of the exterior wall, including
common areas, mechanical spaces, circulation areas, and all
floor penetrations that connect one floor to
another. To determine gross floor area, multiply the building
footprint (in square feet or square meters) by
the number of floors in the building. Exclude underground or
structured parking from the calculation.
Table 1. Default Occupancy Numbers
Gross square feet per occupant
Gross square meters per occupant
Employees
Transients
Employees Transients
General office
250
0
23 0
Retail, general
550
130
51 12
Retail or service (e.g., financial, auto)
600
130
56 12
Restaurant
435
95
40 9
Grocery store
550
115
51 11
Medical office
225
330
21 31
R&D or laboratory
400
0
37 0
Warehouse, distribution
2,500
0
232 0
Warehouse, storage
20,000
0
1860 0
Hotel
1,500 700
139 65
Educational, daycare
630 105
59 10
Educational, K–12
1,300
140
121 13
Educational, postsecondary 2,100 150
195 14
Sources:
ANSI/ASHRAE/IESNA Standard 90.1–2004 (Atlanta, GA,
2004).
2001 Uniform Plumbing Code (Los Angeles, CA)
California Public Utilities Commission, 2004–2005 Database
for Energy Efficiency Resources (DEER) Update Study (2008).
California State University, Capital Planning, Design and
Construction Section VI, Standards for Campus Development
Programs ( Long Beach, CA, 2002).
City of Boulder Planning Department, Projecting Future
Employment—How Much Space per Person (Boulder, 2002).
Metro, 1999 Employment Density Study (Portland, OR 1999).
American Hotel and Lodging Association, Lodging Industry
Profile Washington, DC, 2008.
LEED for Core & Shell Core Committee, personal
communication (2003 - 2006).
LEED for Retail Core Committee, personal communication
(2007)
OWP/P, Medical Office Building Project Averages (Chicago,
2008).
OWP/P, University Master Plan Projects (Chicago, 2008).
U.S. General Services Administration, Childcare Center Design
Guide (Washington, DC,2003).
147
Updated to reflect the April 14, 2017 LEED v4 Building Design
and Construction Addenda
APPENDIX 3. RETAIL PROCESS LOAD BASELINES
Table 1a. Commercial kitchen appliance prescriptive measures
and baseline for energy cost
budget (IP units)
Baseline energy usage for energy modeling
path Levels for prescriptive path
Appliance
type Fuel Function
Baseline
efficiency
Baseline idle
rate
Prescriptive
efficiency
Prescriptive idle
rate
Broiler,
underfired Gas Cooking 30%
16,000 Btu/h/ft2
peak input 35%
12,000 Btu/h/ft2
peak input
Combination
ovens,
steam mode
(P = pan
capacity) Elec Cooking
40% steam
mode 0.37P+4.5 kW
50% steam
mode
0.133P+0.6400
kW
Combination
ovens,
steam mode Gas Cooking
20% steam
mode
1,210P+35,810
Btu/h
38% steam
mode
200P+6,511
Btu/h
Combination
ovens,
convection
mode Elec Cooking
65%
convection
mode 0.1P+1.5 kW
70%
convection
mode
0.080P+0.4989
kW
Combination
ovens,
convection
mode Gas Cooking
35%
convection
mode
322P+13,563
Btu/h
44%
convection
mode
150P+5,425
Btu/h
Convection
oven, full-
size Elec Cooking 65% 2.0 kW 71% 1.6 kW
Convection
oven, full-
size Gas Cooking 30% 18,000 Btu/h 46% 12,000 Btu/h
Convection
oven, half-
size Elec Cooking 65% 1.5 kW 71% 1.0 kW
Conveyor
oven, > 25-
inch belt Gas Cooking 20% 70,000 Btu/h 42% 57,000 Btu/h
Conveyor
oven, ≤ 25-
inch belt Gas Cooking 20% 45,000 Btu/h 42% 29,000 Btu/h
Fryer Elec Cooking 75% 1.05 kW 80% 1.0 kW
Fryer Gas Cooking 35% 14,000 Btu/h 50% 9,000 Btu/h
Griddle
(based on 3
ft model) Elec Cooking 60% 400 W/ft2 70% 320 W/ft2
Griddle
(based on 3
ft model) Gas Cooking 30% 3,500 Btu/h/ft2 38% 2,650
Btu/h/ft2
Hot food
holding Elec Cooking na 40 W/ft3 Na 21.5V Watts
148
Updated to reflect the April 14, 2017 LEED v4 Building Design
and Construction Addenda
cabinets
(excluding
drawer
warmers
and heated
display), 0
< V < 13 ft³
(V =
volume)
Hot food
holding
cabinets
(excluding
drawer
warmers
and heated
display), 13
≤ V < 28 ft³ Elec Cooking na 40 W/ft3 Na 2.0V + 254 Watts
Hot food
holding
cabinets
(excluding
drawer
warmers
and heated
display), 28
ft³ ≤ V Elec Cooking na 40 W/ft3 Na
3.8V + 203.5
Watts
Large vat
fryer Elec Cooking 75% 1.35 kW 80% 1.1 kW
Large vat
fryer Gas Cooking 35% 20,000 Btu/h 50% 12,000 Btu/h
Rack oven,
double Gas Cooking 30% 65,000 Btu/h 50% 35,000 Btu/h
Rack oven,
single Gas Cooking 30% 43,000 Btu/h 50% 29,000 Btu/h
Range Elec Cooking 70% 80%
Range Gas Cooking 35% na
40% and no
standing
pilots na
Steam
cooker,
batch
cooking Elec Cooking 26% 200 W/pan 50% 135 W/pan
Steam
cooker,
batch
cooking Gas Cooking 15% 2,500 Btu/h/pan 38% 2,100
Btu/h/pan
Steam
cooker, high
production
or cook to
order Elec Cooking 26% 330 W/pan 50% 275 W/pan
Steam
cooker, high
production Gas Cooking 15% 5,000 Btu/h/pan 38% 4,300
Btu/h/pan
149
Updated to reflect the April 14, 2017 LEED v4 Building Design
and Construction Addenda
or cook to
order
Toaster Elec Cooking —
1.8 kW average
operating
energy rate Na
1.2 kW average
operating energy
rate
Ice
machine,
IMH (ice-
making
head, H =
ice harvest),
H > 450
lb/day Elec Ice
6.89 -
0.0011H
kWh/100 lb
ice na
37.72*H-0.298
kWh/100 lb
ice na
Ice
machine,
IMH (ice-
making
head), H <
450 lb/day Elec Ice
10.26 –
0.0086H
kWh/100 lb
ice na
37.72*H-0.298
kWh/100 lb
ice na
Ice
machine,
RCU
(remote
condensing
unit, w/o
remote
compressor,
H < 1,000
lb/day Elec Ice
8.85 -
0.0038H
kWh/100lb
ice na
22.95*H-0.258
+ 1.00
kWh/100 lb
ice na
Ice
machine,
RCU
(remote
condensing
unit), 1600 >
H > 1000
lb/day Elec ice
5.10
kWh/100 lb
ice Na
22.95*H-0.258
+ 1.00
kWh/100 lb
ice na
Ice
machine,
RCU
(remote
condensing
unit), H ≥
1600 lb/day Elec Ice
5.10
kWh/100lb
ice Na
-0.00011*H +
4.60
kWh/100 lb
ice na
Ice
machine,
SCU (self-
contained
unit), H <
175 lb/day Elec Ice
18.0 -
0.0469H
kWh/100lb
ice Na
48.66*H-0.326
+ 0.08
kWh/100 lb
ice na
Ice machine
self-
contained
unit, H >
175 lb/day Elec Ice
9.80
kWh/100 lb
ice Na
48.66*H-0.326
+ 0.08
kWh/100 lb
ice na
150
Updated to reflect the April 14, 2017 LEED v4 Building Design
and Construction Addenda
Ice
machine,
water-
cooled ice-
making
head, H >
1436 lb/day
(must be on
chilled loop) Elec Ice
4.0
kWh/100 lb
ice Na
3.68
kWh/100 lb
ice na
Ice
machine,
water-
cooled ice-
making
head, 500
lb/day < H <
1436 (must
be on chilled
loop) Elec Ice
5.58 –
0.0011H
kWh/100 lb
ice Na
5.13 -
0.001H
kWh/100 lb
ice na
Ice
machine,
water-
cooled ice-
making
head, H <
500 lb/day
(must be on
chilled loop) Elec Ice
7.80 –
0.0055H
kWh/100 lb
ice Na
7.02 -
0.0049H
kWh/100 lb
ice na
Ice
machine,
water-
cooled
once-
through
(open loop) Elec Ice Banned Banned Banned Banned
Ice
machine,
water-
cooled SCU
(self-
contained
unit), H <
200 lb/day
(must be on
chilled loop) Elec Ice
11.4 –
0.0190H
kWh/100 lb
ice Na
10.6 -
0.177H
kWh/100 lb
ice na
Ice
machine,
water-
cooled self-
contained
unit, H >
200 lb/day
(must be on
chilled loop) Elec Ice
7.6
kWh/100 lb
ice Na
7.07
kWh/100 lb
ice na
151
Updated to reflect the April 14, 2017 LEED v4 Building Design
and Construction Addenda
Chest
freezer,
solid or
glass door Elec Refrig
0.45V +
0.943
kWh/day Na
≤ 0.270V +
0.130
kWh/day na
Chest
refrigerator,
solid or
glass door Elec Refrig
0.1V + 2.04
kWh/day Na
≤ 0.125V +
0.475
kWh/day na
Glass-door
reach-in
freezer,
0 < V < 15
ft³ Elec Refrig
0.75V +
4.10
kWh/day Na
≤ 0.607V +
0.893
kWh/day na
Glass-door
reach-in
freezer,
15 ≤ V < 30
ft³ Elec Refrig
.75V + 4.10
kWh/day Na
≤ 0.733V –
1.00
kWh/day na
Glass-door
reach-in
freezer, 30 ≤
V < 50 ft³ Elec Refrig
.75V + 4.10
kWh/day Na
≤ 0.250V +
13.50
kWh/day na
Glass-door
reach-in
freezer, 50 ≤
V ft³ Elec Refrig
0.75V +
4.10
kWh/day Na
≤ 0.450V +
3.50
kWh/day na
Glass-door
reach-in
refrigerator,
0 < V < 15
ft³ Elec Refrig
0.12V +
3.34
kWh/day Na
≤ 0.118V +
1.382
kWh/day na
Glass-door
reach-in
refrigerator,
15 ≤ V < 30
ft³ Elec Refrig
0.12V +
3.34
kWh/day Na
≤ 0.140V +
1.050
kWh/day na
Glass-door
reach-in
refrigerator,
30 ≤ V < 50
ft³ Elec Refrig
0.12V +
3.34
kWh/day Na
≤ 0.088V +
2.625
kWh/day na
Glass-door
reach-in
refrigerator,
50 ≤ V ft³ Elec Refrig
0.12V +
3.34
kWh/day Na
≤ 0.110V +
1.500
kWh/day na
Solid-door
reach-in
freezer, 0 <
V < 15 ft³ Elec Refrig
0.4V + 1.38
kWh/day Na
≤ 0.250V +
1.25
kWh/day na
Solid-door
reach-in
freezer, 15 ≤
V < 30 ft³ Elec Refrig
0.4V + 1.38
kWh/day Na
≤ 0.400V –
1.000
kWh/day na
152
Updated to reflect the April 14, 2017 LEED v4 Building Design
and Construction Addenda
Solid-door
reach-in
freezer, 30 ≤
V < 50 ft³ Elec Refrig
0.4V + 1.38
kWh/day Na
≤ 0.163V +
6.125
kWh/day na
Solid-door
reach-in
freezer, 50 ≤
V ft³ Elec Refrig
0.4V + 1.38
kWh/day Na
≤ 0.158V +
6.333
kWh/day na
Solid-door
reach-in
refrigerator,
0 < V < 15
ft³ Elec Refrig
0.1V + 2.04
kWh/day Na
≤ 0.089V +
1.411
kWh/day na
Solid-door
reach-in
refrigerator,
15 ≤ V < 30
ft³ Elec Refrig
0.1V + 2.04
kWh/day Na
≤ 0.037V +
2.200
kWh/day na
Solid-door
reach-in
refrigerator,
30 ≤ V < 50
ft³ Elec Refrig
0.1V + 2.04
kWh/day Na
≤ 0.056V +
1.635
kWh/day na
Solid-door
reach-in
refrigerator,
50 ≤ V ft³ Elec Refrig
0.1V + 2.04
kWh/day Na
≤ 0.060V +
1.416
kWh/day na
Clothes
washer Gas Sanitation 1.72 MEF Na 2.00 MEF na
Door-type
dish
machine,
high temp Elec Sanitation na 1.0 kW Na 0.70 kW
Door-type
dish
machine,
low temp Elec Sanitation na 0.6 kW Na 0.6 kW
Multitank
rack
conveyor
dish
machine,
high temp Elec Sanitation na 2.6 kW Na 2.25 kW
Multitank
rack
conveyor
dish
machine,
low temp Elec Sanitation na 2.0 kW Na 2.0 kW
Single-tank
rack
conveyor
dish
machine,
high temp Elec Sanitation na 2.0 kW Na 1.5 kW
153
Updated to reflect the April 14, 2017 LEED v4 Building Design
and Construction Addenda
Single-tank
rack
conveyor
dish
machine,
low temp Elec Sanitation na 1.6 kW Na 1.5 kW
Undercount
er dish
machine,
high temp Elec Sanitation na 0.9 kW Na 0.5 kW
Undercount
er dish
machine,
low temp Elec Sanitation na 0.5 kW Na 0.5 kW
The energy efficiency, idle energy rates, and water use
requirements, where applicable, are based on
the following test methods:
ASTM F1275 Standard Test Method for Performance of
Griddles
ASTM F1361 Standard Test Method for Performance of Open
Deep Fat Fryers
ASTM F1484 Standard Test Methods for Performance of Steam
Cookers
ASTM F1496 Standard Test Method for Performance of
Convection Ovens
ASTM F1521 Standard Test Methods for Performance of Range
Tops
ASTM F1605 Standard Test Method for Performance of Double-
Sided Griddles
ASTM F1639 Standard Test Method for Performance of
Combination Ovens
ASTM F1695 Standard Test Method for Performance of
Underfired Broilers
ASTM F1696 Standard Test Method for Energy Performance of
Single-Rack Hot Water Sanitizing,
ASTM Door-Type Commercial Dishwashing Machines
ASTM F1704 Standard Test Method for Capture and
Containment Performance of Commercial Kitchen
Exhaust Ventilation Systems
ASTM F1817 Standard Test Method for Performance of
Conveyor Ovens
ASTM F1920 Standard Test Method for Energy Performance of
Rack Conveyor, Hot Water Sanitizing,
Commercial Dishwashing Machines
ASTM F2093 Standard Test Method for Performance of Rack
Ovens
ASTM F2140 Standard Test Method for Performance of Hot
Food Holding Cabinets
ASTM F2144 Standard Test Method for Performance of Large
Open Vat Fryers
ASTM F2324 Standard Test Method for Prerinse Spray Valves
ASTM F2380 Standard Test Method for Performance of
Conveyor Toasters
ARI 810-2007: Performance Rating of Automatic Commercial
Ice Makers
ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 72–2005: Method of Testing
Commercial Refrigerators and Freezers with
temperature setpoints at 38°F for medium-temp refrigerators,
0°F for low-temp freezers, and -15°F
for ice cream freezers
Table 1b. Commercial Kitchen Appliance Prescriptive Measures
and Baseline for Energy Cost
Budget (SI units)
Baseline energy usage for energy modeling
path Levels for prescriptive path
Appliance
type Fuel Function
Baseline
efficiency
Baseline idle
rate
Prescriptive
efficiency
Prescriptive idle
rate
Broiler,
underfired Gas Cooking 30% 50.5 kW/m2 35% 37.9 kW/m2
154
Updated to reflect the April 14, 2017 LEED v4 Building Design
and Construction Addenda
Combination
oven, steam
mode (P =
pan capacity) Elec Cooking
40% steam
mode 0.37P+4.5 kW
50% steam
mode
0.133P+0.6400
kW
Combination
oven, steam
mode Gas Cooking
20% steam
mode
(1 210P+
35 810)/3 412
kW
38% steam
mode
(200P+6 511)/
3 412 kW
Combination
oven,
convection
mode Elec Cooking
65%
convection
mode 0.1P+1.5 kW
70%
convection
mode
0.080P+0.4989
kW
Combination
oven,
convection
mode Gas Cooking
35%
convection
mode
(322P+
13 563)/
3412 kW
44%
convection
mode
(150P+5 425)/
3412 kW
Convection
oven, full-size Elec Cooking 65% 2.0 kW 71% 1.6 kW
Convection
oven, full-size Gas Cooking 30% 5.3 kW 46% 3.5 kW
Convection
oven, half-
size Elec Cooking 65% 1.5 kW 71% 1.0 kW
Conveyor
oven, > 63.5
cm belt Gas Cooking 20% 20.5 kW 42% 16.7 kW
Conveyor
oven, < 63.5
cm belt Gas Cooking 20% 13.2 kW 42% 8.5 kW
Fryer Elec Cooking 75% 1,05 kW 80% 1.0 kW
Fryer Gas Cooking 35% 4.1 kW 50% 2.64 kW
Griddle
(based on
90-cm model) Elec Cooking 60% 4.3 kW/m2 70% 3 .45 kW/m2
Griddle
(based on
90-cm model) Gas Cooking 30% 11 kW/m2 33% 8.35 kW/m2
Hot food
holding
cabinets
(excluding
drawer
warmers and
heated
display) 0 < V
< 0.368 m3 (V
= volume) Elec Cooking na 1.4 kW/m3 Na
(21.5*V)/0.0283
kW/m3
Hot food
holding
cabinets
(excluding
drawer
warmers and
heated
display), Elec Cooking na 1.4 kW/m3 Na
(2.0*V +
254)/0.0283
kW/m3
155
Updated to reflect the April 14, 2017 LEED v4 Building Design
and Construction Addenda
0.368 ≤ V <
0.793 m3
Hot food
holding
cabinets
(excluding
drawer
warmers and
heated
display),
0.793 m3 ≤ V Elec Cooking na 1.4 kW/m3 Na
(3.8*V +
203.5)/0.0283
kW/m3
Large vat
fryer Elec Cooking 75% 1.35 kW 80% 1.1 kW
Large vat
fryer Gas Cooking 35% 5.86 kW 50% 3.5 kW
Rack oven,
double Gas Cooking 30% 19 kW 50% 10.25 kW
Rack oven,
single Gas Cooking 30% 12.6 kW 50% 8.5 kW
Range Elec Cooking 70% na 80% na
Range Gas Cooking 35% na
40% and no
standing
pilots na
Steam
cooker, batch
cooking Elec Cooking 26% 200 W/pan 50% 135 W/pan
Steam
cooker, batch
cooking Gas Cooking 15% 733 W/pan 38% 615 W/pan
Steam
cooker, high
production or
cook to order Elec Cooking 26% 330 W/pan 50% 275 W/pan
Steam
cooker, high
production or
cook to order Gas Cooking 15% 1.47 kW/pan 38% 1.26 kW/pan
Toaster Elec Cooking na
1.8 kW average
operating
energy rate Na
1.2 kW average
operating energy
rate
Ice machine,
IMH (ice
making head,
H = ice
harvest) H ≥
204 kg/day Elec Ice
0.0015 -
5.3464E-07
kWh/kg ice na
≤ 13.52*H-
0.298
kWh/100 kg
ice na
Ice machine,
IMH (ice
making
head), H <
204 kg/day Elec Ice
0.2262 -
4.18E-04
kWh/kg ice na
≤ 13.52*H-
0.298
kWh/100 kg
ice na
Ice machine,
RCU
(remote
condensing Elec Ice
0.1951 -
1.85E-04
kWh/kg ice na
≤ 111.5835H-
0.258) + 2.205
kWh/100 kg
ice na
156
Updated to reflect the April 14, 2017 LEED v4 Building Design
and Construction Addenda
unit, w/o
remote
compressor)
H < 454
kg/day
Ice machine,
RCU (remote
condensing
unit) 726 > H
≥ 454 kg/day Elec Ice
0.1124
kWh/kg ice na
≤ 111.5835H-
0.258) + 2.205
kWh/100 kg
ice na
Ice machine,
RCU (remote
condensing
unit), H >
726kg/day Elec Ice
0.1124
kWh/kg ice na
≤ -0.00024H
+ 4.60
kWh/100 kg
ice
na
Ice machine,
SCU (self
contained
unit), H < 79
kg/day Elec Ice
0.3968 -
2.28E-03
kWh/kg ice na
236.59H-0.326
+0.176
kWh/100 kg
ice na
Ice machine,
SCU (self
contained
unit), H ≥ 79
kg/day Elec Ice
0.2161
kWh/kg ice na
236.59H-0.326
+0.176
kWh/100 kg
ice na
Ice machine,
water-cooled
ice-making
head, H ≥
651
kg/day(must
be on a
chilled loop) Elec Ice
0.0882
kWh/kg ice na
≤ 8.11
kWh/100 kg
ice na
Ice machine,
water-cooled
ice-making
head, 227 ≤
H < 651
kg/day (must
be on a
chilled loop) Elec Ice
0.1230 -
5.35E-05
kWh/kg ice na
≤ 11.31 -
0.065H
kWh/100 kg
ice na
Ice machine,
water-cooled
ice-making
head, H <
227 kg/day(
must be on a
chilled loop) Elec Ice
0.1720 -
2.67E-04
kWh/kg ice na
≤ 15.48 -
0.0238H
kWh/100 kg
ice na
Ice machine,
water-cooled
once-through
(open loop) Elec Ice Banned Banned Banned Banned
Ice machine,
water cooled
SCU (self- Elec Ice
0.2513 -
9.23E-04
kWh/kg ice na
≤ 23.37-
0.086H na
157
Updated to reflect the April 14, 2017 LEED v4 Building Design
and Construction Addenda
contained
unit) H < 91
kg/day (must
be on a
chilled loop)
kWh/100 kg
ice
Ice machine,
water cooled
SCU (self-
contained
unit) H > 91
kg/day (must
be on a
chilled loop) Elec Ice
0.1676
kWh/kg ice na
15.57
kWh/100 kg
ice na
Chest
freezer, solid
or glass door Elec Refrig
15.90V +
0.943
kWh/day na
9.541V +
0.130
kWh/day na
Chest
refrigerator,
solid or glass
door Elec Refrig
3.53V +
2.04
kWh/day na
≤ 4.417 V +
0.475
kWh/day na
Glass-door
reach-in
freezer, 0 < V
< 0.42 m3 Elec Refrig
26.50V +
4.1
kWh/day na
≤ 21.449V +
0.893
kWh/day na
Glass-door
reach-in
freezer, 0.42
≤ V < 0.85 m3 Elec Refrig
26.50V +
4.1
kWh/day na
≤ 25.901V –
1.00
kWh/day na
Glass-door
reach-in
freezer, 0.85
≤ V < 1.42 m3 Elec Refrig
26.50V +
4.1
kWh/day na
≤ 8.834V +
13.50
kWh/day na
Glass-door
reach-in
freezer, 1.42
≤ V m3 Elec Refrig
26.50V +
4.1
kWh/day na
≤ 15.90V +
3.50
kWh/day na
Glass-door
reach-in
refrigerator, 0
< V < 0.42m3 Elec Refrig
4.24V +
3.34
kWh/day na
≤ 4.169V +
1.382
kWh/day na
Glass-door
reach-in
refrigerator,
0.42 ≤ V <
0.85 m3 Elec Refrig
4.24V +
3.34
kWh/day na
≤ 4.947V +
1.050
kWh/day na
Glass-door
reach-in
refrigerator,
0.85 ≤ V <
1.42 m3 Elec Refrig
4.24V +
3.34
kWh/day na
≤ 3.109V +
2.625
kWh/day na
Glass-door
reach-in
refrigerator,
1.42 ≤ V m3 Elec Refrig
4.24V +
3.34
kWh/day na
≤ 3.887V +
1.500
kWh/day na
158
Updated to reflect the April 14, 2017 LEED v4 Building Design
and Construction Addenda
Solid-door
reach-in
freezer, 0 < V
< 0.42 m3 Elec Refrig
14.13V +
1.38
kWh/day na
≤ 8.834V +
1.25
kWh/day na
Solid-door
reach-in
freezer, 0.42
≤ V < 0.85 m3 Elec Refrig
14.13V +
1.38
kWh/day na
≤ 4.819V –
1.000
kWh/day na
Solid-door
reach-in
freezer, 0.85
≤ V < 1.42 m3 Elec Refrig
14.13V +
1.38
kWh/day na
≤ 5.760V +
6.125
kWh/day na
Solid-door
reach-in
freezer, 1.42
≤ V m3 Elec Refrig
14.13V +
1.38
kWh/day na
≤ 5.583V +
6.333
kWh/day na
Solid-door
reach-in
refrigerator, 0
< V < 0.42m3 Elec Refrig
3.53V +
2.04
kWh/day na
≤ 3.145V +
1.411
kWh/day na
Solid-door
reach-in
refrigerator,
0.42 ≤ V <
0.85 m3 Elec Refrig
3.53V +
2.04
kWh/day na
≤ 1.307V +
2.200
kWh/day na
Solid-door
reach-in
refrigerator,
0.85 ≤ V <
1.42 m3 Elec Refrig
3.53V +
2.04
kWh/day na
≤ 1.979V +
1.635
kWh/day na
Solid-door
reach-in
refrigerator,
1.42 ≤ V m3 Elec Refrig
3.53V +
2.04
kWh/day na
≤ 2.120V +
1.416
kWh/day na
Clothes
washer Gas
Sanitatio
n 1.72 MEF 2.00 MEF
Door-type
dish
machine,
high temp Elec
Sanitatio
n na 1.0 kW Na 0.70 kW
Door-type
dish
machine, low
temp Elec
Sanitatio
n na 0.6 kW Na 0.6 kW
Multitank
rack
conveyor
dish
machine,
high temp Elec
Sanitatio
n na 2.6 kW Na 2.25 kW
Multitank
rack
conveyor
dish Elec
Sanitatio
n na 2.0 kW Na 2.0 kW
159
Updated to reflect the April 14, 2017 LEED v4 Building Design
and Construction Addenda
machine, low
temp
Single-tank
rack
conveyor
dish
machine,
high temp Elec
Sanitatio
n na 2.0 kW Na 1.5 kW
Single-tank
rack
conveyor
dish
machine, low
temp Elec
Sanitatio
n na 1.6 kW Na 1.5 kW
Undercounter
dish
machine,
high temp Elec
Sanitatio
n na 0.9 kW Na 0.5 kW
Undercounter
dish
machine, low
temp Elec
Sanitatio
n na 0.5 kW Na 0.5 kW
The energy efficiency, idle energy rates, and water use
requirements, where applicable, are based on
the following test methods:
ASTM F1275 Standard Test Method for Performance of
Griddles
ASTM F1361 Standard Test Method for Performance of Open
Deep Fat Fryers
ASTM F1484 Standard Test Methods for Performance of Steam
Cookers
ASTM F1496 Standard Test Method for Performance of
Convection Ovens
ASTM F1521 Standard Test Methods for Performance of Range
Tops
ASTM F1605 Standard Test Method for Performance of Double-
Sided Griddles
ASTM F1639 Standard Test Method for Performance of
Combination Ovens
ASTM F1695 Standard Test Method for Performance of
Underfired Broilers
ASTM F1696 Standard Test Method for Energy Performance of
Single-Rack Hot Water Sanitizing,
ASTM Door-Type Commercial Dishwashing Machines
ASTM F1704 Standard Test Method for Capture and
Containment Performance of Commercial Kitchen
Exhaust Ventilation Systems
ASTM F1817 Standard Test Method for Performance of
Conveyor Ovens
ASTM F1920 Standard Test Method for Energy Performance of
Rack Conveyor, Hot Water Sanitizing,
Commercial Dishwashing Machines
ASTM F2093 Standard Test Method for Performance of Rack
Ovens
ASTM F2140 Standard Test Method for Performance of Hot
Food Holding Cabinets
ASTM F2144 Standard Test Method for Performance of Large
Open Vat Fryers
ASTM F2324 Standard Test Method for Prerinse Spray Valves
ASTM F2380 Standard Test Method for Performance of
Conveyor Toasters
ARI 810-2007: Performance Rating of Automatic Commercial
Ice Makers
ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 72–2005: Method of Testing
Commercial Refrigerators and Freezers with
temperature setpoints at 38°F (3°C) for mediumtemp
refrigerators, -18°C for low-temp freezers,
and -26°C for ice cream freezers.
160
Updated to reflect the April 14, 2017 LEED v4 Building Design
and Construction Addenda
Table 2. Supermarket refrigeration prescriptive measures and
baseline for energy cost budget
Item
Attribute Prescriptive measure
Baseline for energy
modeling path
Commercial
Refrigerator
and Freezers
Energy Use Limits ASHRAE 90.1-2010
Addendum g. Table 6.8.1L
ASHRAE 90.1-2010
Addendum g. Table 6.8.1L
Commercial
Refrigeration
Equipment
Energy Use Limits ASHRAE 90.1-2010
Addendum g. Table
6.8.1M
ASHRAE 90.1-2010
Addendum g. Table
6.8.1M
Table 3. Walk-in coolers and freezers prescriptive measures and
baseline for energy cost budget
Item
Attribute Prescriptive measure
Baseline for energy
modeling path
Envelope Freezer insulation R-46 R-36
Cooler insulation R-36 R-20
Automatic closer doors Yes No
High-efficiency low- or no-
heat reach-in doors
40W/ft (130W/m) of door
frame (low temperature),
17W/ft (55W/m) of door
frame (medium
temperature)
40W/ft (130W/m) of door
frame (low temperature),
17W/ft (55W/m) of door
frame (medium
temperature)
Evaporator Evaporator fan motor and
control
Shaded pole and split
phase motors prohibited;
use PSC or EMC motors
Constant-speed fan
Hot gas defrost No electric defrosting. Electric defrosting
Condenser Air-cooled condenser fan
motor and control
Shaded pole and split
phase motors prohibited;
use PSC or EMC motors;
add condenser fan
controllers
Cycling one-speed fan
Air Cooled condenser
design approach
Floating head pressure
controls or ambient
subcooling
10°F (-12°C) to 15°F
(-9°C) dependent on
suction temperature
Lighting Lighting power density
(W/sq.ft.)
0.6 W/sq.ft.
(6.5 W/sq. meter)
0.6 W/sq.ft.
(6.5 W/sq. meter)
Commercial
Refrigerator
and Freezers
Energy Use Limits N/A Use an Exceptional
Calculation Method if
attempting to take savings
Commercial
Refrigerator
and Freezers
Energy Use Limits N/A Use an Exceptional
Calculation Method if
attempting to take savings
Table 4. Commercial kitchen ventilation prescriptive measures
and baseline for energy cost
budget
Strategies Prescriptive measure Baseline
Kitchen hood control ASHRAE 90.1-2010 Section
6.5.7.1, except that Section
6.5.7.1.3 and Section 6.5.7.1.4
ASHRAE 90.1-2010 Section
6.5.7.1 and Section G3.1.1
Exception (d) where applicable
161
Updated to reflect the April 14, 2017 LEED v4 Building Design
and Construction Addenda
shall apply if the total kitchen
exhaust airflow rate exceeds
2,000 cfm (960 L/s) (as
opposed to 5,000 cfm (2,400
L/s) noted in the ASHRAE
90.1-2010 requirements)

More Related Content

PPTX
Leed Green Associate Study Slides
DOCX
LEED v4 for BUILDING DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION Upda.docx
PDF
Leed v4 bdc 07.25.19 current
PDF
LEED v4 ballot version (BDC) - 13 11 13.pdf
PDF
Presentation on LEED Certification Part-1.pdf
PPTX
LEED v4 New Construction Kickoff Presentation
PPTX
Marc J. Harary - Sustainability Presentation for High Schools
PPTX
[Nordic GBC Conference 2013] Ryan Zizzo: LEED v4 Update
Leed Green Associate Study Slides
LEED v4 for BUILDING DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION Upda.docx
Leed v4 bdc 07.25.19 current
LEED v4 ballot version (BDC) - 13 11 13.pdf
Presentation on LEED Certification Part-1.pdf
LEED v4 New Construction Kickoff Presentation
Marc J. Harary - Sustainability Presentation for High Schools
[Nordic GBC Conference 2013] Ryan Zizzo: LEED v4 Update

Similar to 1.  Describe the rational for constructing a new building to be wa.docx (20)

PDF
Leed v4-view-from-mep-seats-140429
PPTX
17 concepts you should know to pass the LEED v4 GA Exam
PPTX
17 Concepts for the LEED v4 GA Exam
PPT
Leed nd drcog
PDF
Boston Architectural College CEU Weekend 2007
PPT
Chapter 2 introduction-to_leed_rating_systems
PDF
Green building rating system seminar
PDF
Green building rating system seminar
PDF
Green Building 101 For Contractors
PPTX
LEED Green Associate Study Session #1
PDF
LEED Presentation
PPT
Presentation green construction
PPT
Leed Civil Engineering Strategies
PDF
Leed CI Abbreviated Manual
PPT
Eb Healthcare & Leed
PDF
Case Study: James Hall, A Greener Home for Greener Sciences
PDF
Modular Construction Supports LEED
PDF
An Introduction to the LEED Rating Systems
PPTX
leed energy efficiency and green buildings
PDF
Leed v4-view-from-mep-seats-140429
17 concepts you should know to pass the LEED v4 GA Exam
17 Concepts for the LEED v4 GA Exam
Leed nd drcog
Boston Architectural College CEU Weekend 2007
Chapter 2 introduction-to_leed_rating_systems
Green building rating system seminar
Green building rating system seminar
Green Building 101 For Contractors
LEED Green Associate Study Session #1
LEED Presentation
Presentation green construction
Leed Civil Engineering Strategies
Leed CI Abbreviated Manual
Eb Healthcare & Leed
Case Study: James Hall, A Greener Home for Greener Sciences
Modular Construction Supports LEED
An Introduction to the LEED Rating Systems
leed energy efficiency and green buildings

More from gasciognecaren (20)

DOCX
1.In no more than 3-4 sentences, explain why high market-capitalizat.docx
DOCX
1.Longest WordsWrite a Python program that reads wor.docx
DOCX
1.Probable reasons for the collapse of Mayan civilization include a.docx
DOCX
1.Matching How do astronomers determine the physical char.docx
DOCX
1.If President Barack Obama invited you to the White House to partic.docx
DOCX
1.How does DNA establish identity2. What is similar and differe.docx
DOCX
1.purpose2.objectives3.scope4.Function of EOP5.Rules.docx
DOCX
1.Qu’est-ce que c’est(2.5)C’est quelque chose….docx
DOCX
1.Read over the handout titled Academic Summaries,posted b.docx
DOCX
1.Rebecca SperryMar 29, 2020Mar 29 at 552pmManage Discussion .docx
DOCX
1.Probability ConceptsDuring an epidemic of disease, a doctor se.docx
DOCX
1.Find a test to assess, intelligence or education, find a similar a.docx
DOCX
1.Over the past few years, we have seen both emerging and reemerging.docx
DOCX
1.Ornette Coleman Lonely Womanhttpswww.youtube.comwatchv=D.docx
DOCX
1.In patients with acute respiratory distress syndrome (P), .docx
DOCX
1.How is culture reflected in television and movies What relations.docx
DOCX
1.How are the firm’s operational and key risk factors captured in th.docx
DOCX
1.How do you define modernist literature and how does it relate to o.docx
DOCX
1.GOAL STATEMENT Please complete the following goal statement.docx
DOCX
1.Functional Analysis Interview (FAI) is a type of structured in.docx
1.In no more than 3-4 sentences, explain why high market-capitalizat.docx
1.Longest WordsWrite a Python program that reads wor.docx
1.Probable reasons for the collapse of Mayan civilization include a.docx
1.Matching How do astronomers determine the physical char.docx
1.If President Barack Obama invited you to the White House to partic.docx
1.How does DNA establish identity2. What is similar and differe.docx
1.purpose2.objectives3.scope4.Function of EOP5.Rules.docx
1.Qu’est-ce que c’est(2.5)C’est quelque chose….docx
1.Read over the handout titled Academic Summaries,posted b.docx
1.Rebecca SperryMar 29, 2020Mar 29 at 552pmManage Discussion .docx
1.Probability ConceptsDuring an epidemic of disease, a doctor se.docx
1.Find a test to assess, intelligence or education, find a similar a.docx
1.Over the past few years, we have seen both emerging and reemerging.docx
1.Ornette Coleman Lonely Womanhttpswww.youtube.comwatchv=D.docx
1.In patients with acute respiratory distress syndrome (P), .docx
1.How is culture reflected in television and movies What relations.docx
1.How are the firm’s operational and key risk factors captured in th.docx
1.How do you define modernist literature and how does it relate to o.docx
1.GOAL STATEMENT Please complete the following goal statement.docx
1.Functional Analysis Interview (FAI) is a type of structured in.docx

Recently uploaded (20)

PDF
IGGE1 Understanding the Self1234567891011
PDF
Environmental Education MCQ BD2EE - Share Source.pdf
PDF
advance database management system book.pdf
PDF
Paper A Mock Exam 9_ Attempt review.pdf.
PDF
Vision Prelims GS PYQ Analysis 2011-2022 www.upscpdf.com.pdf
PDF
Uderstanding digital marketing and marketing stratergie for engaging the digi...
PDF
David L Page_DCI Research Study Journey_how Methodology can inform one's prac...
PPTX
CHAPTER IV. MAN AND BIOSPHERE AND ITS TOTALITY.pptx
PDF
Τίμαιος είναι φιλοσοφικός διάλογος του Πλάτωνα
PDF
LDMMIA Reiki Yoga Finals Review Spring Summer
PDF
Complications of Minimal Access-Surgery.pdf
PDF
احياء السادس العلمي - الفصل الثالث (التكاثر) منهج متميزين/كلية بغداد/موهوبين
PPTX
Chinmaya Tiranga Azadi Quiz (Class 7-8 )
PDF
MBA _Common_ 2nd year Syllabus _2021-22_.pdf
PPTX
Share_Module_2_Power_conflict_and_negotiation.pptx
PPTX
20th Century Theater, Methods, History.pptx
PDF
Practical Manual AGRO-233 Principles and Practices of Natural Farming
PPTX
TNA_Presentation-1-Final(SAVE)) (1).pptx
PPTX
Computer Architecture Input Output Memory.pptx
PDF
OBE - B.A.(HON'S) IN INTERIOR ARCHITECTURE -Ar.MOHIUDDIN.pdf
IGGE1 Understanding the Self1234567891011
Environmental Education MCQ BD2EE - Share Source.pdf
advance database management system book.pdf
Paper A Mock Exam 9_ Attempt review.pdf.
Vision Prelims GS PYQ Analysis 2011-2022 www.upscpdf.com.pdf
Uderstanding digital marketing and marketing stratergie for engaging the digi...
David L Page_DCI Research Study Journey_how Methodology can inform one's prac...
CHAPTER IV. MAN AND BIOSPHERE AND ITS TOTALITY.pptx
Τίμαιος είναι φιλοσοφικός διάλογος του Πλάτωνα
LDMMIA Reiki Yoga Finals Review Spring Summer
Complications of Minimal Access-Surgery.pdf
احياء السادس العلمي - الفصل الثالث (التكاثر) منهج متميزين/كلية بغداد/موهوبين
Chinmaya Tiranga Azadi Quiz (Class 7-8 )
MBA _Common_ 2nd year Syllabus _2021-22_.pdf
Share_Module_2_Power_conflict_and_negotiation.pptx
20th Century Theater, Methods, History.pptx
Practical Manual AGRO-233 Principles and Practices of Natural Farming
TNA_Presentation-1-Final(SAVE)) (1).pptx
Computer Architecture Input Output Memory.pptx
OBE - B.A.(HON'S) IN INTERIOR ARCHITECTURE -Ar.MOHIUDDIN.pdf

1.  Describe the rational for constructing a new building to be wa.docx

  • 1. 1. Describe the rational for constructing a new building to be water and energy efficient? 2. Can this rationale be applied to an existing building and if so how? Tip: Please remember to add a subject line to your post. Use descriptive subject lines for your posts; some find it easier to write the subject line after writing the post. Submit your response to the discussion board in a 300-500 word narrative. Your response should clearly relate to the aspect of both questions and an understanding of the required readings. Be sure to apply the concepts you've learned in a meaningful way. Afterwards, submit two-three 100-200 word responses to your classmates’ postings. Your response should explore ideas and provide constructive responses. Be sure to interact with all of your classmates during the term. In total, you should have a minimum of 3 posts for the week. Due dates: Your initial posting is due no later than Wednesday 11:59 PM October 2nd, 2019. Final peer responses are due by Sunday 11:59 PM October 6, 2019. After completing this, I will send you 3 classmatesposts. thanks LEED v4 for BUILDING DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION
  • 2. Updated April 14, 2017 Includes: LEED BD+C: New Construction LEED BD+C: Core and Shell LEED BD+C: Schools LEED BD+C: Retail LEED BD+C: Data Centers LEED BD+C: Warehouses and Distribution Centers LEED BD+C: Hospitality LEED BD+C: Healthcare Updated to reflect the April 14, 2017 LEED v4 Building Design and Construction Addenda Updated to reflect the April 14, 2017 LEED v4 Building Design and Construction Addenda Prerequisite: Integrative Project Planning and Design..................................................................... 9 Healthcare ............................................................................................... ......................................... 9
  • 3. Credit: Integrative Process ............................................................................................... ................. 10 NC, CS, Schools, Retail, Data Centers, Warehouses & Distribution Centers, Hospitality, Healthcare ............................................................................................... ......................................................... 10 LOCATION AND TRANSPORATION (LT) .......................................................... 12 LT Credit: LEED for Neighborhood Development Location ........................................................... 12 NC, CS, Schools, Retail, Data Centers, Warehouses & Distribution Centers, Hospitality, Healthcare ............................................................................................... ......................................................... 12 LT Credit: Sensitive Land Protection............................................................................... ................. 13 NC, CS, Schools, Retail, Data Centers, Warehouses & Distribution Centers, Hospitality, Healthcare .................................................................................... ........... ......................................................... 13 LT Credit: High-Priority Site ............................................................................................... ............... 15 NC, CS, Schools, Retail, Data Centers, Warehouses & Distribution Centers, Hospitality, Healthcare
  • 4. ............................................................................................... ......................................................... 15 LT Credit: Surrounding Density and Diverse Uses ......................................................................... 16 NC, CS, Schools, Retail, Data Centers, Hospitality ....................................................................... 16 Warehouses & Distribution Centers ............................................................................................... 17 Healthcare ............................................................................................... ....................................... 18 LT Credit: Access to Quality Transit.................................................................................... ............. 19 NC, CS, Data Centers, Warehouses & Distribution Centers, Hospitality ....................................... 19 Schools ............................................................................................... ............................................ 20 Healthcare ............................................................................................... ....................................... 21 LT Credit: Bicycle Facilities ............................................................................................... ................ 22 NC, CS, Data Centers, Warehouses & Distribution Centers, Hospitality ....................................... 22 Schools ............................................................................................... ............................................ 23 Retail ...............................................................................................
  • 5. ............................................... 23 Healthcare ............................................................................................... ....................................... 24 LT Credit: Reduced Parking Footprint ............................................................................................. 26 NC, CS, Retail, Schools, Data Centers, Warehouses & Distribution Centers, Hospitality, Healthcare ............................................................................................... ......................................................... 26 LT Credit: Green Vehicles ............................................................................................... ................... 28 NC, CS, Data Centers, Hospitality. Retail, Healthcare .................................................................. 28 Schools ............................................................................................... ............................................ 29 Warehouses & Distribution Centers ............................................................................................... 30 SUSTAINABLE SITES (SS) ............................................................................ 31 SS Prerequisite: Construction Activity Pollution Prevention ........................................................ 31 NC, CS, Schools, Retail, Data Centers, Warehouses & Distribution Centers, Hospitality, Healthcare ............................................................................................... ......................................................... 31
  • 6. SS Prerequisite: Environmental Site Assessment .......................................................................... 32 Schools, Healthcare ............................................................................................... ........................ 32 SS Credit: Site Assessment .................................................................................. ............. ................ 33 Updated to reflect the April 14, 2017 LEED v4 Building Design and Construction Addenda NC, CS, Schools, Retail, Data Centers, Warehouses & Distribution Centers, Hospitality, Healthcare ............................................................................................... ......................................................... 33 SS Credit: Site Development—Protect or Restore Habitat ............................................................. 34 NC, CS, Schools, Retail, Data Centers, Warehouses & Distribution Centers, Hospitality, Healthcare ............................................................................................... ......................................................... 34 SS Credit: Open Space ............................................................................................... ........................ 36 NC, CS, Schools, Retail, Data Centers, Warehouses &
  • 7. Distribution Centers, Hospitality, Healthcare ............................................................................................... ......................................................... 36 SS Credit: Rainwater Management .................................................................................. ............. .... 37 NC, CS, Schools, Retail, Data Centers, Warehouses & Distribution Centers, Hospitality, Healthcare ............................................................................................... ......................................................... 37 SS Credit: Heat Island Reduction ............................................................................................... ....... 39 NC, CS, Schools, Retail, Data Centers, Warehouses & Distribution Centers, Hospitality, Healthcare ............................................................................................... ......................................................... 39 SS Credit: Light Pollution Reduction................................................................................ ................ 41 NC, CS, Schools, Retail, Data Centers, Warehouses & Distribution Centers, Hospitality, Healthcare ............................................................................................... ......................................................... 41 SS Credit: Site Master Plan ............................................................................................... ................. 45 Schools
  • 8. ............................................................................................... ............................................ 45 SS Credit: Tenant Design and Construction Guidelines ................................................................ 46 CS ............................................................................................... .................................................... 46 SS Credit: Places of Respite ............................................................................................... ............... 47 Healthcare ............................................................................................... ....................................... 47 SS Credit: Direct Exterior Access ............................................................................................... ...... 48 Healthcare ............................................................................................... ....................................... 48 SS Credit: Joint Use of Facilities ............................................................................................... ....... 49 Schools ............................................................................................... ............................................ 49 WATER EFFICIENCY (WE) ........................................................................... 51 WE Prerequisite: Outdoor Water Use Reduction ............................................................................ 51 NC, CS, Schools, Retail, Data Centers, Warehouses &
  • 9. Distribution Centers, Hospitality, Healthcare ............................................................................................... ......................................................... 51 WE Prerequisite: Indoor Water Use Reduction ............................................................................... 52 NC, CS, Schools, NC-Retail, Data Centers, Warehouses & Distribution Centers, NC-Hospitality, Healthcare .................................................................................. ............. ....................................... 52 WE Prerequisite: Building-Level Water Metering ............................................................................ 55 NC, CS, Schools, Retail, Data Centers, Warehouses & Distribution Centers, Hospitality, Healthcare ............................................................................................... ......................................................... 55 WE Credit: Outdoor Water Use Reduction ....................................................................................... 56 NC, CS, Schools, Retail, Data Centers, Warehouses & Distribution Centers, Hospitality, Healthcare ............................................................................................... ......................................................... 56 WE Credit: Indoor Water Use Reduction .......................................................................................... 57 Updated to reflect the April 14, 2017 LEED v4 Building Design
  • 10. and Construction Addenda NC, CS, Schools, NC-Retail, Data Centers, Warehouses & Distribution Centers, NC-Hospitality, Healthcare ............................................................................................... ....................................... 57 WE Credit: Cooling Tower Water Use ............................................................................................... 60 NC, CS, Schools, Retail, Data Centers, Warehouses & Distribution Centers, Hospitality, Healthcare, ............................................................................................... ......................................................... 60 WE Credit: Water Metering ............................................................................................... ................. 62 NC, CS, Schools, Retail, Data Centers, Warehouses & Distribution Centers, Hospitality, Healthcare ............................................................................................... ......................................................... 62 ENERGY AND ATMOSPHERE ......................................................................... 64 EA Prerequisite: Fundamental Commissioning and Verification .................................................. 64 NC, CS, Schools, Retail, Data Centers, Warehouses & Distribution Centers, Hospitality, Healthcare ...............................................................................................
  • 11. ......................................................... 64 EA Prerequisite: Minimum Energy Performance ............................................................................. 66 NC, CS, Schools, Retail, Warehouses & Distribution Centers, Hospitality, Healthcare ................ 66 Data Centers ............................................................................................... ................................... 67 EA Prerequisite: Building-Level Energy Metering ........................................................................... 69 NC, Schools, Retail, Data Centers, Warehouses & Distribution Centers, Hospitality, Healthcare 69 CS ............................................................................................... .................................................... 69 EA Prerequisite: Fundamental Refrigerant Management ............................................................... 70 NC, CS, Schools, Retail, Data Centers, Warehouses & Distribution Centers, Hospitality, Healthcare ............................................................................................... ......................................................... 70 EA Credit: Enhanced Commissioning .............................................................................................. 71 NC, CS, Schools, Retail, Data Centers, Warehouses & Distribution Centers, Hospitality, Healthcare ............................................................................................... ......................................................... 71 EA Credit: Optimize Energy Performance
  • 12. ........................................................................................ 74 NC, CS, Schools, Retail, Warehouses & Distribution Centers, Hospitality, Healthcare ................ 74 Data Centers ............................................................................................... ................................... 76 EA Credit: Advanced Energy Metering ........................................................................................ ..... 77 NC, Schools, Retail, Data Centers, Warehouses & Distribution Centers, Hospitality, Healthcare 77 CS ............................................................................................... .................................................... 77 EA Credit: Demand Response ............................................................................................... ............ 79 NC, CS, Schools, Retail, Data Centers, Warehouses & Distribution Centers, Hospitality, Healthcare ............................................................................................... ......................................................... 79 EA Credit: Renewable Energy Production ....................................................................................... 80 NC, CS, Schools, Retail, Data Centers, Warehouses & Distribution Centers, Hospitality, Healthcare ............................................................................................... ......................................................... 80 EA Credit: Enhanced Refrigerant Management ............................................................................... 82 NC, CS, Schools, Data Centers, Warehouses & Distribution
  • 13. Centers, Hospitality, Healthcare .... 82 Retail NC ............................................................................................... ......................................... 83 EA Credit: Green Power and Carbon Offsets .................................................................................. 85 NC, CS, Schools, Retail, Data Centers, Warehouses & Distribution Centers, Hospitality, Healthcare ............................................................................................... ......................................................... 85 Updated to reflect the April 14, 2017 LEED v4 Building Design and Construction Addenda MATERIALS AND RESOURCES (MR) .............................................................. 86 MR Prerequisite: Storage and Collection of Recyclables .............................................................. 86 NC, CS, Schools, Data Centers, Warehouses & Distribution Centers, Hospitality NC, Healthcare86 Retail NC ............................................................................................... ......................................... 86 MR Prerequisite: Construction and Demolition Waste Management Planning ........................... 87 NC, CS, Schools, Retail NC, Data Centers, Warehouses & Distribution Centers, Hospitality NC, Healthcare
  • 14. ............................................................................................... ....................................... 87 MR Prerequisite: PBT Source Reduction—Mercury ....................................................................... 88 Healthcare ............................................................................................... ....................................... 88 MR Credit: Building Life-Cycle Impact Reduction ........................................................................... 90 NC, CS, Schools, Retail NC, Data Centers, Warehouses & Distribution Centers, Hospitality NC, Healthcare ............................................................................................... ....................................... 90 MR Credit: Building Product Disclosure and Optimization— Environmental Product Declarations ............................................................................................... ............................................................... 93 NC, CS, Schools, Retail, Data Centers, Warehouses & Distribution Centers, Hospitality, Healthcare ............................................................................................... ......................................................... 93 MR Credit: Building Product Disclosure and Optimization – Sourcing of Raw Materials .......... 95 NC, CS, Schools, Retail NC, Data Centers, Warehouses & Distribution Centers, Hospitality NC, Healthcare ............................................................................................... ....................................... 95
  • 15. MR Credit: Building Product Disclosure and Optimization – Material Ingredients ..................... 97 NC, CS, Schools, Retail NC, Data Centers, Warehouses & Distribution Centers, Hospitality NC, Healthcare ............................................................................................... ....................................... 97 MR Credit: PBT Source Reduction—Mercury ................................................................................ 100 Healthcare ............................................................................................... ..................................... 100 MR Credit: PBT Source Reduction—Lead, Cadmium, and Copper ............................................. 102 Healthcare ............................................................................................... ..................................... 102 MR Credit: Furniture and Medical Furnishings ............................................................................. 103 Healthcare ............................................................................................... ..................................... 103 MR Credit: Design for Flexibility ............................................................................................... ...... 105 Healthcare .............................................................................................. . ..................................... 105 MR Credit: Construction and Demolition Waste Management .................................................... 106
  • 16. NC, CS, Schools, Retail NC, Data Centers, Warehouses & Distribution Centers, Hospitality NC, Healthcare ............................................................................................... ..................................... 106 INDOOR ENVIRONMENTAL QUALITY (EQ) .................................................... 107 EQ Prerequisite: Minimum Indoor Air Quality Performance ........................................................ 107 NC, CS, Schools, Retail, Data Centers, Warehouses & Distribution Centers, Hospitality .......... 107 Healthcare ............................................................................................... ..................................... 109 EQ Prerequisite: Environmental Tobacco Smoke Control ........................................................... 111 NC, CS, Retail, Data Centers, Warehouses & Distribution Centers, Hospitality, Healthcare ...... 111 Schools ............................................................................................... .......................................... 112 Updated to reflect the April 14, 2017 LEED v4 Building Design and Construction Addenda EQ Prerequisite: Minimum Acoustic Performance ....................................................................... 113 Schools ...............................................................................................
  • 17. .......................................... 113 EQ Credit: Enhanced Indoor Air Quality Strategies ...................................................................... 115 NC, CS, Schools, Retail, Data Centers, Warehouses & Distribution Centers, Hospitality, Healthcare ............................................................................................... ....................................................... 115 EQ Credit: Low-Emitting Materials ............................................................................................... ... 118 NC, CS, Schools, Retail, Data Centers, Warehouses & Distribution Centers, Hospitality, Healthcare ................................................................................ ............... ....................................................... 118 EQ Credit: Construction Indoor Air Quality Management Plan ................................................... 123 NC, CS, Schools, Retail, Data Centers, Warehouses & Distribution Centers, Hospitality .......... 123 Healthcare ............................................................................................... ..................................... 123 EQ Credit: Indoor Air Quality Assessment .................................................................................... 125 NC, Schools, Retail, Data Centers, Warehouses & Distribution Centers, Hospitality, Healthcare125 EQ Credit: Thermal Comfort ............................................................................................... ............. 128 NC, Schools, Retail, Data Centers, Hospitality, Healthcare
  • 18. ......................................................... 128 Warehouses & Distribution Centers ............................................................................................. 128 NC, Schools, Retail, Data Centers, Warehouses & Distribution Centers, Hospitality ................. 129 Healthcare ............................................................................................. .. ..................................... 129 EQ Credit: Interior Lighting ............................................................................................... .............. 130 NC, Schools, Data Centers, Warehouses & Distribution Centers, Hospitality ............................. 130 Retail NC ............................................................................................... ....................................... 131 Healthcare ............................................................................................... ..................................... 131 EQ Credit: Daylight ............................................................................................... ............................ 132 NC, CS, Schools, Retail, Data Centers, Warehouses & Distribution Centers, Hospitality, Healthcare ............................................................................................... ....................................................... 132 EQ Credit: Quality Views ............................................................................................... ................... 135 NC, CS, Schools, Retail, Data Centers, Hospitality ..................................................................... 135
  • 19. Warehouses & Distribution Centers ............................................................................................. 135 Healthcare ............................................................................................... ..................................... 135 EQ Credit: Acoustic Performance ............................................................................................... .... 137 NC, Data Centers, Warehouses & Distribution Centers, Hospitality ............................................ 137 Schools ............................................................................................... .......................................... 138 Healthcare ............................................................................................... ..................................... 139 INNOVATION (IN) ....................................................................................... 141 IN Credit: Innovation............................................................................... .......................................... 141 NC, CS, Schools, Retail, Data Centers, Warehouses & Distribution Centers, Hospitality, Healthcare ............................................................................................ ... ....................................................... 141 IN Credit: LEED Accredited Professional ....................................................................................... 143 NC, CS, Schools, Retail NC, Data Centers, Warehouses & Distribution Centers, Hospitality, Healthcare
  • 20. ............................................................................................... ....................................................... 143 REGIONAL PRIORITY (RP) ......................................................................... 144 NC, CS, Schools, Retail NC, Data Centers, Warehouses & Distribution Centers, Hospitality, Healthcare ............................................................................................... ....................................................... 144 Updated to reflect the April 14, 2017 LEED v4 Building Design and Construction Addenda APPENDICES ............................................................................................ 145 Appendix 1. Use Types and Categories ......................................................................................... 145 Appendix 2. Default Occupancy Counts ........................................................................................ 146 Appendix 3. Retail Process Load Baselines .................................................................................. 147
  • 21. Updated to reflect the April 14, 2017 LEED v4 Building Design and Construction Addenda PREREQUISITE: INTEGRATIVE PROJECT PLANNING AND DESIGN Required This prerequisite applies to: Intent Maximize opportunities for integrated, cost-effective adoption of green design and construction strategies, emphasizing human health as a fundamental evaluative criterion for building design, construction and operational strategies. Utilize innovative approaches and techniques for green design and construction. Requirements HEALTHCARE Use cross-discipline design and decision making, beginning in the programming and pre-design phase. At a minimum, ensure the following process: Owner’s Project Requirements Document. Prepare an Owner’s Project Requirements (OPR) document. Develop a health mission statement and incorporate it in the
  • 22. OPR. The health mission statement must address "triple bottom line" values—economic, environmental and social. Include goals and strategies to safeguard the health of building occupants, the local community and the global environment, while creating a high-performance healing environment for the building’s patients, caregivers and staff. Preliminary Rating Goals. As early as practical and preferably before schematic design, conduct a preliminary LEED meeting with a minimum of four key project team members and the owner or owner’s representative. As part of the meeting, create a LEED® action plan that, at a minimum: Silver, Gold, or Platinum); ed certification level; and requirements for each prerequisite and selected credit are met. Integrated Project Team. Assemble an integrated project team and include as many of the following professionals as feasible (minimum of four), in addition to the owner or owner’s representative. manager designer
  • 24. staff programmers representatives general contractor construction cost estimator appropriate to the specific project type Design Charrette. As early as practical and preferably before schematic design, conduct a minimum
  • 25. four-hour , integrated design charrette with the project team as defined above. The goal is to optimize the integration of green strategies across all aspects of building design, construction and operations, drawing on the expertise of all participants. 10 Updated to reflect the April 14, 2017 LEED v4 Building Design and Construction Addenda CREDIT: INTEGRATIVE PROCESS BD&C 1 point This credit applies to re & Shell
  • 26. Intent To support high-performance, cost-effective project outcomes through an early analysis of the interrelationships among systems. Requirements NC, CS, SCHOOLS, RETAIL, DATA CENTERS, WAREHOUSES & DISTRIBUTION CENTERS, HOSPITALITY, HEALTHCARE Beginning in pre-design and continuing throughout the design phases, identify and use opportunities to achieve synergies across disciplines and building systems. Use the analyses described below to inform the owner’s project requirements (OPR), basis of design (BOD), design documents, and construction documents. Energy-Related Systems Discovery: Perform a preliminary “simple box” energy modeling analysis before the completion of schematic design that explores how to reduce energy loads in the building and accomplish related sustainability goals by questioning default assumptions. Assess at least two potential strategies associated with the following:
  • 27. landscaping, and adjacent site conditions. affect HVAC sizing, energy consumption, lighting, and renewable energy opportunities. - to-wall ratios, glazing characteristics, shading, and window operability. lighting levels in occupied spaces. options. process loads through programmatic solutions (e.g., equipment and purchasing policies, layout options). multifunctioning spaces, operating schedules, space allotment per person, teleworking, reduction of building area, and anticipated operations and maintenance. Implementation: Document how the above analysis informed design and building form decisions in the project’s OPR and BOD and the eventual design of the project, including the following, as applicable:
  • 28. 11 Updated to reflect the April 14, 2017 LEED v4 Building Design and Construction Addenda orientations; systems (e.g., HVAC, lighting, controls, Exterior materials, interior finishes, and functional program elements); and AND Water-Related Systems Discovery: Perform a preliminary water budget analysis before the completion of schematic design that explores how to reduce potable water loads in the building and accomplish related sustainability goals. Assess and estimate the project’s potential nonpotable water supply sources and water demand volumes, including the following: gn case demand volumes, calculated
  • 29. in accordance with WE Prerequisite Indoor Water Use Reduction. case demand volume calculated in accordance with WE Credit Outdoor Water-Use Reduction. cess water demand. Assess kitchen, laundry, cooling tower, and other equipment demand volumes, as applicable. source volumes, such as on- site rainwater and graywater, municipally supplied nonpotable water, and HVAC equipment condensate. Implementation: Document how the above analysis informed building and site design decisions in the project’s OPR and BOD. Demonstrate how at least one on- site nonpotable water supply source was analyzed to reduce the burden on municipal supply or wastewater treatment systems by contributing to at least two of the water demand components listed above. Demonstrate how the analysis informed the design of the project, including the following, as applicable: -site treatment systems;
  • 30. stems. 12 Updated to reflect the April 14, 2017 LEED v4 Building Design and Construction Addenda LOCATION AND TRANSPORATION (LT) LT CREDIT: LEED FOR NEIGHBORHOOD DEVELOPMENT LOCATION BD&C 3–16 points This credit applies to ruction (8–16 points) –20 points) –15 points) –16 points) –16 points) –16 points)
  • 31. –16 points) –9 points) Intent To avoid development on inappropriate sites. To reduce vehicle distance traveled. To enhance livability and improve human health by encouraging daily physical activity. Requirements NC, CS, SCHOOLS, RETAIL, DATA CENTERS, WAREHOUSES & DISTRIBUTION CENTERS, HOSPITALITY, HEALTHCARE Locate the project within the boundary of a development certified under LEED for Neighborhood Development (Stage 2 or Stage 3 under the Pilot or 2009 rating systems, Certified Plan or Certified Project under the LEED v4 rating system). Projects attempting this credit are not eligible to earn points under other Location and Transportation credits. Table 1. Points for LEED ND location.
  • 32. Certification level Points BD&C Points BD&C (Core and Shell) Points BD&C (Schools) Points BD&C (Healthcare) Certified 8 8 8 5 Silver 10 12 10 6 Gold 12 16 12 7 Platinum 16 20 15 9 13 Updated to reflect the April 14, 2017 LEED v4 Building Design and Construction Addenda LT CREDIT: SENSITIVE LAND PROTECTION BD&C 1-2 points
  • 33. This credit applies to point) Intent To avoid the development of environmentally sensitive lands and reduce the environmental impact from the location of a building on a site. Requirements NC, CS, SCHOOLS, RETAIL, DATA CENTERS, WAREHOUSES & DISTRIBUTION CENTERS, HOSPITALITY, HEALTHCARE Option 1. Locate the development footprint on land that has been previously developed. OR
  • 34. Option 2. Locate the development footprint on land that has been previously developed or that does not meet the following criteria for sensitive land: farmland of statewide or local importance as defined by the U.S. Code of Federal Regulations, Title 7, Volume 6, Parts 400 to 699, Section 657.5 (or local equivalent for projects outside the U.S.) and identified in a state Natural Resources Conservation Service soil survey (or local equivalent for projects outside the U.S.). flood hazard map or otherwise legally designated by the local jurisdiction or the state. For projects in places without legally adopted flood hazard maps or legal designations, locate on a site that is entirely outside any floodplain subject to a 1% or greater chance of flooding in any given year. o species listed as threatened or endangered under the U.S. Endangered Species Act or the state’s endangered species act, or o species or ecological communities classified by NatureServe as GH (possibly extinct), G1 (critically imperiled), or G2 (imperiled), or o species listed as threatened or endangered specifies under local equivalent standards
  • 35. (for projects outside the U.S.) that are not covered by NatureServe data. water body, except for minor improvements. wetland, except for minor improvements. Minor improvements within the wetland and water body buffers may be undertaken to enhance appreciation of them, provided such facilities are open all building users. Only the following improvements are considered minor: 14 Updated to reflect the April 14, 2017 LEED v4 Building Design and Construction Addenda (3.5 meters), of which no more than 8 feet (2.5 meters) may be impervious; and/or natural hydrology; -story structure per 300 linear feet (90 linear meters) on average, not exceeding 500 square feet (45 square meters);
  • 36. meters) on average, not exceeding 500 square feet (45 square meters) each; o Hazardous trees, up to 75% of dead trees o Trees less than 6 inches (150 millimeters) diameter at breast height o Up to 20% of trees more than 6 inches (150 millimeters) diameter at breast height with a condition rating of 40% or higher. o Trees under 40% condition rating The condition rating must be based on an assessment by an arborist certified by the International Society of Arboriculture (ISA) using ISA standard measures, or local equivalent for projects outside the U.S. 15 Updated to reflect the April 14, 2017 LEED v4 Building Design and Construction Addenda LT CREDIT: HIGH-PRIORITY SITE BD&C 2-3 points This credit applies to
  • 37. -2 points) -3 points) -2 points) -2 points) -2 points) -2 points) lity (1-2 points) -2 points) Intent To encourage project location in areas with development constraints and promote the health of the surrounding area. Requirements NC, CS, SCHOOLS, RETAIL, DATA CENTERS, WAREHOUSES & DISTRIBUTION CENTERS, HOSPITALITY, HEALTHCARE
  • 38. Option 1. Historic District (1 point BD&C except Core and Shell, 2 points Core and Shell) Locate the project on an infill location in a historic district. OR Option 2. Priority Designation (1 point BD&C except Core and Shell, 2 points Core and Shell) Locate the project on one of the following: l Community site; Financial Institutions Fund Qualified Low- Income Community (a subset of the New Markets Tax Credit Program); Development’s Qualified Census Tract (QCT) or Difficult Development Area (DDA); or for projects outside the U.S. OR Option 3. Brownfield Remediation (2 points BD&C except Core
  • 39. and Shell, 3 points Core and Shell) Locate on a brownfield where soil or groundwater contamination has been identified, and where the local, state, or national authority (whichever has jurisdiction) requires its remediation. Perform remediation to the satisfaction of that authority. 16 Updated to reflect the April 14, 2017 LEED v4 Building Design and Construction Addenda LT CREDIT: SURROUNDING DENSITY AND DIVERSE USES BD&C 1–6 points This credit applies to –5 points) –6 points) –5 points) –5 points) –5 points) –5 points) –5 points)
  • 40. Intent To conserve land and protect farmland and wildlife habitat by encouraging development in areas with existing infrastructure. To promote walkability, and transportation efficiency and reduce vehicle distance traveled. To improve public health by encouraging daily physical activity. Requirements NC, CS, SCHOOLS, RETAIL, DATA CENTERS, HOSPITALITY Option 1. Surrounding Density (2–3 points BD&C except Core and Shell, 2-4 points Core and Shell) Locate on a site whose surrounding existing density within a ¼- mile (400-meter) radius of the project boundary meets the values in Table 1. Use either the “separate residential and nonresidential densities” or the “combined density” values. Table 1a. Points for average density within 1/4 mile of project (IP units) Combined
  • 41. density Separate residential and nonresidential densities Points BD&C (except Core and Shell) Points BD&C (Core and Shell) Square feet per acre of buildable land Residential density (DU/acre) Nonresidential density (FAR) 22,000 7 0.5 2 2 35,000 12 0.8 3 4
  • 42. Table 1b. Points for average density within 400 meters of project (SI units) Combined density Separate residential and nonresidential densities Points BD&C (except Core Points BD&C 17 Updated to reflect the April 14, 2017 LEED v4 Building Design and Construction Addenda and Shell) (Core and Shell) Square meters
  • 43. per hectare of buildable land Residential density (DU/hectare) Nonresidential density (FAR) 5,050 17.5 0.5 2 2 8,035 30 0.8 3 4 DU = dwelling unit; FAR = floor-area ratio. Schools only Physical education spaces that are part of the project site, such as playing fields and associated buildings used during sporting events only (e.g., concession stands) and playgrounds with play equipment, are excluded from the development density calculations. AND/OR Option 2. Diverse Uses (1–2 points) Construct or renovate a building or a space within a building such that the building’s main entrance is within a ½-mile (800-meter) walking distance of the main entrance of four to seven (1 point) or eight or
  • 44. more (2 points) existing and publicly available diverse uses (listed in Appendix 1). The following restrictions apply. tore may be counted only once even if it sells products in several categories). if five restaurants are within walking distance, only two may be counted). t at least three of the five categories, exclusive of the building’s primary use. WAREHOUSES & DISTRIBUTION CENTERS Option 1. Development and Adjacency (2–3 points) Construct or renovate the project on a previously developed site that was used for industrial or commercial purposes. (2 points). OR Construct or renovate the project on a site that is both a previously developed and an adjacent site. The adjacent sites must be currently used for industrial or commercial purposes (3 points). AND/OR
  • 45. Option 2. Transportation Resources (1–2 points) Construct or renovate the project on a site that has two or three (1 point) or four (2 points) of the following transportation resources: -mile (16 kilometer) driving distance of a main logistics hub, defined as an airport, seaport, intermodal facility, or freight village with intermodal transportation. -mile (1600-meter) driving distance of an on-off ramp to a highway. 18 Updated to reflect the April 14, 2017 LEED v4 Building Design and Construction Addenda -mile (1600-meter) driving distance of an access point to an active freight rail line. In all cases, a planned transportation resource must be sited, funded, and under construction by the date of the certificate of occupancy and complete within 24 months of that date. HEALTHCARE
  • 46. Option 1. Surrounding Density (1 point) Locate on a site whose surrounding existing density within a ¼- mile (400-meter) radius of the project boundary is: 1. At least 7 dwelling units per acre (17.5 DU per hectare) with a 0.5 floor-area ratio. The counted density must be existing density, not zoned density, or 2. At least 22,000 square feet per acre (5 050 square meters per hectare) of buildable land. For previously developed existing rural healthcare campus sites, achieve a minimum development density of 30,000 square feet per acre (6890 square meters per hectare). OR Option 2. Diverse Uses (1 point) Construct or renovate a building on a site such that the building’s main entrance is within a ½-mile (800- meter) walking distance of the main entrance of at least seven operational and publicly accessible uses (listed in Appendix 1). The following restrictions apply. may be counted only once even if it sells products in several categories). se type may be counted (e.g.,
  • 47. if five restaurants are within walking distance, only two may be counted). categories, exclusive of the building’s primary use. 19 Updated to reflect the April 14, 2017 LEED v4 Building Design and Construction Addenda LT CREDIT: ACCESS TO QUALITY TRANSIT BD&C 1–6 points This credit applies to –5 points) –6 points) –4 points) (1–5 points) –5 points) –5 points) –5 points)
  • 48. –2 points) Intent To encourage development in locations shown to have multimodal transportation choices or otherwise reduced motor vehicle use, thereby reducing greenhouse gas emissions, air pollution, and other environmental and public health harms associated with motor vehicle use. Requirements NC, CS, DATA CENTERS, WAREHOUSES & DISTRIBUTION CENTERS, HOSPITALITY, RETAIL Locate any functional entry of the project within a ¼-mile (400- meter) walking distance of existing or planned bus, streetcar, or rideshare stops, or within a ½-mile (800-meter) walking distance of existing or planned bus rapid transit stops, light or heavy rail stations, commuter rail stations, or commuter ferry terminals. The transit service at those stops and stations in aggregate must meet the minimums listed in Tables 1 and 2. Planned stops and stations may count if they are sited, funded, and under construction by the date of the certificate of occupancy and are complete within 24 months of that date. Both weekday and weekend trip minimums must be met.
  • 49. (service in opposite directions). are counted towards the threshold. required walking distance, only trips from one stop are counted towards the threshold. Table 1. Minimum daily transit service for projects with multiple transit types (bus, streetcar, rail, or ferry) Weekday trips Weekend trips Points BD&C (except Core and Shell) Points BD&C (Core and shell 72 40 1 1 144 108 3 3 360 216 5 6 Table 2. Minimum daily transit service for projects with
  • 50. commuter rail or ferry service only Weekday trips Weekend trips Points 24 6 1 40 8 2 20 Updated to reflect the April 14, 2017 LEED v4 Building Design and Construction Addenda 60 12 3 Projects served by two or more transit routes such that no one route provides more than 60% of the documented levels may earn one additional point, up to the maximum number of points. If existing transit service is temporarily rerouted outside the required distances for less than two years, the project may meet the requirements, provided the local transit agency has committed to restoring the routes with service at or above the prior level. SCHOOLS Option 1. Transit-Served Location (1–4 points)
  • 51. Locate any functional entry of the project within a ¼-mile (400- meter) walking distance of existing or planned bus, streetcar, or rideshare stops, or within a ½-mile (800-meter) walking distance of existing or planned bus rapid transit stops, light or heavy rail stations, commuter rail stations or commuter ferry terminals. The transit service at those stops and stations must meet the minimums listed in Tables 1 and 2. Planned stops and stations may count if they are sited, funded, and under construction by the date of the certificate of occupancy and are complete within 24 months of that date. (service in opposite directions). ying transit route, only trips in one direction are counted towards the threshold. required walking distance, only trips from one stop are counted towards the threshold. Table 1. Minimum daily transit service for projects with multiple transit types (bus, streetcar, rail, or ferry) Weekday trips Points 72 1 144 2
  • 52. 360 4 Table 2. Minimum daily transit service for projects with commuter rail or ferry service only Weekday trips Points 24 1 40 2 60 3 Projects served by two or more transit routes such that no one route provides more than 60% of the prescribed levels may earn one additional point, up to the maximum number of points. If existing transit service is temporarily rerouted outside the required distances for less than two years, the project may meet the requirements, provided the local transit agency has committed to restoring the routes with service at or above the prior level. OR Option 2. Pedestrian Access (1–4 points) Show that the project has an attendance boundary such that the specified percentages of students live within no more than a 3/4-mile (1200-meter) walking distance (for grades 8 and below, or ages 14 and
  • 53. 21 Updated to reflect the April 14, 2017 LEED v4 Building Design and Construction Addenda below), and 1 1/2-mile (2400-meter) walking distance (for grades 9 and above or ages 15 and above) of a functional entry of a school building. Points are awarded according to Table 3. Table 3. Points for student population within walking distance In addition, locate the project on a site that allows pedestrian access to the site from all residential neighborhoods that house the planned student population. HEALTHCARE Locate any functional entry of the project within a ¼-mile (400- meter) walking distance of existing or planned bus, streetcar, or rideshare stops, or within a ½-mile (800-meter) walking distance of existing or planned bus rapid transit stops, light or heavy rail stations, commuter rail stations or commuter ferry terminals. The transit service at those stops and stations in aggregate must meet the minimums listed in Tables 1 and 2. Planned stops and stations may count if they are sited, funded, and under construction by the date of the certificate of occupancy and are complete within 24 months of that date.
  • 54. Both weekday and weekend trip minimums must be met. (service in opposite directions). are counted towards the threshold. required walking distance, only trips from one stop are counted towards the threshold. Table 1. Minimum daily transit service for projects with multiple transit types (bus, streetcar, rail, or ferry). Weekday trips Weekend trips Points 72 40 1 144 108 2 Table 2. Minimum daily transit service for projects with commuter rail or ferry service only Weekday trips Weekend trips Points 24 6 1 40 8 2
  • 55. Projects served by two or more transit routes such that no one route provides more than 60% of the prescribed levels may earn one additional point, up to the maximum number of points. If existing transit service is temporarily rerouted outside the required distances for less than two years, the project may meet the requirements, provided the local transit agency has committed to restoring the routes with service at or above the prior level. Percentage of students Points 50% 1 60% 2 70% or more 4 22 Updated to reflect the April 14, 2017 LEED v4 Building Design and Construction Addenda LT CREDIT: BICYCLE FACILITIES BD&C 1 point This credit applies to
  • 56. Intent To promote bicycling and transportation efficiency and reduce vehicle distance traveled. To improve public health by encouraging utilitarian and recreational physical activity. Requirements NC, CS, DATA CENTERS, WAREHOUSES & DISTRIBUTION CENTERS, HOSPITALITY Bicycle Network Design or locate the project such that a functional entry or bicycle storage is within a 200-yard (180- meter) walking distance or bicycling distance from a bicycle network that connects to at least one of the following:
  • 57. st 10 diverse uses (see Appendix 1); is 50% or more residential; or rail station, or ferry terminal. All destinations must be within a 3-mile (4800-meter) bicycling distance of the project boundary. Planned bicycle trails or lanes may be counted if they are fully funded by the date of the certificate of occupancy and are scheduled for completion within one year of that date. Bicycle Storage and Shower Rooms Case 1. Commercial or Institutional Projects Provide short-term bicycle storage for at least 2.5% of all peak visitors, but no fewer than four storage spaces per building. Provide long-term bicycle storage for at least 5% of all regular building occupants, but no fewer than four storage spaces per building in addition to the short-term bicycle storage spaces. Provide at least one on-site shower with changing facility for the first 100 regular building occupants and one additional shower for every 150 regular building occupants thereafter. Case 2. Residential Projects Provide short-term bicycle storage for at least 2.5% of all peak visitors but no fewer than four storage
  • 58. spaces per building. Provide long-term bicycle storage for at least 30% of all regular building occupants, but no less than one storage space per residential unit. 23 Updated to reflect the April 14, 2017 LEED v4 Building Design and Construction Addenda Case 3. Mixed-Use Projects Meet the Case 1 and Case 2 storage requirements for the nonresidential and residential portions of the project, respectively. For All Projects Short-term bicycle storage must be within 100 feet (30 meters) walking distance of any main entrance. Long-term bicycle storage must be within 100 feet (30 meters) walking distance of any functional entry. Bicycle storage capacity may not be double-counted: storage that is fully allocated to the occupants of nonproject facilities cannot also serve project occupants. Core & Shell projects should refer to Appendix 2, Default Occupancy Counts, for occupancy count requirements and guidance. SCHOOLS
  • 59. Bicycle Network Design or locate the project such that a functional entry and/or bicycle storage is within a 200-yard (180- meter) walking distance or bicycling distance of a bicycle network that connects to at least one of the following: station, commuter rail station, or ferry terminal. All destinations must be within a 3-mile (4800-meter) bicycling distance of the project boundary. Provide dedicated bicycle lanes that extend at least to the end of the school property with no barriers (e.g., fences) on school property. Planned bicycle trails or lanes may be counted if they are fully funded by the date of the certificate of occupancy and are scheduled for completion within one year of that date. Bicycle Storage and Shower Rooms Provide long-term bicycle storage for at least 5% of all regular building occupants (excluding students grade 3 and younger), but no fewer than four storage spaces per building. Provide at least one on-site shower with changing facility for the first 100 regular building occupants (excluding students) and one additional shower for every 150 regular building occupants (excluding students) thereafter.
  • 60. Long-term storage spaces must be easily accessible to occupants and be within 100 feet (30 meters) walking distance of any main entrance. Bicycle storage capacity may not be double-counted: storage that is fully allocated to the occupants of nonproject facilities cannot also serve project occupants. RETAIL Bicycle Network Design or locate the project such that a functional entry and/or bicycle storage is within a 200-yard (180- meter) walking distance or bicycling distance of a bicycle network that connects to at least one of the following: ); or rail station, or ferry terminal. All destinations must be within a 3-mile (4800-meter) bicycling distance of the project boundary. 24 Updated to reflect the April 14, 2017 LEED v4 Building Design and Construction Addenda Planned bicycle trails or lanes may be counted if they are fully
  • 61. funded by the date of the certificate of occupancy and are scheduled for completion within one year of that date. Bicycle Storage and Shower Rooms Provide at least two short-term bicycle storage spaces for every 5,000 square feet (465 square meters), but no fewer than two storage spaces per building. Provide long-term bicycle storage for at least 5% of regular building occupants, but no fewer than two storage spaces per building in addition to the short-term bicycle storage spaces. Provide at least one on-site shower with changing facility for the first 100 regular building occupants and one additional shower for every 150 regular building occupants thereafter. Short-term bicycle storage must be within 100 feet (30 meters) walking distance of any main entrance. Long-term bicycle storage must be within 100 feet (30 meters) walking distance of any functional entry. Bicycle storage capacity may not be double-counted: storage that is fully allocated to the occupants of nonproject facilities cannot also serve project occupants. Provide a bicycle maintenance program for employees or bicycle route assistance for employees and customers. Route assistance must be provided in a manner easily accessible to both employees and customers. For projects that are part of a multitenant complex only: If
  • 62. bicycle storage spaces have been provided in the complex in which the project is located, determine the number of spaces that may be attributed to the project by dividing the project’s floor area by the total floor area of the development (buildings only) and multiplying the percentage result by the total number of spaces. If this number does not meet the credit requirement, the project must provide additional bicycle storage. HEALTHCARE Bicycle Network Design or locate the project such that a functional entry and/or bicycle storage is within a 200-yard (180- meter) walking distance or bicycling distance of a bicycle network that connects to at least one of the following: rail station, or ferry terminal. All destinations must be within a 3-mile (4800-meter) bicycling distance of the project boundary. Planned bicycle trails or lanes may be counted if they are fully funded by the date of the certificate of occupancy and are scheduled for completion within one year of that date. Bicycle Storage and Shower Rooms Case 1. Commercial or Institutional Projects
  • 63. Provide short-term bicycle storage for at least 2.5% of all peak visitors, but no fewer than four storage spaces per building. Provide long-term bicycle storage for at least 5% of regular building occupants (excluding patients), but no fewer than four storage spaces per building in addition to the short-term bicycle storage spaces. Provide at least one on-site shower with changing facility for the first 100 regular building occupants (excluding patients) and one additional shower for every 150 regular building occupants thereafter. 25 Updated to reflect the April 14, 2017 LEED v4 Building Design and Construction Addenda Case 2. Residential Projects Provide secure, enclosed bicycle storage for at least 30% of all regular building occupants (excluding patients) measured at peak periods, but no less than one storage space per residential unit. For All Projects Short-term bicycle storage must be within 100 feet (30 meters) walking distance of any main entrance. Long-term bicycle storage must be within 100 feet (30 meters) walking distance of any functional entry. Bicycle storage capacity may not be double counted: storage
  • 64. that is fully allocated to the occupants of nonproject facilities cannot also serve project occupants. 26 Updated to reflect the April 14, 2017 LEED v4 Building Design and Construction Addenda LT CREDIT: REDUCED PARKING FOOTPRINT BD&C 1 point This credit applies to e (1 point)
  • 65. Intent To minimize the environmental harms associated with parking facilities, including automobile dependence, land consumption, and rainwater runoff. Requirements NC, CS, RETAIL, SCHOOLS, DATA CENTERS, WAREHOUSES & DISTRIBUTION CENTERS, HOSPITALITY, HEALTHCARE Do not exceed the minimum local code requirements for parking capacity. Provide parking capacity that is a percentage reduction below the base ratios recommended by the Parking Consultants Council, as shown in the Institute of Transportation Engineers’ Transportation Planning Handbook, 3rd edition, Tables 18-2 through 18-4. Case 1. Baseline Location Projects that have not earned points under LT Credit Surrounding Density and Diverse Uses or LT Credit Access to Quality Transit must achieve a 20% reduction from the base ratios. Case 2. Dense and/or Transit-Served Location Projects earning 1 or more points under either LT Credit
  • 66. Surrounding Density and Diverse Uses or LT Credit Access to Quality Transit must achieve a 40% reduction from the base ratios. For All Projects The credit calculations must include all existing and new off- street parking spaces that are leased or owned by the project, including parking that is outside the project boundary but is used by the project. On-street parking in public rights-of-way is excluded from these calculations. For projects that use pooled parking, calculate compliance using the project’s share of the pooled parking. Provide preferred parking for carpools for 5% of the total parking spaces after reductions are made from the base ratios. Preferred parking is not required if no off-street parking is provided. 27 Updated to reflect the April 14, 2017 LEED v4 Building Design and Construction Addenda Mixed-use projects should determine the percentage reduction by first aggregating the parking amount of each use (as specified by the base ratios) and then determining the percentage reduction from the aggregated parking amount.
  • 67. Do not count parking spaces for fleet and inventory vehicles unless these vehicles are regularly used by employees for commuting as well as business purposes. 28 Updated to reflect the April 14, 2017 LEED v4 Building Design and Construction Addenda LT CREDIT: GREEN VEHICLES BD&C 1 point This credit applies to stribution Centers (1 point)
  • 68. Intent To reduce pollution by promoting alternatives to conventionally fueled automobiles. Requirements NC, CS, DATA CENTERS, HOSPITALITY. RETAIL, HEALTHCARE Designate 5% of all parking spaces used by the project as preferred parking for green vehicles. Clearly identify and enforce for sole use by green vehicles. Distribute preferred parking spaces proportionally among various parking sections (e.g. between short-term and long-term spaces). Green vehicles must achieve a minimum green score of 45 on the American Council for an Energy Efficient Economy (ACEEE) annual vehicle rating guide (or local equivalent for projects outside the U.S.). A discounted parking rate of at least 20% for green vehicles is an acceptable substitute for preferred parking spaces. The discounted rate must be publicly posted at the entrance of the parking area and permanently available to every qualifying vehicle. In addition to preferred parking for green vehicles, meet one of the following two options for alternative- fuel fueling stations: Option 1. Electric Vehicle Charging Install electrical vehicle supply equipment (EVSE) in 2% of all
  • 69. parking spaces used by the project. Clearly identify and reserve these spaces for the sole use by plug-in electric vehicles. EVSE parking spaces must be provided in addition to preferred parking spaces for green vehicles. The EVSE must: – 240 volts) or greater. ant regional or local standard for electrical connectors, such as SAE Surface Vehicle Recommended Practice J1772, SAE Electric Vehicle Conductive Charge Coupler or IEC 62196 of the International Electrotechnical Commission for projects outside the U.S. participating in a demand-response program or time-of-use pricing to encourage off-peak charging. OR Option 2. Liquid, gas, or battery facilities 29 Updated to reflect the April 14, 2017 LEED v4 Building Design and Construction Addenda
  • 70. Install liquid or gas alternative fuel fueling facilities or a battery switching station capable of refueling a number of vehicles per day equal to at least 2% of all parking spaces. SCHOOLS Option 1: Green passenger vehicles Designate 5% of all parking spaces used by the project as preferred parking for green vehicles. Clearly identify and enforce for sole use by green vehicles. Distribute preferred parking spaces proportionally among various parking sections (e.g. between short-term and long-term spaces). Green vehicles must achieve a minimum green score of 45 on the American Council for an Energy Efficient Economy (ACEEE) annual vehicle rating guide (or local equivalent for projects outside the U.S. A discounted parking rate of at least 20% for green vehicles is an acceptable substitute for preferred parking spaces. The discounted rate must be publicly posted at the entrance of the parking area and permanently available to every qualifying vehicle. In addition to preferred parking for green vehicles, meet one of the following two options for alternative- fuel fueling stations: Path 1. Electric Vehicle Charging Install electrical vehicle supply equipment (EVSE) in 2% of all parking spaces used by the project. Clearly identify and reserve these spaces for the sole use by
  • 71. plug-in electric vehicles. EVSE parking spaces must be provided in addition to preferred parking spaces for green vehicles. The EVSE must: Provide a Level 2 charging capacity (208 – 240 volts) or greater. electrical connectors, such as SAE Surface Vehicle Recommended Practice J1772, SAE Electric Vehicle Conductive Charge Coupler or IEC 62196 of the International Electrotechnical Commission for projects outside the U.S. participating in a demand-response program or time-of-use pricing to encourage off-peak charging. OR Path 2. Liquid, gas, or battery facilities Install liquid or gas alternative fuel fueling facilities or a battery switching station capable of refueling a number of vehicles per day equal to at least 2% of all parking spaces. OR Option 2: Green buses or school-owned vehicles
  • 72. Develop and implement a plan for every bus serving the school to meet the following emissions standards within seven years of the building certificate of occupancy: or less per brake horsepower-hour; and horsepower-hour. Emission standards must be met for each bus and not by an average of the entire fleet serving the school. 30 Updated to reflect the April 14, 2017 LEED v4 Building Design and Construction Addenda Develop and implement a plan for 100% of all other (non-bus) vehicles owned or leased to serve the school to be green vehicles. Green vehicles must achieve a minimum green score of 45 on the American Council for an Energy Efficient Economy (ACEEE) annual vehicle rating guide (or local equivalent for projects outside the U.S). WAREHOUSES & DISTRIBUTION CENTERS Option 1. Alternative-Fuel Vehicles (1 point) Provide an on-site fleet with at least one yard tractor that is powered by electricity, propane, or natural
  • 73. gas. Provide on-site charging or refueling stations for the vehicles. Liquid or gas refueling stations must be separately ventilated or located outdoors. OR Option 2. Reduced Truck Idling (1 point) Provide an electrical connection for at least 50% of all dock door locations to limit truck idling at the dock. 31 Updated to reflect the April 14, 2017 LEED v4 Building Design and Construction Addenda SUSTAINABLE SITES (SS) SS PREREQUISITE: CONSTRUCTION ACTIVITY POLLUTION PREVENTION Required BD&C This prerequisite applies to
  • 74. pitality Intent To reduce pollution from construction activities by controlling soil erosion, waterway sedimentation, and airborne dust. Requirements NC, CS, SCHOOLS, RETAIL, DATA CENTERS, WAREHOUSES & DISTRIBUTION CENTERS, HOSPITALITY, HEALTHCARE Create and implement an erosion and sedimentation control plan for all construction activities associated with the project. The plan must conform to the erosion and sedimentation requirements of the 2012 U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) Construction General Permit (CGP) or local equivalent, whichever is more stringent. Projects must apply the CGP regardless of size. The plan must describe the measures implemented.
  • 75. 32 Updated to reflect the April 14, 2017 LEED v4 Building Design and Construction Addenda SS PREREQUISITE: ENVIRONMENTAL SITE ASSESSMENT Required BD&C This prerequisite applies to Intent To protect the health of vulnerable populations by ensuring that the site is assessed for environmental contamination and that any environmental contamination has been remediated. Requirements SCHOOLS, HEALTHCARE Conduct a Phase I Environmental Site Assessment as described in ASTM E1527–05 (or a local equivalent) to determine whether environmental contamination exists at the site. If contamination is suspected, conduct a Phase II Environmental Site Assessment as described in ASTM E1903–11 (or a local equivalent).
  • 76. If a site is contaminated, remediate the site to meet local, state, or national environmental protection agency region residential (unrestricted) standards, whichever are most stringent. 33 Updated to reflect the April 14, 2017 LEED v4 Building Design and Construction Addenda SS CREDIT: SITE ASSESSMENT BD&C 1 point This credit applies to Healthcare (1 point) Intent To assess site conditions before design to evaluate sustainable
  • 77. options and inform related decisions about site design. Requirements NC, CS, SCHOOLS, RETAIL, DATA CENTERS, WAREHOUSES & DISTRIBUTION CENTERS, HOSPITALITY, HEALTHCARE Complete and document a site survey or assessment1 that includes the following information: slope stability risks. kes, streams, shorelines, rainwater collection and reuse opportunities, TR-55 initial water storage capacity of the site (or local equivalent for projects outside the U.S.). sun angles, prevailing winds, monthly precipitation and temperature ranges. significant tree mapping, threatened or endangered species, unique habitat, invasive plant species. nservation Service soils delineation, U.S. Department of Agriculture prime farmland, healthy soils, previous development, disturbed soils (local equivalent standards may be used for projects outside the U.S.).
  • 78. n infrastructure, adjacent properties, construction materials with existing recycle or reuse potential. adjacent physical activity opportunities, proximity to major sources of air pollution. The survey or assessment should demonstrate the relationships between the site features and topics listed above and how these features influenced the project design; give the reasons for not addressing any of those topics. 1 Components adapted from the Sustainable Sites Initiative: Guidelines and Performance Benchmarks 2009, Prerequisite 2.1: Site Assessment. 34 Updated to reflect the April 14, 2017 LEED v4 Building Design and Construction Addenda SS CREDIT: SITE DEVELOPMENT—PROTECT OR RESTORE HABITAT BD&C 1–2 points This credit applies to
  • 79. –2 points) –2 points) –2 points) –2 points) –2 points) –2 points) –2 points) Intent To conserve existing natural areas and restore damaged areas to provide habitat and promote biodiversity. Requirements NC, CS, SCHOOLS, RETAIL, DATA CENTERS, WAREHOUSES & DISTRIBUTION CENTERS, HOSPITALITY, HEALTHCARE Preserve and protect from all development and construction activity 40% of the greenfield area on the site (if such areas exist). AND
  • 80. Option 1. On-Site Restoration (2 points except Healthcare, 1 point Healthcare) Using native or adapted vegetation, restore 30% (including the building footprint) of all portions of the site identified as previously disturbed. Projects that achieve a density of 1.5 floor-area ratio may include vegetated roof surfaces in this calculation if the plants are native or adapted, provide habitat, and promote biodiversity. Restore all disturbed or compacted soils that will be revegetated within the project’s development footprint to meet the following requirements2: comparable to their original function. may not include the following: o soils defined regionally by the Natural Resources Conservation Service web soil survey (or local equivalent for projects outside the U.S.) as prime farmland, unique farmland, or farmland of statewide or local importance; or o soils from other greenfield sites, unless those soils are a byproduct of a construction process. categories 1–3 and meet the criteria of either category 4 or 5: 1. organic matter; 2. compaction; 3. infiltration rates;
  • 81. 4. soil biological function; and 5. soil chemical characteristics. 2 Components adapted from the Sustainable Sites Initiative: Guidelines and Performance Benchmarks 2009, Credit 7.2: Restore Soils Disturbed During Construction 35 Updated to reflect the April 14, 2017 LEED v4 Building Design and Construction Addenda Project teams may exclude vegetated landscape areas that are constructed to accommodate rainwater infiltration from the vegetation and soils requirements, provided all such rainwater infiltration areas are treated consistently with SS Credit Rainwater Management. Schools only: Dedicated athletic fields that are solely for athletic uses are exempted from the soil restoration criteria. These areas may not count toward the minimum required area. OR Option 2. Financial Support (1 point) Provide financial support equivalent to at least $0.40 per square foot (US$4 per square meter) for the total site area (including the building footprint).
  • 82. Financial support must be provided to a nationally or locally recognized land trust or conservation organization within the same EPA Level III ecoregion or the project’s state (or within 100 miles of the project [160 kilometers] for projects outside the U.S.). For U.S. projects, the land trust must be accredited by the Land Trust Alliance. 36 Updated to reflect the April 14, 2017 LEED v4 Building Design and Construction Addenda SS CREDIT: OPEN SPACE BD&C 1 point This credit applies to
  • 83. Intent To create exterior open space that encourages interaction with the environment, social interaction, passive recreation, and physical activities. Requirements NC, CS, SCHOOLS, RETAIL, DATA CENTERS, WAREHOUSES & DISTRIBUTION CENTERS, HOSPITALITY, HEALTHCARE Provide outdoor space greater than or equal to 30% of the total site area (including building footprint). A minimum of 25% of that outdoor space must be vegetated (turf grass does not count as vegetation) or have overhead vegetated canopy. The outdoor space must be physically accessible and be one or more of the following: -oriented paving or turf area with physical site elements that accommodate outdoor social activities; -oriented paving or turf area with physical site elements that encourage physical activity;
  • 84. species that provide opportunities for year-round visual interest; production; Credit Site Development—Protect or Restore Habitat and also includes elements of human interaction. For projects that achieve a density of 1.5 floor-area ratio (FAR), and are physically accessible, extensive or intensive vegetated roofs can be used toward the minimum 25% vegetation requirement, and qualifying roof-based physically accessible paving areas can be used toward credit compliance. Wetlands or naturally designed ponds may count as open space if the side slope gradients average 1:4 (vertical : horizontal) or less and are vegetated. For projects that are part of a multitenant complex only Open space can be either adjacent to the building or at another location in the site master plan. The open space may be at another master plan development site as long as it is protected from development. If the open space is not adjacent to the building, provide documentation showing that the requirements have been met and the land is in a natural state or has been returned to a natural state and conserved for the life of the building.
  • 85. 37 Updated to reflect the April 14, 2017 LEED v4 Building Design and Construction Addenda SS CREDIT: RAINWATER MANAGEMENT BD&C 1–3 points This credit applies to –3 points) –3 points) –3 points) –3 points) –3 points) –3 points) –3 points) –2 points) Intent To reduce runoff volume and improve water quality by replicating the natural hydrology and water balance of the site, based on historical conditions and undeveloped ecosystems in the region.
  • 86. Requirements NC, CS, SCHOOLS, RETAIL, DATA CENTERS, WAREHOUSES & DISTRIBUTION CENTERS, HOSPITALITY, HEALTHCARE Option 1. Percentile of Rainfall Events Path 1. 95th Percentile (2 points except Healthcare, 1 point Healthcare) In a manner best replicating natural site hydrology processes, manage on site the runoff from the developed site for the 95th percentile of regional or local rainfall events using low-impact development (LID) and green infrastructure. Use daily rainfall data and the methodology in the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) Technical Guidance on Implementing the Stormwater Runoff Requirements for Federal Projects under Section 438 of the Energy Independence and Security Act to determine the 95th percentile amount. OR Path 2. 98th Percentile (3 points except Healthcare, 2 points Healthcare) Achieve Path 1 but for the 98th percentile of regional or local rainfall events, using LID and green infrastructure.
  • 87. OR Path 3. Zero Lot Line projects only – 85th Percentile (3 points except Healthcare, 2 points Healthcare) The following requirement applies to zero lot line projects in urban areas with a minimum density of 1.5 FAR. In a manner best replicating natural site hydrology processes, manage on site the runoff from the developed site for the 85th percentile of regional or local rainfall events, using LID and green infrastructure. OR Option 2. Natural Land Cover Conditions (3 points except Healthcare, 2 points Healthcare) Manage on site the annual increase in runoff volume from the natural land cover condition to the postdeveloped condition. 38 Updated to reflect the April 14, 2017 LEED v4 Building Design and Construction Addenda Projects that are part of a multitenant complex only The credit requirements may be met using a coordinated approach affecting the defined project site that is within the master plan boundary. Distributed techniques based on a watershed approach are then required.
  • 88. 39 Updated to reflect the April 14, 2017 LEED v4 Building Design and Construction Addenda SS CREDIT: HEAT ISLAND REDUCTION BD&C 1–2 points This credit applies to -2 points) -2 points) -2 points) -2 points) -2 points) -2 points) -2 points) Intent To minimize effects on microclimates and human and wildlife habitats by reducing heat islands. Requirements
  • 89. NC, CS, SCHOOLS, RETAIL, DATA CENTERS, WAREHOUSES & DISTRIBUTION CENTERS, HOSPITALITY, HEALTHCARE Choose one of the following options: Option 1. Nonroof and Roof (2 points except Healthcare, 1 point Healthcare) Meet the following criterion: Area of Nonroof Measures Area of High- Reflectance Roof Area of Vegetated Roof Total Site Paving Area Total Roof Area —————
  • 90. — + —————— + —————— ≥ + 0.5 0.75 0.75 Alternatively, an SRI and SR weighted average approach may be used to calculate compliance. Use any combination of the following strategies. Nonroof Measures shade over paving areas (including playgrounds) on the site within 10 years of planting. Install vegetated planters. Plants must be in place at the time of occupancy permit and cannot include artificial turf. systems, such as solar thermal collectors, photovoltaics, and wind turbines. Provide shade with architectural devices or structures that have a three-year aged solar reflectance (SR) value of at least 0.28. If three-year aged value information is not available, use materials with an initial SR of at least 0.33 at installation, -year aged solar reflectance
  • 91. (SR) value of at least 0.28. If three- year aged value information is not available, use materials with an initial SR of at least 0.33 at installation. -grid pavement system (at least 50% unbound). 40 Updated to reflect the April 14, 2017 LEED v4 Building Design and Construction Addenda High-Reflectance Roof Use roofing materials that have an SRI equal to or greater than the values in Table 1. Meet the three-year aged SRI value. If three-year aged value information is not available, use materials that meet the initial SRI value. Table 1. Minimum solar reflectance index value, by roof slope Slope Initial SRI 3-year aged SRI Low-sloped roof ≤ 2:12 82
  • 92. 64 Steep-sloped roof > 2:12 39 32 Vegetated Roof Install a vegetated roof. OR Option 2. Parking under Cover (1 point) Place a minimum of 75% of parking spaces under cover. Any roof used to shade or cover parking must (1) have a three-year aged SRI of at least 32 (if three-year aged value information is not available, use materials with an initial SRI of at least 39 at installation), (2) be a vegetated roof, or (3) be covered by energy generation systems, such as solar thermal collectors, photovoltaics, and wind turbines .
  • 93. 41 Updated to reflect the April 14, 2017 LEED v4 Building Design and Construction Addenda SS CREDIT: LIGHT POLLUTION REDUCTION BD&C 1 point This credit applies to Intent To increase night sky access, improve nighttime visibility, and reduce the consequences of development for wildlife and people.
  • 94. Requirements NC, CS, SCHOOLS, RETAIL, DATA CENTERS, WAREHOUSES & DISTRIBUTION CENTERS, HOSPITALITY, HEALTHCARE Meet uplight and light trespass requirements, using either the backlight-uplight-glare (BUG) method (Option 1) or the calculation method (Option 2). Projects may use different options for uplight and light trespass. Meet these requirements for all exterior luminaires located inside the project boundary (except those listed under “Exemptions”), based on the following: mounted in the same orientation and tilt as specified in the project design; and construction begins). Classify the project under one lighting zone using the lighting zones definitions provided in the Illuminating Engineering Society and International Dark Sky Association (IES/IDA) Model Lighting Ordinance (MLO) User Guide. Additionally, meet the internally illuminated signage requirement.
  • 95. Uplight Option 1. BUG Rating Method Do not exceed the following luminaire uplight ratings, based on the specific light source installed in the luminaire, as defined in IES TM-15-11, Addendum A. Table 1. Maximum uplight ratings for luminaires MLO lighting zone Luminaire uplight rating LZ0 U0 LZ1 U1 LZ2 U2 LZ3 U3 42 Updated to reflect the April 14, 2017 LEED v4 Building Design and Construction Addenda LZ4 U4 OR Option 2. Calculation Method
  • 96. Do not exceed the following percentages of total lumens emitted above horizontal. Table 2. Maximum percentage of total lumens emitted above horizontal, by lighting zone MLO lighting zone Maximum allowed percentage of total luminaire lumens emitted above horizontal LZ0 0% LZ1 0% LZ2 1.5% LZ3 3% LZ4 6% AND Light Trespass Option 1. BUG Rating Method Do not exceed the following luminaire backlight and glare ratings (based on the specific light source installed in the luminaire), as defined in IES TM-15-11, Addendum A, based on the mounting location and distance from the lighting boundary.
  • 97. Table 3. Maximum backlight and glare ratings MLO lighting zone Luminaire mounting LZ0 LZ1 LZ2 LZ3 LZ4 Allowed backlight ratings > 2 mounting heights from lighting boundary B1 B3 B4 B5 B5 1 to 2 mounting heights from lighting boundary and properly oriented B1 B2 B3 B4 B4 0.5 to 1 mounting height to lighting boundary and properly oriented B0 B1 B2 B3 B3 < 0.5 mounting height to lighting boundary and properly oriented B0 B0 B0 B1 B2 Allowed glare ratings Building-mounted > 2 mounting heights from any lighting boundary G0 G1 G2 G3 G4
  • 98. 43 Updated to reflect the April 14, 2017 LEED v4 Building Design and Construction Addenda Building-mounted 1–2 mounting heights from any lighting boundary G0 G0 G1 G1 G2 Building-mounted 0.5 to 1 mounting heights from any lighting boundary G0 G0 G0 G1 G1 Building-mounted < 0.5 mounting heights from any lighting boundary G0 G0 G0 G0 G1 All other luminaires G0 G1 G2 G3 G4 The lighting boundary is located at the property lines of the property, or properties, that the LEED project occupies. The lighting boundary can be modified under the following conditions: is not limited to, a walkway,
  • 99. bikeway, plaza, or parking lot, the lighting boundary may be moved to 5 feet (1.5 meters) beyond the property line. corridor, the lighting boundary may be moved to the center line of that street, alley, or corridor. re are additional properties owned by the same entity that are contiguous to the property, or properties, that the LEED project is within and have the same or higher MLO lighting zone designation as the LEED project, the lighting boundary may be expanded to include those properties. Orient all luminaires less than two mounting heights from the lighting boundary such that the backlight points toward the nearest lighting boundary line. Building- mounted luminaires with the backlight oriented toward the building are exempt from the backlight rating requirement. OR Option 2. Calculation Method Do not exceed the following vertical illuminances at the lighting boundary (use the definition of lighting boundary in Option 1). Calculation points may be no more than 5 feet (1.5 meters) apart. Vertical illuminances must be calculated on vertical planes running parallel to the lighting boundary, with the normal to each plane oriented toward the property and
  • 100. perpendicular to the lighting boundary, extending from grade level to 33 feet (10 meters) above the height of the highest luminaire. Table 4. Maximum vertical illuminance at lighting boundary, by lighting zone MLO lighting zone Vertical illuminance LZ0 0.05 fc (0.5 lux) LZ1 0.05 fc (0.5 lux) LZ2 0.10 fc (1 lux) LZ3 0.20 fc (2 lux) LZ4 0.60 fc (6 lux) FC = footcandle. AND Internally Illuminated Exterior Signage Do not exceed a luminance of 200 cd/m2 (nits) during nighttime hours and 2000 cd/m2 (nits) during daytime hours. 44 Updated to reflect the April 14, 2017 LEED v4 Building Design
  • 101. and Construction Addenda Exemptions from Uplight and Light Trespass Requirements The following exterior lighting is exempt from the requirements, provided it is controlled separately from the nonexempt lighting: transportation; in MLO lighting zones 3 and 4, and is automatically turned off from midnight until 6 a.m.; performances; -mandated roadway lighting; helipads; ones 2, 3, or 4; and 45 Updated to reflect the April 14, 2017 LEED v4 Building Design and Construction Addenda
  • 102. SS CREDIT: SITE MASTER PLAN BD&C 1 point This credit applies to Intent To ensure that the sustainable site benefits achieved by the project continue, regardless of future changes in programs or demographics. Requirements SCHOOLS The project must achieve at least four of the following six credits, using the associated calculation methods. The achieved credits must then be recalculated using the data from the master plan. —Protect or Restore Habitat ment
  • 103. A site master plan for the school must be developed in collaboration with school authorities. Previous sustainable site design measures should be considered in all master-planning efforts so that existing infrastructure is retained whenever possible. The master plan must therefore include current construction activity plus future construction (within the building’s lifespan) that affects the site. The master plan development footprint must also include parking, paving, and utilities. Projects where no future development is planned are not eligible for this credit. 46 Updated to reflect the April 14, 2017 LEED v4 Building Design and Construction Addenda SS CREDIT: TENANT DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION GUIDELINES BD&C 1 point This credit applies to Intent To educate tenants in implementing sustainable design and construction features in their tenant
  • 104. improvement build-outs. Requirements CS Publish for tenants an illustrated document with the following content, as applicable: features incorporated in the core and shell project and the project’s sustainability goals and objectives, including those for tenant spaces; strategies, products, materials, and services; and and construction with the building systems when pursuing the following LEED v4 for Interior Design and Construction prerequisites and credits: o WE Prerequisite: Indoor Water Use Reduction o WE Credit: Indoor Water Use Reduction o EA Prerequisite: Minimum Energy Performance o EA Prerequisite: Fundamental Refrigerant Management o EA Credit: Optimize Energy Performance o EA Credits: Advanced Energy Metering o EA Credit: Renewable Energy Production o EA Credit: Enhanced Refrigerant Management o MR Prerequisite: Storage and Collection of Recyclables o EQ Prerequisite: Minimum Indoor Air Quality Performance
  • 105. o EQ Prerequisite: Environmental Tobacco Smoke Control o EQ Credit: Enhanced Indoor Air Quality Strategies o EQ Credit: Low-Emitting Materials o EQ Credit: Construction Indoor Air Quality Management Plan o EQ Credit: Indoor Air Quality Assessment o EQ Credit: Thermal Comfort o EQ Credit: Interior Lighting o EQ Credit: Daylight o EQ Credit: Quality Views o EQ Credit: Acoustic Performance Provide the guidelines to all tenants before signing the lease. 47 Updated to reflect the April 14, 2017 LEED v4 Building Design and Construction Addenda SS CREDIT: PLACES OF RESPITE BD&C 1 point This credit applies to Intent To provide patients, staff, and visitors with the health benefits of the natural environment by creating outdoor places of respite on the healthcare campus. Requirements
  • 106. HEALTHCARE Provide places of respite that are accessible to patients and visitors, equal to 5% of the net usable program area of the building. Provide additional dedicated places of respite for staff, equal to 2% of the net usable program area of the building. Places of respite must be outdoors, or be located in interior atria, greenhouses, solaria, or conditioned spaces; such interior spaces may be used to meet up to 30% of the required area if 90% of each qualifying space’s gross floor area achieves a direct line of sight to unobstructed views of nature. All areas must meet the following requirements. within 200 feet (60 meters) of a building entrance or access point. medical care is delivered. r indirect sun are provided, with at least one seating space per 200 square feet (18.5 square meters) of each respite area, with one wheelchair space per five seating spaces.. -use gardens unavailable to all building occupants may account for no more than 50% of the required area.
  • 107. -access natural trails that are available to visitors, staff, or patients may account for no more than 30% of the required area, provided the trailhead is within 200 feet (60 meters) of a building entrance. Additionally, outdoor areas must meet the following requirements. vegetated at the ground plane (not including turf grass) or have overhead vegetated canopy. elements. Construction of Health Care Facilities (Section 1.2-6.3 and Appendix A1.2-6.3:Wayfinding). of respite may not be within 25 feet (7.6 meters) of a smoking area (see EQ Prerequisite Environmental Tobacco Smoke Control). Existing places of respite on the hospital campus may qualify if they otherwise meet the credit requirements. 48 Updated to reflect the April 14, 2017 LEED v4 Building Design and Construction Addenda
  • 108. SS CREDIT: DIRECT EXTERIOR ACCESS BD&C 1 point This credit applies to Intent To provide patients and staff with the health benefits associated with direct access to the natural environment. Requirements HEALTHCARE Provide direct access to an exterior courtyard, terrace, garden, or balcony. The space must be at least 5 square feet (0.5 square meters) per patient for 75% of all inpatients and 75% of qualifying outpatients whose clinical length of stay (LOS) exceeds four hours. Patients whose length of stay exceeds four hours, and whose treatment makes them unable to move, such as emergency, stage 1 surgical recovery, and critical care patients, may be excluded. Places of respite outside the building envelope that meet the requirements of SS Credit Places of Respite that are immediately adjacent to clinical areas or with direct access from inpatient units may be included. Qualifying spaces must be designated as nonsmoking The spaces must also meet the requirements for
  • 109. outdoor air contaminant concentrations enumerated in EQ Credit Enhanced Indoor Air Quality Strategies, Option 2 and be located more than 100 feet (30 meters) from building exhaust air locations, loading docks, and roadways with idling vehicles. 49 Updated to reflect the April 14, 2017 LEED v4 Building Design and Construction Addenda SS CREDIT: JOINT USE OF FACILITIES BD&C 1 point This credit applies to Intent To integrate the school with the community by sharing the building and its playing fields for nonschool events and functions. Requirements SCHOOLS Option 1. Make Building Space Open to the General Public (1 point) In collaboration with the school authorities, ensure that at least
  • 110. three of the following types of spaces in the school are accessible to and available for shared use by the general public: classrooms; Provide access to toilets in joint-use areas after normal school hours. OR Option 2. Contract with Specific Organizations to Share Building Space (1 point) In collaboration with the school authorities, contract with community or other organizations to provide at least two types of dedicated-use spaces in the building, such as the following: state or local offices);
  • 111. Provide access to toilets in joint-use areas after normal school hours. OR Option 3. Use Shared Space Owned by Other Organizations (1 point) In collaboration with the school authorities, ensure that at least two of the following six types of spaces that are owned by other organizations or agencies are accessible to students: eteria; 50
  • 112. Updated to reflect the April 14, 2017 LEED v4 Building Design and Construction Addenda Provide direct pedestrian access to these spaces from the school. In addition, provide signed joint-use agreements with the other organizations or agencies that stipulate how these spaces will be shared. 51 Updated to reflect the April 14, 2017 LEED v4 Building Design and Construction Addenda WATER EFFICIENCY (WE) WE PREREQUISITE: OUTDOOR WATER USE REDUCTION Required BD&C This prerequisite applies to
  • 113. Intent To reduce outdoor water consumption. Requirements NC, CS, SCHOOLS, RETAIL, DATA CENTERS, WAREHOUSES & DISTRIBUTION CENTERS, HOSPITALITY, HEALTHCARE Reduce outdoor water use through one of the following options. Nonvegetated surfaces, such as permeable or impermeable pavement, should be excluded from the landscape area calculations. Athletic fields and playgrounds (if vegetated) and food gardens may be included or excluded at the project team’s discretion. Option 1. No Irrigation Required Show that the landscape does not require a permanent irrigation system beyond a maximum two-year establishment period.
  • 114. OR Option 2. Reduced Irrigation Reduce the project’s landscape water requirement by at least 30% from the calculated baseline for the site’s peak watering month. Reductions must be achieved through plant species selection and irrigation system efficiency, as calculated by the Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) WaterSense Water Budget Tool. 52 Updated to reflect the April 14, 2017 LEED v4 Building Design and Construction Addenda WE PREREQUISITE: INDOOR WATER USE REDUCTION Required BD&C This prerequisite applies to
  • 115. nters Intent To reduce indoor water consumption. Requirements NC, CS, SCHOOLS, NC-RETAIL, DATA CENTERS, WAREHOUSES & DISTRIBUTION CENTERS, NC- HOSPITALITY, HEALTHCARE Building Water Use For the fixtures and fittings listed in Table 1, as applicable to the project scope, reduce aggregate water consumption by 20% from the baseline. Base calculations on the volumes and flow rates shown in Table 1. All newly installed toilets, urinals, private lavatory faucets, and showerheads that are eligible for labeling must be WaterSense labeled (or a local equivalent for projects outside the U.S.).
  • 116. Table 1. Baseline water consumption of fixtures and fittings Fixture or fitting Baseline (IP units) Baseline (SI units) Toilet (water closet)* 1.6 gpf 6 lpf Urinal* 1.0 gpf 3.8 lpf Public lavatory (restroom) faucet 0.5 gpm at 60 psi** all others except private applications 1.9 lpm at 415 kPa, all others except private applications Private lavatory faucets 2.2 gpm at 60 psi 8.3 lpm at 415 kPa Kitchen faucet (excluding faucets used exclusively for filling operations) 2.2 gpm at 60 psi 8.3 lpm at 415 kPa Showerhead* 2.5 gpm at 80 psi per shower stall 9.5 lpm at 550 kPa per shower stall
  • 117. 53 Updated to reflect the April 14, 2017 LEED v4 Building Design and Construction Addenda * WaterSense label available for this product type gpf = gallons per flush gpm = gallons per minute psi = pounds per square inch lpf = liters per flush lpm = liters per minute kPa = kilopascals Appliance and Process Water Use Install appliances, equipment, and processes within the project scope that meet the requirements listed in the tables below. Table 2. Standards for appliances Appliance Requirement Residential clothes washers ENERGY STAR or performance equivalent Commercial clothes washers CEE Tier 3A Residential dishwashers (standard and compact) ENERGY STAR or performance equivalent Prerinse spray valves ≤ 1.3 gpm (4.9 lpm)
  • 118. Ice machine ENERGY STAR or performance equivalent and use either air-cooled or closed-loop cooling, such as chilled or condenser water system gpm = gallons per minute lpm = liters per minute Table 3. Standards for processes Process Requirement Heat rejection and cooling No once-through cooling with potable water for any equipment or appliances that reject heat Cooling towers and evaporative condensers Equip with ity controllers and overflow alarms maximum of 0.002% of recirculated water volume for counterflow towers and 0.005% of recirculated water flow for cross-flow towers Healthcare, Retail, Schools, and Hospitality Only In addition, water-consuming appliances, equipment, and processes must meet the requirements listed in Tables 4 and 5.
  • 119. 54 Updated to reflect the April 14, 2017 LEED v4 Building Design and Construction Addenda Table 4. Standards for appliances Kitchen equipment Requirement (IP units) Requirement (SI units) Dishwasher Undercounter ≤ 1.6 gal/rack ≤ 6.0 liters/rack Stationary, single tank, door ≤ 1.4 gal/rack ≤ 5.3 liters/rack Single tank, conveyor ≤ 1.0 gal/rack ≤ 3.8 liters/rack Multiple tank, conveyor ≤ 0.9 gal/rack ≤ 3.4 liters/rack Flight machine ≤ 180 gal/hour ≤ 680 liters/hour
  • 120. Food steamer Batch ≤ 6 gal/hour/pan ≤ 23 liters/hour/pan Cook-to-order ≤ 10 gal/hour/pan ≤ 38 liters/hour/pan Combination oven, Countertop or stand ≤ 3.5 gal/hour/pan ≤ 13 liters/hour/pan Roll-in ≤ 3.5 gal/hour/pan ≤ 13 liters/hour/pan Table 5. Process requirements Discharge water temperature tempering Where local requirements limit discharge temperature of fluids into drainage system, use tempering device that runs water only when equipment discharges hot water OR Provide thermal recovery heat exchanger that cools drained discharge water below code-required maximum discharge temperatures while simultaneously preheating inlet makeup water OR If fluid is steam condensate, return it to boiler
  • 121. Venturi-type flow-through vacuum generators or aspirators Use no device that generates vacuum by means of water flow through device into drain 55 Updated to reflect the April 14, 2017 LEED v4 Building Design and Construction Addenda WE PREREQUISITE: BUILDING-LEVEL WATER METERING Required BD&C This prerequisite applies to
  • 122. Intent To support water management and identify opportunities for additional water savings by tracking water consumption. Requirements NC, CS, SCHOOLS, RETAIL, DATA CENTERS, WAREHOUSES & DISTRIBUTION CENTERS, HOSPITALITY, HEALTHCARE Install permanent water meters that measure the total potable water use for the building and associated grounds. Meter data must be compiled into monthly and annual summaries; meter readings can be manual or automated. Commit to sharing with USGBC the resulting whole-project water usage data for a five-year period beginning on the date the project accepts LEED certification or typical occupancy, whichever comes first. This commitment must carry forward for five years or until the building changes ownership or lessee.
  • 123. 56 Updated to reflect the April 14, 2017 LEED v4 Building Design and Construction Addenda WE CREDIT: OUTDOOR WATER USE REDUCTION BD&C 1–2 points This credit applies to –2 points) –2 points) –2 points) –2 points) –2 points) –2 points) 1–2 points) Intent To reduce outdoor water consumption. Requirements NC, CS, SCHOOLS, RETAIL, DATA CENTERS,
  • 124. WAREHOUSES & DISTRIBUTION CENTERS, HOSPITALITY, HEALTHCARE Reduce outdoor water use through one of the following options. Nonvegetated surfaces, such as permeable or impermeable pavement, should be excluded from landscape area calculations. Athletic fields and playgrounds (if vegetated) and food gardens may be included or excluded at the project team’s discretion. Option 1. No Irrigation Required (2 points except Healthcare, 1 point Healthcare) Show that the landscape does not require a permanent irrigation system beyond a maximum two-year establishment period. OR Option 2. Reduced Irrigation (1-2 points except Healthcare, 1 point Healthcare) Reduce the project’s landscape water requirement (LWR) by at least 50% from the calculated baseline for the site’s peak watering month. Reductions must first be achieved through plant species selection and irrigation system efficiency as calculated in the Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) WaterSense Water Budget Tool. Additional reductions beyond 30% may be achieved using any combination of efficiency, alternative water
  • 125. sources, and smart scheduling technologies. Table 1. Points for reducing irrigation water Percentage reduction from baseline Points (except Healthcare) Points (Healthcare) 50% 1 1 100% 2 — 57 Updated to reflect the April 14, 2017 LEED v4 Building Design and Construction Addenda WE CREDIT: INDOOR WATER USE REDUCTION BD&C 1–7 points This credit applies to –6 points) –6 points) –7 points)
  • 126. –7 points) –6 points) –6 points) –6 points) –7 points) Intent To reduce indoor water consumption. Requirements NC, CS, SCHOOLS, NC-RETAIL, DATA CENTERS, WAREHOUSES & DISTRIBUTION CENTERS, NC- HOSPITALITY, HEALTHCARE Further reduce fixture and fitting water use from the calculated baseline in WE Prerequisite Indoor Water Use Reduction. Additional potable water savings can be earned above the prerequisite level using alternative water sources. Include fixtures and fittings necessary to meet the needs of the occupants. Some of these fittings and fixtures may be outside the tenant space (for Commercial Interiors) or project boundary (for New Construction). Points are awarded according to Table 1. Table 1. Points for reducing water use
  • 127. Percentage reduction Points (BD&C) Points (Schools, Retail, Hospitality, Healthcare) 25% 1 1 30% 2 2 35% 3 3 40% 4 4 45% 5 5 50% 6 -- Schools, Retail, Hospitality, and Healthcare only Meet the percentage reduction requirements above. AND
  • 128. 58 Updated to reflect the April 14, 2017 LEED v4 Building Design and Construction Addenda Appliance and Process Water. Install equipment within the project scope that meets the minimum requirements in Table 2, 3, 4, or 5 . One point is awarded for meeting all applicable requirements in any one table. All applicable equipment listed in each table must meet the standard. Schools, Retail, and Healthcare projects can earn a second point for meeting the requirements of two tables. Table 2. Compliant commercial washing machines To use Table 2, the project must process at least 120,000 lbs (57 606 kg) of laundry per year. Washing machine Requirement (IP units) Requirement (SI units) On-premise, minimum capacity 2,400 lbs (1 088 kg) per 8-hour shift Maximum 1.8 gals per pound * Maximum 7 liters per 0.45 kilograms * * Based on equal quantities of heavy, medium, and light soil
  • 129. laundry. Table 3. Standards for commercial kitchen equipment To use Table 3, the project must serve at least 100 meals per day of operation. All process and appliance equipment listed in the category of kitchen equipment and present on the project must comply with the standards. Kitchen equipment Requirement (IP units) Requirement (SI units) Dishwasher Undercounter ENERGY STAR ENERGY STAR or performance equivalent Stationary, single tank, door ENERGY STAR ENERGY STAR or performance equivalent Single tank, conveyor
  • 130. ENERGY STAR ENERGY STAR or performance equivalent Multiple tank, conveyor ENERGY STAR ENERGY STAR or performance equivalent Flight machine ENERGY STAR ENERGY STAR or performance equivalent Food steamer Batch (no drain connection) ≤ 2 gal/hour/pan including condensate cooling water ≤ 7.5 liters/hour/pan including condensate cooling water Cook-to-order (with drain connection) ≤ 5 gal/hour/pan including condensate cooling water ≤ 19 liters/hour/pan including condensate cooling water Combination oven,
  • 131. Countertop or stand ≤ 1.5 gal/hour/panincluding condensate cooling water ≤ 5.7 liters/hour/pan including condensate cooling water 59 Updated to reflect the April 14, 2017 LEED v4 Building Design and Construction Addenda Roll-in ≤ 1.5 gal/hour/pan including condensate cooling water ≤ 5.7 liters/hour/pan including condensate cooling water Food waste disposer Disposer 3-8 gpm, full load condition, 10 minute automatic shutoff; or 1 gpm, no-load condition 11–30 lpm, full load condition, 10-min automatic shutoff; or 3.8 lpm, no-load condition Scrap collector
  • 132. Maximum 2 gpm makeup water Maximum 7.6 lpm makeup water Pulper Maximum 2 gpm makeup water Maximum 7.6 lpm makeup water Strainer basket No additional water usage No additional water usage gpm = gallons per minute gph = gallons per hour lpm = liters per minute lph = liters per hour Table 4. Compliant laboratory and medical equipment To use Table 4, the project must be a medical or laboratory facility. Lab equipment Requirement (IP units) Requirement (SI units) Reverse-osmosis water purifier 75% recovery 75% recovery Steam sterilizer For 60-inch sterilizer, 6.3 gal/U.S. tray For 48-inch sterilizer, 7.5 gal/U.S. tray
  • 133. For 1520-mm sterilizer, 28.5 liters/DIN tray For 1220-mm sterilizer, 28.35 liters/DIN tray Sterile process washer 0.35 gal/U.S. tray 1.3 liters/DIN tray X-ray processor, 150 mm or more in any dimension Film processor water recycling unit Digital imager, all sizes No water use Table 5. Compliant municipal steam systems To use Table 5, the project must be connected to a municipal or district steam system that does not allow the return of steam condensate. Steam system Standard Steam condensate disposal Cool municipally supplied steam condensate (no return) to drainage system with heat recovery system or reclaimed water OR Reclaim and use steam condensate 100% recovery and reuse
  • 134. 60 Updated to reflect the April 14, 2017 LEED v4 Building Design and Construction Addenda WE CREDIT: COOLING TOWER WATER USE BD&C 1–2 points This credit applies to –2 points) –2 points) –2 points) –2 points) –2 points) –2 points) –2 points) –2 points) Intent To conserve water used for cooling tower makeup while controlling microbes, corrosion, and scale in the condenser water system. Requirements
  • 135. NC, CS, SCHOOLS, RETAIL, DATA CENTERS, WAREHOUSES & DISTRIBUTION CENTERS, HOSPITALITY, HEALTHCARE, For cooling towers and evaporative condensers, conduct a one- time potable water analysis, measuring at least the five control parameters listed in Table 1. Table 1. Maximum concentrations for parameters in condenser water Parameter Maximum level Ca (as CaCO3) 1000 ppm Total alkalinity 1000 ppm SiO2 100 ppm Cl- 250 ppm Conductivity 2000 µS/cm ppm = parts per million µS/cm = micro siemens per centimeter Calculate the number of cooling tower cycles by dividing the maximum allowed concentration level of each parameter by the actual concentration level of each parameter found in the potable makeup water. Limit cooling tower cycles to avoid exceeding maximum values for any of these parameters. Table 2. Points for cooling tower cycles
  • 136. Cooling tower cycles Points Maximum number of cycles achieved without exceeding any filtration levels or affecting operation of condenser water system (up to maximum of 10 cycles) 1 61 Updated to reflect the April 14, 2017 LEED v4 Building Design and Construction Addenda Achieve a minimum 10 cycles by increasing the level of treatment in condenser or make-up water OR Meet the minimum number of cycles to earn 1 point and use a minimum 20% recycled nonpotable water 2 62
  • 137. Updated to reflect the April 14, 2017 LEED v4 Building Design and Construction Addenda WE CREDIT: WATER METERING BD&C 1 point This credit applies to thcare (1 point) Intent To support water management and identify opportunities for additional water savings by tracking water consumption. Requirements NC, CS, SCHOOLS, RETAIL, DATA CENTERS, WAREHOUSES & DISTRIBUTION CENTERS, HOSPITALITY,
  • 138. HEALTHCARE Install permanent water meters for two or more of the following water subsystems, as applicable to the project: irrigated landscaped area. Calculate the percentage of irrigated landscape area served as the total metered irrigated landscape area divided by the total irrigated landscape area. Landscape areas fully covered with xeriscaping or native vegetation that requires no routine irrigation may be excluded from the calculation. serving at least 80% of the indoor fixtures and fitting described in WE Prerequisite Indoor Water Use Reduction, either directly or by deducting all other measured water use from the measured total water consumption of the building and grounds. installed domestic hot water heating capacity (including both tanks and on-demand heaters). d annual water use of 100,000 gallons (378 500 liters) or more, or boiler of more than 500,000 BtuH (150 kW). A single makeup
  • 139. meter may record flows for multiple boilers. A reclaimed water system with a makeup water connection must also be metered so that the true reclaimed water component can be determined. water consumption for process end uses, such as humidification systems, dishwashers, clothes washers, pools, and other subsystems using process water. Healthcare Projects only In addition to the requirements above, install water meters in any five of the following: -osmosis, de-ionized); 63 Updated to reflect the April 14, 2017 LEED v4 Building Design and Construction Addenda
  • 140. and processing department; areas; -looped hydronic system makeup water; and -water makeup for domestic hot water systems. 64 Updated to reflect the April 14, 2017 LEED v4 Building Design and Construction Addenda ENERGY AND ATMOSPHERE EA PREREQUISITE: FUNDAMENTAL COMMISSIONING AND VERIFICATION Required BD&C This prerequisite applies to
  • 141. Intent To support the design, construction, and eventual operation of a project that meets the owner’s project requirements for energy, water, indoor environmental quality, and durability. Requirements NC, CS, SCHOOLS, RETAIL, DATA CENTERS, WAREHOUSES & DISTRIBUTION CENTERS, HOSPITALITY, HEALTHCARE Commissioning Process Scope Complete the following commissioning (Cx) process activities for mechanical, electrical, plumbing, and renewable energy systems and assemblies, in accordance with ASHRAE Guideline 0-2005 and ASHRAE Guideline 1.1–2007 for HVAC&R Systems, as they relate to energy, water, indoor environmental quality, and durability.
  • 142. Requirements for exterior enclosures are limited to inclusion in the owner’s project requirements (OPR) and basis of design (BOD), as well as the review of the OPR, BOD and project design. NIBS Guideline 3- 2012 for Exterior Enclosures provides additional guidance. The commissioning authority (CxA) must do the following: to the construction documents. process. nt all findings and recommendations and report directly to the owner throughout the process.
  • 143. The review of the exterior enclosure design may be performed by a qualified member of the design or 65 Updated to reflect the April 14, 2017 LEED v4 Building Design and Construction Addenda construction team (or an employee of that firm) who is not directly responsible for design of the building envelope. Commissioning Authority By the end of the design development phase, engage a commissioning authority with the following qualifications. experience on at least two building projects with a similar scope of work. The experience must extend from early design phase through at least 10 months of occupancy; independent consultant, or an employee of the design or construction firm who is not part of the project’s design or construction team, or a disinterested subcontractor of the design or construction team. o For projects smaller than 20,000 square feet (1 860 square meters), the CxA may be a qualified member of the design or construction team. In all cases, the CxA must report his or her findings directly to the owner.
  • 144. Project teams that intend to pursue EA Credit Enhanced Commissioning should note a difference in the CxA qualifications: for the credit, the CxA may not be an employee of the design or construction firm nor a subcontractor to the construction firm. Current Facilities Requirements and Operations and Maintenance Plan Prepare and maintain a current facilities requirements and operations and maintenance plan that contains the information necessary to operate the building efficiently. The plan must include the following: -time schedules; any changes in schedules or setpoints for different seasons, days of the week, and times of day; systems and equipment; described in the systems narrative; and
  • 145. commissioning requirements, ongoing commissioning tasks, and continuous tasks for critical facilities. Data Centers only For small projects with computer room peak cooling loads less than 2,000,000 Btu/h (600 kW) or a total computer room peak cooling load less than 600,000 Btu/h (175 kW), the CxA may be a qualified employee of the design or construction team. 66 Updated to reflect the April 14, 2017 LEED v4 Building Design and Construction Addenda EA PREREQUISITE: MINIMUM ENERGY PERFORMANCE Required BD&C This prerequisite applies to
  • 146. itality Intent To reduce the environmental and economic harms of excessive energy use by achieving a minimum level of energy efficiency for the building and its systems. Requirements NC, CS, SCHOOLS, RETAIL, WAREHOUSES & DISTRIBUTION CENTERS, HOSPITALITY, HEALTHCARE Option 1. Whole-Building Energy Simulation Demonstrate an improvement of 5% for new construction, 3% for major renovations, or 2% for core and shell projects in the proposed building performance rating compared with the baseline building performance rating. Calculate the baseline building performance according to ANSI/ASHRAE/IESNA Standard 90.1–2010, Appendix G, with errata (or a USGBC- approved equivalent standard for projects outside the U.S.), using a simulation model. Projects must meet the minimum percentage savings before taking credit for renewable energy systems. The proposed design must meet the following criteria:
  • 147. ANSI/ASHRAE/IESNA Standard 90.1–2010, with errata (or a USGBC-approved equivalent standard for projects outside the U.S.); associated with the building project; and Standard 90.1–2010, Appendix G, with errata (or a USGBC-approved equivalent standard for projects outside the U.S.). Document the energy modeling input assumptions for unregulated loads. Unregulated loads should be modeled accurately to reflect the actual expected energy consumption of the building. If unregulated loads are not identical for both the baseline and the proposed building performance rating, and the simulation program cannot accurately model the savings, follow the exceptional calculation method (ANSI/ASHRAE/IESNA Standard 90.1–2010, G2.5). Alternatively, use the COMNET Modeling Guidelines and Procedures to document measures that reduce unregulated loads. Retail only For Option 1, Whole-Building Energy Simulation, process loads for retail may include refrigeration equipment, cooking and food preparation, clothes washing, and other major support appliances. Many of
  • 148. the industry standard baseline conditions for commercial kitchen equipment and refrigeration are defined 67 Updated to reflect the April 14, 2017 LEED v4 Building Design and Construction Addenda in Appendix 3, Tables 1–4. No additional documentation is necessary to substantiate these predefined baseline systems as industry standard. OR Option 2. Prescriptive Compliance: ASHRAE 50% Advanced Energy Design Guide Comply with the mandatory and prescriptive provisions of ANSI/ASHRAE/IESNA Standard 90.1–2010, with errata (or a USGBC-approved equivalent standard for projects outside the U.S.). Comply with the HVAC and service water heating requirements, including equipment efficiency, economizers, ventilation, and ducts and dampers, in Chapter 4, Design Strategies and Recommendations by Climate Zone, for the appropriate ASHRAE 50% Advanced Energy Design Guide and climate zone: Medium Office Buildings, for office buildings smaller than 100,000 square feet (9 290 square meters);
  • 149. Large Box Retail Buildings, for retail buildings with 20,000 to 100,000 square feet (1 860 to 9 290 square meters); –12 School Buildings; or Hospitals, for hospitals over 100,000 square feet (9 290 square meters). For projects outside the U.S., consult ASHRAE/ASHRAE/IESNA Standard 90.1–2010, Appendixes B and D, to determine the appropriate climate zone. OPTION 3. Prescriptive Compliance: Advanced Buildings™ Core Performance™ Guide Comply with the mandatory and prescriptive provisions of ANSI/ASHRAE/IESNA Standard 90.1-2010, with errata (or USGBC approved equivalent standard for projects outside the U.S.). Comply with Section 1: Design Process Strategies, Section 2: Core Performance Requirements, and the following three strategies from Section 3: Enhanced Performance Strategies, as applicable. Where standards conflict, follow the more stringent of the two. For projects outside the U.S., consult ANSI/ASHRAE/IESNA Standard 90.1-2010, Appendixes B and D, to determine the appropriate climate zone.
  • 150. 3.5 Supply Air Temperature Reset (VAV) 3.9 Premium Economizer Performance 3.10 Variable Speed Control To be eligible for Option 3, the project must be less than 100,000 square feet (9 290 square meters). Note: Healthcare, warehouse or laboratory projects are ineligible for Option 3. DATA CENTERS Whole-Building Energy Simulation Demonstrate a 5% improvement in the proposed performance rating over the baseline performance rating. To determine total energy cost savings, create two models, one for building energy cost and the other for IT equipment energy cost. Calculate the baseline building performance according to ANSI/ASHRAE/IESNA Standard 90.1–2010, Appendix G, with errata (or a USGBC-approved equivalent standard for projects outside the U.S.), using a simulation model for the whole building and data center modeling guidelines. Determine the power utilization effectiveness (PUE) value of the proposed design. 68 Updated to reflect the April 14, 2017 LEED v4 Building Design and Construction Addenda
  • 151. For this prerequisite, a minimum of 2% of the 5% energy savings must come from building power and cooling infrastructure. Projects must meet the minimum percentage savings before taking credit for renewable energy systems. The proposed design must meet the following criteria: ANSI/ASHRAE/IESNA Standard 90.1–2010, with errata (or a USGBC-approved equivalent standard for projects outside the U.S.); associated with the building project; and ANSI/ASHRAE/IESNA Standard 90.1–2010, Appendix G, with errata (or a USGBC-approved equivalent standard for projects outside the U.S.), and data center modeling guidelines. For data centers, regulated energy includes cooling units for computer and data processing rooms, critical power conditioning equipment, critical distribution equipment, heat rejection plants, and mechanical and electrical support rooms. Include in process loads both the unregulated load and the IT equipment load. The IT load comprises
  • 152. critical systems and electrical power transformation, which may include servers, storage and networking power use, and operations affecting monthly server CPU utilization percentages. Develop two sets of IT load models using two scenarios, one at the maximum estimated IT load rating and the second at the startup IT rating expected at the time of commissioning. Document the energy modeling input assumptions for unregulated loads. Unregulated loads should be modeled accurately to reflect the actual expected energy consumption of the building. If unregulated loads are not identical for both the baseline and the proposed building performance rating, and the simulation model cannot accurately model the savings, follow the exceptional calculation method (ANSI/ASHRAE/IESNA Standard 90.1–2010, G2.5) to document measures that reduce unregulated loads. 69 Updated to reflect the April 14, 2017 LEED v4 Building Design and Construction Addenda EA PREREQUISITE: BUILDING-LEVEL ENERGY METERING Required BD&C
  • 153. This prerequisite applies to Intent To support energy management and identify opportunities for additional energy savings by tracking building-level energy use. Requirements NC, SCHOOLS, RETAIL, DATA CENTERS, WAREHOUSES & DISTRIBUTION CENTERS, HOSPITALITY, HEALTHCARE Install new or use existing building-level energy meters, or submeters that can be aggregated to provide building-level data representing total building energy consumption (electricity, natural gas, chilled water, steam, fuel oil, propane, biomass, etc). Utility-owned meters capable of aggregating building-level
  • 154. resource use are acceptable. Commit to sharing with USGBC the resulting energy consumption data and electrical demand data (if metered) for a five-year period beginning on the date the project accepts LEED certification. At a minimum, energy consumption must be tracked at one-month intervals. This commitment must carry forward for five years or until the building changes ownership or lessee. CS Install new or use existing base building-level energy meters, or submeters that can be aggregated to provide base building-level data representing total building energy consumption (electricity, natural gas, chilled water, steam, fuel oil, propane, etc.). Utility-owned meters capable of aggregating base building- level resource use are acceptable. Commit to sharing with USGBC the resulting energy consumption data and electrical demand data (if metered) for a five-year period beginning on the date the project accepts LEED certification or typical occupancy, whichever comes first. At a minimum, energy consumption must be tracked at one-month intervals. This commitment must carry forward for five years or until the building changes ownership or lessee.
  • 155. 70 Updated to reflect the April 14, 2017 LEED v4 Building Design and Construction Addenda EA PREREQUISITE: FUNDAMENTAL REFRIGERANT MANAGEMENT Required BD&C This prerequisite applies to Intent To reduce stratospheric ozone depletion.
  • 156. Requirements NC, CS, SCHOOLS, RETAIL, DATA CENTERS, WAREHOUSES & DISTRIBUTION CENTERS, HOSPITALITY, HEALTHCARE Do not use chlorofluorocarbon (CFC)-based refrigerants in new heating, ventilating, air-conditioning, and refrigeration (HVAC&R) systems. When reusing existing HVAC&R equipment, complete a comprehensive CFC phase-out conversion before project completion. Phase-out plans extending beyond the project completion date will be considered on their merits. Existing small HVAC&R units (defined as containing less than 0.5 pound [225 grams] of refrigerant) and other equipment, such as standard refrigerators, small water coolers, and any other equipment that contains less than 0.5 pound (225 grams) of refrigerant, are exempt. 71 Updated to reflect the April 14, 2017 LEED v4 Building Design and Construction Addenda EA CREDIT: ENHANCED COMMISSIONING BD&C 2-6 points
  • 157. This credit applies to -6 points) -6 points) -6 points) -6 points) -6 points) -6 points) -6 points) -6 points) Intent To further support the design, construction, and eventual operation of a project that meets the owner’s project requirements for energy, water, indoor environmental quality, and durability. Requirements NC, CS, SCHOOLS, RETAIL, DATA CENTERS, WAREHOUSES & DISTRIBUTION CENTERS, HOSPITALITY, HEALTHCARE Implement, or have in place a contract to implement, the following commissioning process activities in
  • 158. addition to those required under EA Prerequisite Fundamental Commissioning and Verification. Commissioning Authority experience on at least two building projects with a similar scope of work. The experience must extend from early design phase through at least 10 months of occupancy; mployee of the owner, an independent consultant, or a disinterested subcontractor of the design team. Option 1. Enhanced Systems Commissioning (3-4 points) Path 1: Enhanced Commissioning (3 points) Complete the following commissioning process (CxP) activities for mechanical, electrical, plumbing, and renewable energy systems and assemblies in accordance with ASHRAE Guideline 0–2005 and ASHRAE Guideline 1.1–2007 for HVAC&R systems, as they relate to energy, water, indoor environmental quality, and durability. The commissioning authority must do the following: construction documents.
  • 159. requirements in construction documents. effectiveness. completion. on-going commissioning plan. Include all enhanced commissioning tasks in the OPR and BOD. 72 Updated to reflect the April 14, 2017 LEED v4 Building Design and Construction Addenda OR Path 2: Enhanced and Monitoring-Based Commissioning (4 points) Achieve Path 1. AND Develop monitoring-based procedures and identify points to be measured and evaluated to assess performance of energy- and water-consuming systems.
  • 160. Include the procedures and measurement points in the commissioning plan. Address the following: data access); trend monitoring; es for tracked points and metered values (where appropriate, predictive algorithms may be used to compare ideal values with actual values); between systems, out-of-sequence operation of systems components, and energy and water usage profiles; errors and deficiencies; analyses in the first year of occupancy (at least quarterly). Update the systems manual with any modifications or new settings, and give the reason for any modifications from the original design.
  • 161. AND/OR Option 2. Envelope Commissioning (2 points) Fulfill the requirements in EA Prerequisite Fundamental Commissioning and Verification as they apply to the building’s thermal envelope in addition to mechanical and electrical systems and assemblies. Complete the following commissioning process (CxP) activities for the building’s thermal envelope in accordance with ASHRAE Guideline 0–2005 and the National Institute of Building Sciences (NIBS) Guideline 3–2012, Exterior Enclosure Technical Requirements for the Commissioning Process, as they relate to energy, water, indoor environmental quality, and durability. Commissioning authority must complete the following: construction documents. on of operator and occupant training requirements in construction documents. effectiveness.
  • 162. 0 months after substantial completion. -going commissioning plan. Data Centers only Projects that select Option 1 must complete the following commissioning process. 73 Updated to reflect the April 14, 2017 LEED v4 Building Design and Construction Addenda For small projects with peak cooling loads less than 2,000,000 Btu/h (600 kW), or a total computer room peak cooling load less than 600,000 Btu/h (175 kW), the CxA must perform the following activities: ast one commissioning verification review of the owner’s project requirements, basis of design, and design documents before mid-construction documents development; -check the review comments in all subsequent design submissions; and an additional full verification review at 95% completion of the design documents and basis of design.
  • 163. For projects with peak cooling loads 2,000,000 Btu/h (600 kW) or more, or a total computer room peak cooling load 600,000 Btu/h (175 kW) or more, the CxA must conduct at least three verification reviews of the basis of design: of design development; midconstruction documents; and documents, verifying achievement of the owner’s project requirements and adjudication of previous review comments. 74 Updated to reflect the April 14, 2017 LEED v4 Building Design and Construction Addenda EA CREDIT: OPTIMIZE ENERGY PERFORMANCE BD&C 1–20 points This credit applies to –18 points) –18 points)
  • 164. –16 points) –18 points) –18 points) –18 points) –18 points) –20 points) Intent To achieve increasing levels of energy performance beyond the prerequisite standard to reduce environmental and economic harms associated with excessive energy use. Requirements NC, CS, SCHOOLS, RETAIL, WAREHOUSES & DISTRIBUTION CENTERS, HOSPITALITY, HEALTHCARE Establish an energy performance target no later than the schematic design phase. The target must be established as kBtu per square foot-year (kW per square meter- year) of source energy use. Choose one of the options below. Option 1. Whole-Building Energy Simulation (1–18 points except Schools and Healthcare, 1–16
  • 165. points Schools, 1–20 points Healthcare) Analyze efficiency measures during the design process and account for the results in design decision making. Use energy simulation of efficiency opportunities, past energy simulation analyses for similar buildings, or published data (e.g., Advanced Energy Design Guides) from analyses for similar buildings. Analyze efficiency measures, focusing on load reduction and HVAC-related strategies (passive measures are acceptable) appropriate for the facility. Project potential energy savings and holistic project cost implications related to all affected systems. Project teams pursuing the Integrative Process credit must complete the basic energy analysis for that credit before conducting the energy simulation. Follow the criteria in EA Prerequisite Minimum Energy Performance to demonstrate a percentage improvement in the proposed building performance rating compared with the baseline. Points are awarded according to Table 1. Table 1. Points for percentage improvement in energy performance New Construction Major Renovation
  • 166. Core and Shell Points (except Schools, Healthcare) Points Healthcare Points Schools 6% 4% 3% 1 3 1 75 Updated to reflect the April 14, 2017 LEED v4 Building Design and Construction Addenda 8% 6% 5% 2 4 2 10% 8% 7% 3 5 3 12% 10% 9% 4 6 4 14% 12% 11% 5 7 5 16% 14% 13% 6 8 6 18% 16% 15% 7 9 7 20% 18% 17% 8 10 8
  • 167. 22% 20% 19% 9 11 9 24% 22% 21% 10 12 10 26% 24% 23% 11 13 11 29% 27% 26% 12 14 12 32% 30% 29% 13 15 13 35% 33% 32% 14 16 14 38% 36% 35% 15 17 15 42% 40% 39% 16 18 16 46% 44% 43% 17 19 - 50% 48% 47% 18 20 - Retail only For all process loads, define a clear baseline for comparison with the proposed improvements. The baselines in Appendix 3, Tables 1–4, represent industry standards and may be used without additional documentation. Calculate the baseline and design as follows: covered in Tables 1–4, indicate hourly energy use for proposed and budget equipment, along with estimated daily use hours. Use the total estimated appliance/equipment energy use in the
  • 168. energy simulation model as a plug load. Reduced use time (schedule change) is not a category of energy improvement in this credit. ENERGY STAR ratings and evaluations are a valid basis for performing this calculation. -by-space method of determining allowed lighting power under ANSI/ASHRAE/IESNA Standard 90.1– 2010, with errata (or a USGBC- approved equivalent standard for projects outside the U.S.), to determine the appropriate baseline for both the general building space and the display lighting. -wired refrigeration loads, model the effect of energy performance improvements with a simulation program designed to account for refrigeration equipment. OR Option 2. Prescriptive Compliance: ASHRAE Advanced Energy Design Guide (1–6 points) To be eligible for Option 2, projects must use Option 2 in EA Prerequisite Minimum Energy Performance. Implement and document compliance with the applicable recommendations and standards in Chapter 4, Design Strategies and Recommendations by Climate Zone, for the appropriate ASHRAE 50% Advanced 76
  • 169. Updated to reflect the April 14, 2017 LEED v4 Building Design and Construction Addenda Energy Design Guide and climate zone. For projects outside the U.S., consult ASHRAE/ASHRAE/IESNA Standard 90.1–2010, Appendixes B and D, to determine the appropriate climate zone. ASHRAE 50% Advanced Energy Design Guide for Small to Medium Office Buildings and continuous air barriers (1 point) (1 point) ASHRAE 50% Advanced Energy Design Guide for Medium to Large Box Retail Buildings uilding envelope, opaque: roofs, walls, floors, slabs, doors, and vestibules (1 point) - all orientations (1 point) floor (1 point)
  • 170. l interior lighting for sales floor (1 point) point) ASHRAE 50% Advanced Energy Design Guide for K–12 School Buildings ls, floors, slabs, and doors (1 point) (1 point) controls, and kitchen equipment (1 point) ASHRAE 50% Advanced Energy Design Guide for Large Hospitals vestibules, and continuous air barriers (1 point) : vertical fenestration (1 point)
  • 171. driven) and interior finishes (1 point) kitchen equipment (1 point) Retail only Meet the requirements of Option 2 and comply with the prescriptive measures in Appendix 3, Tables 1–4, for 90% of total energy consumption for all process equipment. DATA CENTERS Whole-Building Energy Simulation Analyze efficiency measures focused on IT load reduction and HVAC-related strategies (air-side economizers, hot aisle–cold aisle, etc.). Project the potential energy savings and cost implications for all affected systems. Follow the criteria in EA Prerequisite Minimum Energy Performance to demonstrate a percentage improvement in the proposed performance rating compared with the baseline. Use energy cost savings from both the building and IT to determine the total percentage reduction.
  • 172. 77 Updated to reflect the April 14, 2017 LEED v4 Building Design and Construction Addenda EA CREDIT: ADVANCED ENERGY METERING BD&C 1 point This credit applies to ata Centers (1 point) Intent To support energy management and identify opportunities for additional energy savings by tracking building-level and system-level energy use. Requirements NC, SCHOOLS, RETAIL, DATA CENTERS, WAREHOUSES & DISTRIBUTION CENTERS, HOSPITALITY, HEALTHCARE
  • 173. Install advanced energy metering for the following: -building energy sources used by the building; and the total annual consumption of the building. The advanced energy metering must have the following characteristics. one hour or less, and transmit data to a remote location. Whole-building electricity meters should record the power factor, if appropriate. network, building automation system, wireless network, or comparable communication infrastructure. least 36 months. t be capable of reporting hourly, daily, monthly, and annual energy use.
  • 174. CS Install meters for future tenant spaces so that tenants will be capable of independently metering energy consumption (electricity, chilled water, etc.) for all systems dedicated to their space. Provide a sufficient number of meters to capture total tenant energy use with a minimum of one meter per energy source per floor. Install advanced energy metering for all base building energy sources used by the building. The advanced energy metering must have the following characteristics. one hour or less, and transmit data to a remote location. Whole-building electricity meters should record the power factor, if appropriate. 78 Updated to reflect the April 14, 2017 LEED v4 Building Design and Construction Addenda building automation system, wireless network, or comparable communication infrastructure.
  • 175. least 36 months. hourly, daily, monthly, and annual energy use. 79 Updated to reflect the April 14, 2017 LEED v4 Building Design and Construction Addenda EA CREDIT: DEMAND RESPONSE BD&C 1–2 points This credit applies to –2 points) Core & Shell (1–2 points) –2 points) –2 points) –2 points) –2 points)
  • 176. –2 points) –2 points) Intent To increase participation in demand response technologies and programs that make energy generation and distribution systems more efficient, increase grid reliability, and reduce greenhouse gas emissions. Requirements NC, CS, SCHOOLS, RETAIL, DATA CENTERS, WAREHOUSES & DISTRIBUTION CENTERS, HOSPITALITY, HEALTHCARE Design building and equipment for participation in demand response programs through load shedding or shifting. On-site electricity generation does not meet the intent of this credit. Case 1. Demand Response Program Available (2 points) complete the following activities. Design a system with the capability for real-time, fully-automated DR based on external initiation by a DR Program Provider. Semi-automated DR may be utilized in practice. -year DR participation amount contractual commitment with a
  • 177. qualified DR program provider, with the intention of multiyear renewal, for at least 10% of the estimated peak electricity demand. Peak demand is determined under EA Prerequisite Minimum Energy Performance. commitment during a Demand Response event. commissioning authority, including participation in at least one full test of the DR plan. Case 2. Demand Response Program Not Available (1 point) Provide infrastructure to take advantage of future demand response programs or dynamic, real-time pricing programs and complete the following activities. ability for the building automation system to accept an external price or control signal. 0% of building estimated peak electricity demand. Peak demand is determined under EA Prerequisite Minimum Energy Performance. commissioning authority, including participation in at least one full test of the DR plan.
  • 178. in future DR programs. 80 Updated to reflect the April 14, 2017 LEED v4 Building Design and Construction Addenda EA CREDIT: RENEWABLE ENERGY PRODUCTION BD&C 1–3 points This credit applies to –3 points) –3 points) –3 points) –3 points) –3 points) –3 points) –3 points) –3 points) Intent
  • 179. To reduce the environmental and economic harms associated with fossil fuel energy by increasing self- supply of renewable energy. Requirements NC, CS, SCHOOLS, RETAIL, DATA CENTERS, WAREHOUSES & DISTRIBUTION CENTERS, HOSPITALITY, HEALTHCARE Use renewable energy systems to offset building energy costs. Calculate the percentage of renewable energy with the following equation: % renewable energy = Equivalent cost of usable energy produced by the renewable energy system Total building annual energy cost Use the building’s annual energy cost, calculated in EA Prerequisite Minimum Energy Performance, if Option 1 was pursued; otherwise use the U.S. Department of Energy’s Commercial Buildings Energy Consumption Survey (CBECS) database to estimate energy use and cost. The use of solar gardens or community renewable energy
  • 180. systems is allowed if both of the following requirements are met. lease agreement for a period of at least 10 years. facility claiming the use. Credit is based on the percentage of ownership or percentage of use assigned in the lease agreement. Points are awarded according to Table 1. 81 Updated to reflect the April 14, 2017 LEED v4 Building Design and Construction Addenda Table 1. Points for renewable energy Percentage renewable energy Points (except CS) Points (CS) 1% 1 1 3% — 2 5% 2 3
  • 181. 10% 3 — 82 Updated to reflect the April 14, 2017 LEED v4 Building Design and Construction Addenda EA CREDIT: ENHANCED REFRIGERANT MANAGEMENT BD&C 1 point This credit applies to l (1 point)
  • 182. Intent To reduce ozone depletion and support early compliance with the Montreal Protocol while minimizing direct contributions to climate change. Requirements NC, CS, SCHOOLS, DATA CENTERS, WAREHOUSES & DISTRIBUTION CENTERS, HOSPITALITY, HEALTHCARE Option 1. No Refrigerants or Low-Impact Refrigerants (1 point) Do not use refrigerants, or use only refrigerants (naturally occurring or synthetic) that have an ozone depletion potential (ODP) of zero and a global warming potential (GWP) of less than 50. OR Option 2. Calculation of Refrigerant Impact (1 point) Select refrigerants that are used in heating, ventilating, air- conditioning, and refrigeration (HVAC&R) equipment to minimize or eliminate the emission of compounds that contribute to ozone depletion and climate change. The combination of all new and existing base building and tenant HVAC&R equipment that serve the project must comply with the following formula: IP units LCGW
  • 183. P + LCOD P x 10 5 ≤ 100 SI units LCGW P + LCOD P x 10 5 ≤ 13 Calculation definitions for LCGWP + LCODP x 105 ≤ 100 (IP units) Calculation definitions for LCGWP + LCODP x 105 ≤ 13 (SI units)
  • 184. LCODP = [ODPr x (Lr x Life +Mr) x Rc]/Life LCODP = [ODPr x (Lr x Life +Mr) x Rc]/Life LCGWP = [GWPr x (Lr x Life +Mr) x Rc]/Life LCGWP = [GWPr x (Lr x Life +Mr) x Rc]/Life LCODP: Lifecycle Ozone Depletion Potential (lb CFC 11/Ton-Year) LCODP: Lifecycle Ozone Depletion Potential (kg CFC 11/(kW/year)) LCGWP: Lifecycle Direct Global Warming Potential LCGWP: Lifecycle Direct Global Warming Potential 83 Updated to reflect the April 14, 2017 LEED v4 Building Design and Construction Addenda (lb CO2/Ton-Year) (kg CO2/kW-year) GWPr: Global Warming Potential of Refrigerant (0 to 12,000 lb CO2/lbr) GWPr: Global Warming Potential of Refrigerant (0 to 12,000 kg CO2/kg r) ODPr: Ozone Depletion Potential of Refrigerant (0 to 0.2 lb CFC 11/lbr)
  • 185. ODPr: Ozone Depletion Potential of Refrigerant (0 to 0.2 kg CFC 11/kg r) Lr: Refrigerant Leakage Rate (2.0%) Lr: Refrigerant Leakage Rate (2.0%) Mr: End-of-life Refrigerant Loss (10%) Mr: End-of-life Refrigerant Loss (10%) Rc: Refrigerant Charge (0.5 to 5.0 lbs of refrigerant per ton of gross AHRI rated cooling capacity) Rc: Refrigerant Charge (0.065 to 0.65 kg of refrigerant per kW of AHRI rated or Eurovent Certified cooling capacity) Life: Equipment Life (10 years; default based on equipment type, unless otherwise demonstrated) Life: Equipment Life (10 years; default based on equipment type, unless otherwise demonstrated) For multiple types of equipment, calculate a weighted average of all base building HVAC&R equipment, using the following formula:
  • 186. IP units SI units [ ∑ ( LCGWP + LCODP x 105 ) x Qunit ] ≤ 100 [ ∑ ( LCGWP + LCODP x 105 ) x Qunit ] ≤ 13 —————————————————— Qtotal —————————————————— Qtotal Calculation definitions for [ ∑ (LCGWP + LCODP x 105) x Qunit ] / Qtotal ≤ 100 (IP units) Calculation definitions for [ ∑ (LCGWP + LCODP x 105) x Qunit ] / Qtotal ≤ 13 (SI units) Qunit = Gross AHRI rated cooling capacity of an individual HVAC or refrigeration unit (Tons)
  • 187. Qunit = Eurovent Certified cooling capacity of an individual HVAC or refrigeration unit (kW) Qtotal = Total gross AHRI rated cooling capacity of all HVAC or refrigeration Qtotal = Total Eurovent Certified cooling capacity of all HVAC or refrigeration (kW) RETAIL NC Meet Option 1 or 2 for all HVAC systems. Stores with commercial refrigeration systems must comply with the following. -ozone-depleting refrigerants. no more than 1.75 pounds of refrigerant per 1,000 Btu/h (2.72 kg of refrigerant per kW) total evaporator cooling load. 84 Updated to reflect the April 14, 2017 LEED v4 Building Design and Construction Addenda -wide annual refrigerant emissions rate of no more than 15%. Conduct leak testing using the procedures in GreenChill’s best
  • 188. practices guideline for leak tightness at installation. Alternatively, stores with commercial refrigeration systems may provide proof of attainment of EPA GreenChill’s silver-level store certification for newly constructed stores. 85 Updated to reflect the April 14, 2017 LEED v4 Building Design and Construction Addenda EA CREDIT: GREEN POWER AND CARBON OFFSETS BD&C 1–2 points This credit applies to –2 points) –2 points) –2 points) –2 points) –2 points) –2 points)
  • 189. –2 points) –2 points) Intent To encourage the reduction of greenhouse gas emissions through the use of grid-source, renewable energy technologies and carbon mitigation projects. Requirements NC, CS, SCHOOLS, RETAIL, DATA CENTERS, WAREHOUSES & DISTRIBUTION CENTERS, HOSPITALITY, HEALTHCARE Engage in a contract for qualified resources that have come online since January 1, 2005, for a minimum of five years, to be delivered at least annually. The contract must specify the provision of at least 50% or 100% of the project’s energy from green power, carbon offsets, or renewable energy certificates (RECs). Green power and RECs must be Green-e Energy certified or the equivalent. RECs can only be used to mitigate the effects of Scope 2, electricity use. Carbon offsets may be used to mitigate Scope 1 or Scope 2 emissions on a metric ton of carbon dioxide– equivalent basis and must be Green-e Climate certified, or the equivalent. For U.S. projects, the offsets must be from greenhouse gas emissions reduction projects within the U.S.
  • 190. Determine the percentage of green power or offsets based on the quantity of energy consumed, not the cost. Points are awarded according to Table 1. Table 1. Points for energy from green power or carbon offsets Percentage of total energy addressed by green power, RECs and/or offsets Points 50% 1 100% 2 Use the project’s annual energy consumption, calculated in EA Prerequisite Minimum Energy Performance, if Option 1 was pursued; otherwise use the U.S. Department of Energy’s Commercial Buildings Energy Consumption Survey (CBECS) database to estimate energy use. CS Only A core and shell building’s energy is defined as the energy usage of the core and shell floor area as defined by the Building Owners and Managers Association (BOMA) standards, but not less than 15% of the project’s floor area. 86 Updated to reflect the April 14, 2017 LEED v4 Building Design and Construction Addenda
  • 191. MATERIALS AND RESOURCES (MR) MR PREREQUISITE: STORAGE AND COLLECTION OF RECYCLABLES Required BD&C This prerequisite applies to ls Intent To reduce the waste that is generated by building occupants and hauled to and disposed of in landfills. Requirements NC, CS, SCHOOLS, DATA CENTERS, WAREHOUSES &
  • 192. DISTRIBUTION CENTERS, HOSPITALITY NC, HEALTHCARE Provide dedicated areas accessible to waste haulers and building occupants for the collection and storage of recyclable materials for the entire building. Collection and storage areas may be separate locations. Recyclable materials must include mixed paper, corrugated cardboard, glass, plastics, and metals. Take appropriate measures for the safe collection, storage, and disposal of two of the following: batteries, mercury-containing lamps, and electronic waste. RETAIL NC Conduct a waste stream study to identify the retail project’s top five recyclable waste streams, by either weight or volume, using consistent metrics. Based on the waste stream study, list the top four waste streams for which collection and storage space will be provided. If no information is available on waste streams for the project, use data from similar operations to make projections. Retailers with existing stores of similar size and function can use historical information from their other locations. Provide dedicated areas accessible to waste haulers and building occupants for the separation, collection, and storage of recyclable materials for at least the top four recyclable waste streams identified by the waste study. Locate the collection and storage bins close the source of recyclable waste. If any of the top four waste streams are batteries, mercury-containing lamps, or electronic waste, take appropriate
  • 193. measures for safe collection, storage, and disposal. 87 Updated to reflect the April 14, 2017 LEED v4 Building Design and Construction Addenda MR PREREQUISITE: CONSTRUCTION AND DEMOLITION WASTE MANAGEMENT PLANNING Required BD&C This prerequisite applies to ruction Intent To reduce construction and demolition waste disposed of in
  • 194. landfills and incineration facilities by recovering, reusing, and recycling materials. Requirements NC, CS, SCHOOLS, RETAIL NC, DATA CENTERS, WAREHOUSES & DISTRIBUTION CENTERS, HOSPITALITY NC, HEALTHCARE Develop and implement a construction and demolition waste management plan: h waste diversion goals for the project by identifying at least five materials (both structural and nonstructural) targeted for diversion. Approximate a percentage of the overall project waste that these materials represent. will be separated or comingled and describe the diversion strategies planned for the project. Describe where the material will be taken and how the recycling facility will process the material. Provide a final report detailing all major waste streams generated, including disposal and diversion rates. Alternative daily cover (ADC) does not qualify as material diverted from disposal. Include materials destined for ADC in the calculations as waste. Land-clearing debris is not considered construction, demolition, or renovation waste that can contribute to waste
  • 195. diversion. 88 Updated to reflect the April 14, 2017 LEED v4 Building Design and Construction Addenda MR PREREQUISITE: PBT SOURCE REDUCTION— MERCURY Required BD&C This prerequisite applies to Intent To reduce mercury-containing products and devices and mercury release through product substitution, capture, and recycling. Requirements HEALTHCARE As part of the project’s recycling collection system, identify the following: -containing products and devices to be collected;
  • 196. program; and Applicable mercury-containing products and devices include, but are not limited to, lamps (such as linear and circular fluorescents, integrally ballasted and nonintegrally ballasted compact fluorescents and HIDs) and dental wastes (such as scrap amalgam, chair side traps, and separator wastes). In facilities delivering dental care, specify and install amalgam separation devices that meet or exceed the ISO-11143 standard. Comply with the mercury elimination requirements outlined below, from the 2010 FGI Guidelines for Design and Construction of Health Care Facilities, Section A1.3- 4b, Mercury Elimination. mercury-containing equipment, including thermostats, switching devices, and other building system sources. Lamps are excluded. to phase out mercury-containing products and upgrade current mercury-containing lamps to high- efficiency, low-mercury, or mercury-free lamp technology. Do not specify or install preheat, T-9, T-10, or T-12
  • 197. fluorescents or mercury vapor high-intensity discharge (HID) lamps in the project. Do not specify probe-start metal halide HID lamps in any interior spaces. Specify and install illuminated exit signs that do not contain mercury and use less than 5 watts of electricity. Fluorescent and high-pressure sodium lamps must meet the criteria in Table 1. Table 1. Maximum mercury content of lamps Lamp Maximum content T-8 fluorescent, eight-foot 10 mg mercury T-8 fluorescent, four-foot 3.5 mg mercury T-8 fluorescent, U-bent 6 mg mercury T-5 fluorescent, linear 2.5 mg mercury T-5 fluorescent, circular 9 mg mercury Compact fluorescent, nonintegral ballast 3.5 mg mercury 89 Updated to reflect the April 14, 2017 LEED v4 Building Design and Construction Addenda Compact fluorescent, integral ballast 3.5 mg mercury, ENERGY
  • 198. STAR qualified High-pressure sodium, up to 400 watts 10 mg mercury High-pressure sodium, above 400 watts 32 mg mercury mg = milligram 90 Updated to reflect the April 14, 2017 LEED v4 Building Design and Construction Addenda MR CREDIT: BUILDING LIFE-CYCLE IMPACT REDUCTION BD&C 2–6 points This credit applies to –5 points) –6 points) –5 points) –5 points) –5 points) –5 points) –5 points)
  • 199. –5 points) Intent To encourage adaptive reuse and optimize the environmental performance of products and materials. Requirements NC, CS, SCHOOLS, RETAIL NC, DATA CENTERS, WAREHOUSES & DISTRIBUTION CENTERS, HOSPITALITY NC, HEALTHCARE Demonstrate reduced environmental effects during initial project decision-making by reusing existing building resources or demonstrating a reduction in materials use through life-cycle assessment. Achieve one of the following options. Option 1. Historic Building Reuse (5 points BD&C, 6 points Core and Shell) Maintain the existing building structure, envelope, and interior nonstructural elements of a historic building or contributing building in a historic district. To qualify, the building or historic district must be listed or eligible for listing in the local, state, or national register of historic places. Do not demolish any part of a historic building or contributing building in a historic district unless it is deemed structurally unsound or hazardous. For buildings listed locally,
  • 200. approval of any demolition must be granted by the local historic preservation review board. For buildings listed in a state register or the U.S. National Register of Historic Places (or local equivalent for projects outside the U.S.), approval must appear in a programmatic agreement with the state historic preservation office or National Park Service (or local equivalent for projects outside the U.S.). Any alteration (preservation, restoration, or rehabilitation) of a historic building or a contributing building in a historic district on the project site must be done in accordance with local or national standards for rehabilitation, whichever are applicable. If building is not subject to historic review, include on the project team a preservation professional who meets U.S. federal qualifications for historic architects (or local equivalent for projects outside the U.S.); the preservation professional must confirm conformance to the Secretary of Interior’s Standards for the Treatment of Historic Properties (or local equivalent for projects outside the U.S.). OR Option 2. Renovation of Abandoned or Blighted Building (5 points BD&C, 6 points Core and Shell) Maintain at least 50%, by surface area, of the existing building structure, enclosure, and interior structural elements for buildings that meet local criteria of abandoned or are considered blight. The building must be renovated to a state of productive occupancy.
  • 201. Up to 25% of the building surface area may be excluded from credit calculation because of deterioration or damage. 91 Updated to reflect the April 14, 2017 LEED v4 Building Design and Construction Addenda OR Option 3. Building and Material Reuse (2–4 points BD&C, 2-5 points Core and Shell) Reuse or salvage building materials from off site or on site as a percentage of the surface area, as listed in Table 1. Include structural elements (e.g., floors, roof decking), enclosure materials (e.g., skin, framing), and permanently installed interior elements (e.g., walls, doors, floor coverings, ceiling systems). Exclude from the calculation window assemblies and any hazardous materials that are remediated as a part of the project. Materials contributing toward this credit may not contribute toward MR Credit Material Disclosure and Optimization. Table 1. Points for reuse of building materials Percentage of
  • 202. completed project surface area reused Points BD&C Points BD&C (Core and Shell) 25% 2 2 50% 3 3 75% 4 5 OR Option 4. Whole-Building Life-Cycle Assessment (3 points) For new construction (buildings or portions of buildings), conduct a life-cycle assessment of the project’s structure and enclosure that demonstrates a minimum of 10% reduction, compared with a baseline building, in at least three of the six impact categories listed below, one of which must be global warming potential. No impact category assessed as part of the life-cycle assessment may increase by more than 5% compared with the baseline building. The baseline and proposed buildings must be of comparable size, function, orientation, and operating energy performance as defined in EA Prerequisite Minimum
  • 203. Energy Performance. The service life of the baseline and proposed buildings must be the same and at least 60 years to fully account for maintenance and replacement. Use the same life-cycle assessment software tools and data sets to evaluate both the baseline building and the proposed building, and report all listed impact categories. Data sets must be compliant with ISO 14044. Select at least three of the following impact categories for reduction: -11; SO2; eutrophication, in kg nitrogen or kg phosphate; ethene; and 92 Updated to reflect the April 14, 2017 LEED v4 Building Design and Construction Addenda
  • 204. Healthcare only For all options in this credit, building materials demolished to create courtyards to increase daylighting may be counted as retained in calculations, provided the new courtyards meet the requirements of EQ Credits Daylight and Quality Views. 93 Updated to reflect the April 14, 2017 LEED v4 Building Design and Construction Addenda MR CREDIT: BUILDING PRODUCT DISCLOSURE AND OPTIMIZATION— ENVIRONMENTAL PRODUCT DECLARATIONS BD&C 1–2 points This credit applies to –2 points) –2 points) –2 points) –2 points) –2 points) –2 points)
  • 205. –2 points) 1–2 points) Intent To encourage the use of products and materials for which life- cycle information is available and that have environmentally, economically, and socially preferable life- cycle impacts. To reward project teams for selecting products from manufacturers who have verified improved environmental life-cycle impacts. Requirements NC, CS, SCHOOLS, RETAIL, DATA CENTERS, WAREHOUSES & DISTRIBUTION CENTERS, HOSPITALITY, HEALTHCARE Achieve one or more of the options below, for a maximum of 2 points. Option 1. Environmental Product Declaration (EPD) (1 point) Use at least 20 different permanently installed products sourced from at least five different manufacturers that meet one of the disclosure criteria below. -specific declaration. o Products with a publicly available, critically reviewed life- cycle assessment conforming to
  • 206. ISO 14044 that have at least a cradle to gate scope are valued as one quarter (1/4) of a product for the purposes of credit achievement calculation. 14025, 14040, 14044, and EN 15804 or ISO 21930 and have at least a cradle to gate scope. o Industry-wide (generic) EPD -- Products with third-party certification (Type III), including external verification, in which the manufacturer is explicitly recognized as a participant by the program operator are valued as one half (1/2) of a product for purposes of credit achievement calculation. o Product-specific Type III EPD -- Products with third-party certification (Type III), including external verification in which the manufacturer is explicitly recognized as the participant by the program operator are valued as one whole product for purposes of credit achievement calculation. – Products that comply with other USGBC approved environmental product declaration frameworks. Option 2. Multi-Attribute Optimization (1 point) Use products that comply with one of the criteria below for 50%, by cost, of the total value of permanently installed products in the project. Products will be valued as below.
  • 207. reduction below industry average in at least 94 Updated to reflect the April 14, 2017 LEED v4 Building Design and Construction Addenda three of the following categories are valued at 100% of their cost for credit achievement calculations. o global warming potential (greenhouse gases), in CO2e; o depletion of the stratospheric ozone layer, in kg CFC-11; o acidification of land and water sources, in moles H+ or kg SO2; o eutrophication, in kg nitrogen or kg phosphate; o formation of tropospheric ozone, in kg NOx, kg O3 eq, or kg ethene; and depletion of nonrenewable energy resources, in MJ. -- Products that comply with other USGBC approved multi-attribute frameworks. For credit achievement calculation, products sourced (extracted, manufactured, purchased) within 100 miles (160 km) of the project site are valued at 200% of their base contributing cost.
  • 208. Structure and enclosure materials may not constitute more than 30% of the value of compliant building products. 95 Updated to reflect the April 14, 2017 LEED v4 Building Design and Construction Addenda MR CREDIT: BUILDING PRODUCT DISCLOSURE AND OPTIMIZATION – SOURCING OF RAW MATERIALS BD&C 1–2 points This credit applies to –2 points) –2 points) –2 points) –2 points) –2 points) –2 points) –2 points)
  • 209. –2 points) Intent To encourage the use of products and materials for which life cycle information is available and that have environmentally, economically, and socially preferable life cycle impacts. To reward project teams for selecting products verified to have been extracted or sourced in a responsible manner. Requirements NC, CS, SCHOOLS, RETAIL NC, DATA CENTERS, WAREHOUSES & DISTRIBUTION CENTERS, HOSPITALITY NC, HEALTHCARE Option 1. Raw Material Source and Extraction Reporting (1 point) Use at least 20 different permanently installed products from at least five different manufacturers that have publicly released a report from their raw material suppliers which include raw material supplier extraction locations, a commitment to long-term ecologically responsible land use, a commitment to reducing environmental harms from extraction and/or manufacturing processes, and a commitment to meeting applicable standards or programs voluntarily that address responsible sourcing criteria -declared reports are valued as one half (1/2) of a product for credit achievement.
  • 210. -party verified corporate sustainability reports (CSR) which include environmental impacts of extraction operations and activities associated with the manufacturer’s product and the product’s supply chain, are valued as one whole product for credit achievement calculation. Acceptable CSR frameworks include the following: o Global Reporting Initiative (GRI) Sustainability Report o Organisation for Economic Co-operation and Develoment (OECD) Guidelines for Multinational Enterprises o U.N. Global Compact: Communication of Progress o ISO 26000: 2010 Guidance on Social Responsibility o USGBC approved program: Other USGBC approved programs meeting the CSR criteria. Option 2. Leadership Extraction Practices (1 point) Use products that meet at least one of the responsible extraction criteria below for at least 25%, by cost, of the total value of permanently installed building products in the project. manufacturer (producer) that participates in an extended producer responsibility program or is directly responsible for extended
  • 211. 96 Updated to reflect the April 14, 2017 LEED v4 Building Design and Construction Addenda producer responsibility. Products meeting extended producer responsibility criteria are valued at 50% of their cost for the purposes of credit achievement calculation. -based materials. Bio-based products must meet the Sustainable Agriculture Network’s Sustainable Agriculture Standard. Bio-based raw materials must be tested using ASTM Test Method D6866 and be legally harvested, as defined by the exporting and receiving country. Exclude hide products, such as leather and other animal skin material. Products meeting bio- based materials criteria are valued at 100% of their cost for the purposes of credit achievement calculation. Forest Stewardship Council or USGBC- approved equivalent. Products meeting wood products criteria are valued at 100% of their cost for the purposes of credit achievement calculation. reused products. Products meeting materials reuse criteria are valued at 100% of their cost for the purposes of credit achievement calculation.
  • 212. postconsumer recycled content plus one-half the preconsumer recycled content, based on cost. Products meeting recycled content criteria are valued at 100% of their cost for the purposes of credit achievement calculation programs meeting leadership extraction criteria. For credit achievement calculation, products sourced (extracted, manufactured and purchased) within 100 miles (160 km) of the project site are valued at 200% of their base contributing cost. For credit achievement calculation, the base contributing cost of individual products compliant with multiple responsible extraction criteria is not permitted to exceed 100% its total actual cost (before regional multipliers) and double counting of single product components compliant with multiple responsible extraction criteria is not permitted and in no case is a product permitted to contribute more than 200% of its total actual cost. Structure and enclosure materials may not constitute more than 30% of the value of compliant building products.
  • 213. 97 Updated to reflect the April 14, 2017 LEED v4 Building Design and Construction Addenda MR CREDIT: BUILDING PRODUCT DISCLOSURE AND OPTIMIZATION – MATERIAL INGREDIENTS BD&C 1-2 points This credit applies to -2 points) -2 points) -2 points) -2 points) -2 points) -2 points) -2 points) -2 points) Intent To encourage the use of products and materials for which life- cycle information is available and that have environmentally, economically, and socially preferable life-
  • 214. cycle impacts. To reward project teams for selecting products for which the chemical ingredients in the product are inventoried using an accepted methodology and for selecting products verified to minimize the use and generation of harmful substances. To reward raw material manufacturers who produce products verified to have improved life- cycle impacts. Requirements NC, CS, SCHOOLS, RETAIL NC, DATA CENTERS, WAREHOUSES & DISTRIBUTION CENTERS, HOSPITALITY NC, HEALTHCARE Option 1. Material Ingredient Reporting (1 point) Use at least 20 different permanently installed products from at least five different manufacturers that use any of the following programs to demonstrate the chemical inventory of the product to at least 0.1% (1000 ppm). complete content inventory for the product following these guidelines: o A publicly available inventory of all ingredients identified by name and Chemical Abstract Service Registration Number (CASRN) and/or European Community Number (EC Number). o Materials defined as trade secret or intellectual property may withhold the name and/or
  • 215. CASRN/EC Number but must disclose role, amount and hazard screen using either: Labeling of Chemicals rev.6 (2015) (GHS) ingredient and the inventory lists the hazard category for each of the health hazards included in Part 3 of GHS (e.g. “GHS Category 2 Carcinogen”). classification cannot be made because there are insufficient data for a particular endpoint(s). published, complete Health Product Declaration with full disclosure of known hazards in compliance with the Health Product Declaration open Standard. 98 Updated to reflect the April 14, 2017 LEED v4 Building Design
  • 216. and Construction Addenda the Cradle to Cradle v2 Basic level or Cradle to Cradle v3 Bronze level. l must indicate that all ingredients have been evaluated and disclosed down to 1000 ppm. documentation from the assessor or scorecard from BIFMA must demonstrate the product earned at least 3 points under 7.5.1.3 Advanced Level in e3-2014 or 3 points under 7.4.1.3 Advanced Level in e3-2012. has been certified at the Bronze level or higher and at least 90% of materials are assessed by weight. – NSF/ANSI 336: Sustainability Assessment for Commercial Furnishings Fabric at any certification level. meeting the material ingredient reporting criteria. AND/OR Option 2: Material Ingredient Optimization (1 point)
  • 217. Use products that document their material ingredient optimization using the paths below for at least 25%, by cost, of the total value of permanently installed products in the project. inventoried chemical ingredients to 100 ppm that have no Benchmark 1 hazards: o If any ingredients are assessed with the GreenScreen List Translator, value these products at 100% of cost. o If all ingredients are have undergone a full GreenScreen Assessment, value these products at 150% of cost. Cradle to Cradle. Products will be valued as follows: o Cradle to Cradle v2 Gold: 100% of cost o Cradle to Cradle v2 Platinum: 150% of cost o Cradle to Cradle v3 Silver: 100% of cost o Cradle to Cradle v3 Gold or Platinum: 150% of cost – REACH Optimization. End use products and materials have fully inventoried chemical ingredients to 100 ppm and assess each substance against the Authorization List – Annex XIV, the Restriction list – Annex XVII and the SVHC candidate list, (the version in effect June 2013,) proving that no such substance is included in the product. If the product contains no ingredients listed on the
  • 218. REACH Authorization, Restriction, and Candidate list, value at 100% of cost. USGGBC approved building product optimization criteria. AND/OR Option 3: Product Manufacturer Supply Chain Optimization (1 point) Use building products for at least 25%, by cost, of the total value of permanently installed products in the project that: o Are sourced from product manufacturers who engage in validated and robust safety, health, hazard, and risk programs which at a minimum document at least 99% (by weight) of the ingredients used to make the building product or building material, and o Are sourced from product manufacturers with independent third party verification of their supply chain that at a minimum verifies: http://new.usgbc.org/glossary/term/4727 99 Updated to reflect the April 14, 2017 LEED v4 Building Design and Construction Addenda
  • 219. ocesses are in place to communicate and transparently prioritize chemical ingredients along the supply chain according to available hazard, exposure and use information to identify those that require more detailed evaluation identify, document, and communicate information on health, safety and environmental characteristics of chemical ingredients health, safety and environmental hazard and risk of chemical ingredients environmental impacts when designing and improving chemical ingredients chemical ingredient safety and stewardship information along the supply chain ingredients is publicly available from all points along the supply chain Products meeting Option 3 criteria are valued at 100% of their cost for the purposes of credit achievement calculation. For credit achievement calculation of options 2 and 3, products sourced (extracted, manufactured, purchased) within 100 miles (160 km) of the project site are valued at 200% of their base contributing cost. For credit achievement calculation, the value of individual products compliant with either option 2 or
  • 220. 3 can be combined to reach the 25% threshold but products compliant with both option 2 and 3 may only be counted once. Structure and enclosure materials may not constitute more than 30% of the value of compliant building products. 100 Updated to reflect the April 14, 2017 LEED v4 Building Design and Construction Addenda MR CREDIT: PBT SOURCE REDUCTION—MERCURY BD&C 1 point This credit applies to Intent To reduce the release of persistent, bioaccumulative, and toxic (PBTs) chemicals associated with the life cycle of building materials. Requirements
  • 221. HEALTHCARE Specify and install fluorescent lamps with both low mercury content (MR Prerequisite PBT Source Reduction—Mercury) and long lamp life, as listed in Table 1. Table 1. Criteria for rated life of low-mercury lamps Lamp Maximum content Lamp life (hrs) T-8 fluorescent, eight-foot 10 mg mercury Standard output - 24,000 rated hours on instant start ballasts (3- hour starts) High output – 18,000 rated hours on instant start ballasts or program start ballasts (3-hour starts) T-8 fluorescent, four-foot 3.5 mg mercury Both standard and high output - 30,000 rated hours on instant start ballasts, or 36,000 rated hours on program start ballasts (3 hour starts) T-8 fluorescent, two-foot and three- foot 3.5 mg mercury 24,000 rated hours on instant start ballasts or program start ballasts (3-hour starts) T-8 fluorescent, U-bent 6 mg mercury 18,000 rated hours on instant
  • 222. start ballasts, or 24,000 rated hours on program start ballasts (3-hour starts) T-5 fluorescent, linear 2.5 mg mercury Both standard and high- output - 25,000 rated hours on program start ballasts T-5 fluorescent, circular 9 mg mercury Both standard and high- output – 25,000 rated hours on program start ballasts Compact fluorescent, nonintegral ballast 3.5 mg mercury 12,000 rated hours Compact florescent, integral ballast, bare bulb 3.5 mg mercury, ENERGY STAR qualified Bare bulb - 10,000 rated hours Covered models such as globes, reflectors, A-19s – 8,000 hours 101 Updated to reflect the April 14, 2017 LEED v4 Building Design
  • 223. and Construction Addenda High-pressure sodium, up to 400 watts 10 mg mercury Use noncycling type or replace with LED lamps or induction lamps High-pressure sodium, above 400 watts 32 mg mercury Use noncycling type or replace with LED lamps or induction lamps Do not specify or install circular fluorescent lamps or probe start metal halide lamps. 102 Updated to reflect the April 14, 2017 LEED v4 Building Design and Construction Addenda MR CREDIT: PBT SOURCE REDUCTION—LEAD, CADMIUM, AND COPPER BD&C 2 points This credit applies to
  • 224. Intent To reduce the release of persistent, bioaccumulative, and toxic (PBT) chemicals associated with the life cycle of building materials. Requirements HEALTHCARE Specify substitutes for materials manufactured with lead and cadmium, as follows. Lead solder and flux to connect plumbing pipe on site that meets the California AB1953 standard, which specifies that solder not contain more than 0.2% lead, and flux not more than a weighted average of 0.25% lead for wetted surfaces. The “lead free” label as defined by the Safe Drinking Water Act (SDWA) ) does not provide adequate screening for the purposes of this credit because the SDWA defines “lead free” as solders and flux containing 0.2% lead or less. pipes, pipe fittings, plumbing fittings, and faucets that meet the California law AB1953 of a weighted average lead content of the wetted surface area of not more than 0.25% lead. -free roofing and flashing.
  • 225. less than 300 parts per million. taining lead. disposal of disconnected wires with lead stabilizers, consistent with the 2002 National Electric Code requirements. Lead used for radiation shielding and copper used for MRI shielding are exempt. Cadmium intentionally added cadmium. Copper - related sources of copper corrosion: o use mechanically crimped copper joint systems; or o specify that all solder joints comply with ASTM B828 2002, and specify and use ASTM B813 2010 for flux. 103
  • 226. Updated to reflect the April 14, 2017 LEED v4 Building Design and Construction Addenda MR CREDIT: FURNITURE AND MEDICAL FURNISHINGS BD&C 1–2 points This credit applies to Intent To enhance the environmental and human health performance attributes associated with freestanding furniture and medical furnishings. Requirements HEALTHCARE Use at least 30% (1 point) or 40% (2 points), by cost, of all freestanding furniture and medical furnishings (e.g., mattresses, foams, panel fabrics, cubicle curtains, window coverings, other textiles) that meet the criteria in one of the following three options. Include built-in casework and built-in millwork in the base building calculations, even if manufactured off site. The dollar value of any individual product may be included in the total qualifying value if the product meets the criteria. Option 1. Minimal Chemical Content
  • 227. All components that constitute at least 5%, by weight, of a furniture or medical furnishing assembly, including textiles, finishes, and dyes, must contain less than 100 parts per million (ppm) of at least four of the five following chemical groups: antimony; European Union Directive on the Restriction of the Use of Certain Hazardous Substances (EU RoHS); compounds (PFCs), including perfluorooctanoic acid (PFOA); and AND/OR Option 2. Testing and Modeling of Chemical Content All components of a furniture or medical furnishing assembly, including textiles, finishes, and dyes, must contain less than 100 parts per million (ppm) of at least two of the five chemicals or materials listed in Option 1. New furniture or medical furnishing assemblies must be in accordance with ANSI/BIFMA Standard Method M7.1–2011. Comply with ANSI/BIFMA e3-2010 Furniture Sustainability Standard, Sections 7.6.1
  • 228. and 7.6.2, using either the concentration modeling approach or the emissions factor approach. Model the test results using the open plan, private office, or seating scenario in ANSI/BIFMA M7.1, as appropriate. USGBC-approved equivalent testing methodologies and contaminant thresholds are also acceptable. Documentation submitted for furniture must indicate the modeling scenarioused to determine compliance. Salvaged and reused furniture more than one year old at the time of use is considered compliant, provided it meets the requirements for any site-applied paints, coatings, adhesives, and sealants. 104 Updated to reflect the April 14, 2017 LEED v4 Building Design and Construction Addenda AND/OR Option 3: Multi-Attribute Assessment of Products Use products that meet at least one of the criteria below. Each product can receive credit for each criterion met. The scope of any environmental product declaration (EPD) must be at least cradle to gate. -specific declaration. o Products with a publicly available, critically reviewed life-
  • 229. cycle assessment conforming to ISO 14044 that have at least a cradle to gate scope are valued as one quarter (1/4) of a product for the purposes of credit achievement calculation. 14025, 14040, 14044, and EN 15804 or ISO 21930 and have at least a cradle to gate scope. o Industry-wide (generic) EPD -- Products with third-party certification (Type III), including external verification, in which the manufacturer is explicitly recognized as a participant by the program operator are valued as one half (1/2) of a product for purposes of credit achievement calculation. o Product-specific Type III EPD -- Products with third-party certification (Type III), including external verification in which the manufacturer is explicitly recognized as the participant by the program operator are valued as one whole product for purposes of credit achievement calculation. products. se products with recycled content. Recycled content is the sum of post- consumer recycled content plus one-half the pre-consumer recycled content.
  • 230. manufacturer (producer) that participates in an extended producer responsibility program or is directly responsible for extended producer responsibility. -based materials. Bio-based products must meet the Sustainable Agriculture Network’s Sustainable Agriculture Standard. Bio-based raw materials must be tested using ASTM Test Method D6866 and be legally harvested, as defined by the exporting and receiving country. Exclude hide products, such as leather and other animal skin material. ed by the Forest Stewardship Council or USGBC- approved equivalent. Products that meet the above criteria are valued according to source location (extraction, manufacture, and purchase point must be within the distances noted below): For credit achievement calculation, products sourced (extracted, manufactured, purchased) within 100 miles (160 km) of the project site are valued at 200% of their base contributing cost.
  • 231. 105 Updated to reflect the April 14, 2017 LEED v4 Building Design and Construction Addenda MR CREDIT: DESIGN FOR FLEXIBILITY BD&C 1 point This credit applies to Intent Conserve resources associated with the construction and management of buildings by designing for flexibility and ease of future adaptation and for the service life of components and assemblies. Requirements HEALTHCARE Increase building flexibility and ease of adaptive use over the life of the structure by employing at least three of the following strategies. ial space. Design distribution zone utility systems and equipment including HVAC, plumbing, electrical, information technology, medical gases, and life safety systems to serve the occupied zones and have the capacity to control multiple zones in clinical spaces.
  • 232. storage, equal to at least 5% of departmental gross area (DGA). Locate soft space adjacent to clinical departments that anticipate growth. Determine a strategy for future accommodation of displaced soft space. such that it can be occupied without displacing occupied space. treatment or other clinical space equal to at least 30% of existing floor area (excluding inpatient units) without demolition of occupied space (other than at the connection point). Reconfiguration of additional existing occupied space that has been constructed with demountable partition systems is permitted. roof, ensuring that existing operations and service systems can continue at or near capacity during the expansion. -grade parking structures equal to 50% of existing on-grade parking capacity, with direct access to the main hospital lobby or circulation. Vertical transportation pathways that lead directly to the main hospital lobby or circulation are acceptable. titions for 50% of applicable areas. casework and custom millwork. Base the
  • 233. calculation on the combined value of casework and millwork, as determined by the cost estimator or contractor. 106 Updated to reflect the April 14, 2017 LEED v4 Building Design and Construction Addenda MR CREDIT: CONSTRUCTION AND DEMOLITION WASTE MANAGEMENT BD&C 1–2 points This credit applies to –2 points) –2 points) –2 points) –2 points) –2 points) –2 points) –2 points)
  • 234. –2 points) Intent To reduce construction and demolition waste disposed of in landfills and incineration facilities by recovering, reusing, and recycling materials. Requirements NC, CS, SCHOOLS, RETAIL NC, DATA CENTERS, WAREHOUSES & DISTRIBUTION CENTERS, HOSPITALITY NC, HEALTHCARE Recycle and/or salvage nonhazardous construction and demolition materials. Calculations can be by weight or volume but must be consistent throughout. Exclude excavated soil, land-clearing debris from calculations. Include materials destined for alternative daily cover (ADC) in the calculations as waste (not diversion). Include wood waste converted to fuel (biofuel) in the calculations; other types of waste-to-energy are not considered diversion for this credit. However, for projects that cannot meet credit requirements using reuse and recycling methods, waste-to- energy systems may be considered waste diversion if the European Commission Waste Framework Directive 2008/98/EC and Waste Incineration Directive 2000/76/EC are followed and Waste to Energy facilities meet applicable European Committee for Standardization (CEN) EN 303 standards.
  • 235. Option 1. Diversion (1–2 points) Path 1. Divert 50% and Three Material Streams (1 point) Divert at least 50% of the total construction and demolition material; diverted materials must include at least three material streams. OR Path 2. Divert 75% and Four Material Streams (2 points) Divert at least 75% of the total construction and demolition material; diverted materials must include at least four material streams. OR Option 2. Reduction of Total Waste Material (2 points) Do not generate more than 2.5 pounds of construction waste per square foot (12.2 kilograms of waste per square meter) of the building’s floor area. 107 Updated to reflect the April 14, 2017 LEED v4 Building Design and Construction Addenda INDOOR ENVIRONMENTAL QUALITY (EQ)
  • 236. EQ PREREQUISITE: MINIMUM INDOOR AIR QUALITY PERFORMANCE Required BD&C This prerequisite applies to Intent To contribute to the comfort and well-being of building occupants by establishing minimum standards for indoor air quality (IAQ). Requirements NC, CS, SCHOOLS, RETAIL, DATA CENTERS, WAREHOUSES & DISTRIBUTION CENTERS, HOSPITALITY Meet the requirements for both ventilation and monitoring.
  • 237. Ventilation Mechanically Ventilated Spaces Option 1. ASHRAE Standard 62.1–2010 For mechanically ventilated spaces (and for mixed-mode systems when the mechanical ventilation is activated), determine the minimum outdoor air intake flow for mechanical ventilation systems using the ventilation rate procedure from ASHRAE 62.1–2010 or a local equivalent, whichever is more stringent. Meet the minimum requirements of ASHRAE Standard 62.1– 2010, Sections 4–7, Ventilation for Acceptable Indoor Air Quality (with errata), or a local equivalent, whichever is more stringent. Option 2. CEN Standards EN 15251–2007 and EN 13779–2007 Projects outside the U.S. may instead meet the minimum outdoor air requirements of Annex B of Comité Européen de Normalisation (CEN) Standard EN 15251–2007, Indoor environmental input parameters for design and assessment of energy performance of buildings addressing indoor air quality, thermal environment, lighting and acoustics; and meet the requirements of CEN Standard EN 13779–2007, Ventilation for nonresidential buildings, Performance requirements for ventilation and room conditioning systems, excluding Section 7.3, Thermal environment; 7.6, Acoustic environment; A.16; and A.17. Naturally Ventilated Spaces For naturally ventilated spaces (and for mixed-mode systems when the mechanical ventilation is
  • 238. inactivated), determine the minimum outdoor air opening and space configuration requirements using the natural ventilation procedure from ASHRAE Standard 62.1– 2010 or a local equivalent, whichever is more stringent. Confirm that natural ventilation is an effective strategy for the project by following the flow 108 Updated to reflect the April 14, 2017 LEED v4 Building Design and Construction Addenda diagram in the Chartered Institution of Building Services Engineers (CIBSE) Applications Manual AM10, March 2005, Natural Ventilation in Nondomestic Buildings, Figure 2.8, and meet the requirements of ASHRAE Standard 62.1–2010, Section 4, or a local equivalent, whichever is more stringent. All Spaces The indoor air quality procedure defined in ASHRAE Standard 62.1–2010 may not be used to comply with this prerequisite. Monitoring Mechanically Ventilated Spaces For mechanically ventilated spaces (and for mixed-mode systems when the mechanical ventilation is activated), monitor outdoor air intake flow as follows: airflow measurement device capable of measuring the minimum outdoor air intake flow. This device must measure the minimum outdoor
  • 239. air intake flow with an accuracy of +/–10% of the design minimum outdoor airflow rate, as defined by the ventilation requirements above. An alarm must indicate when the outdoor airflow value varies by 15% or more from the outdoor airflow setpoint. -volume systems, balance outdoor airflow to the design minimum outdoor airflow rate defined by ASHRAE Standard 62.1–2010 (with errata), or higher. Install a current transducer on the supply fan, an airflow switch, or similar monitoring device. Naturally Ventilated Spaces For naturally ventilated spaces (and for mixed-mode systems when the mechanical ventilation is inactivated), comply with at least one of the following strategies. of measuring the exhaust airflow. This device must measure the exhaust airflow with an accuracy of +/–10% of the design minimum exhaust airflow rate. An alarm must indicate when airflow values vary by 15% or more from the exhaust airflow setpoint. ventilation openings intended to meet the minimum opening requirements. An alarm must indicate when any one of the openings is closed during occupied hours. thermal zone. CO2 monitors must be between 3 and 6 feet (900 and 1 800 millimeters) above the
  • 240. floor and within the thermal zone. CO2 monitors must have an audible or visual indicator or alert the building automation system if the sensed CO2 concentration exceeds the setpoint by more than 10%. Calculate appropriate CO2 setpoints using the methods in ASHRAE 62.1–2010, Appendix C. CS only Mechanical ventilation systems installed during core and shell construction must be capable of meeting projected ventilation levels and monitoring based on the requirements of anticipated future tenants. Residential only In addition to the requirements above, if the project building contains residential units, each dwelling unit must meet all of the following requirements. ances (e.g., decorative logs) are not allowed. each unit. enclosures or doors that seal when closed. laces and woodstoves that are not closed combustion or power-vented must pass a backdraft potential test to ensure that depressurization of the
  • 241. combustion appliance zone is less than 5 Pa. 109 Updated to reflect the April 14, 2017 LEED v4 Building Design and Construction Addenda - and water-heating equipment that involves combustion must be designed and installed with closed combustion (i.e., sealed supply air and exhaust ducting) or with power-vented exhaust, or located in a detached utility building or open-air facility. -risk areas for radon, EPA Radon Zone 1 (or local equivalent for projects outside the U.S.), design and construct any dwelling unit on levels one through four above grade with radon-resistant construction techniques. Follow the techniques prescribed in EPA Building Radon Out; NFPA 5000, Chapter 49; International Residential Code, Appendix F; CABO, Appendix F; ASTM E1465; or a local equivalent, whichever is most stringent. HEALTHCARE Meet the following requirements for both ventilation and monitoring.
  • 242. Ventilation Mechanically Ventilated Spaces For mechanically ventilated spaces (and for mixed-mode systems when the mechanical ventilation is activated), determine the minimum outdoor air intake flow for mechanical ventilations systems using the ventilation rates in ASHRAE Standard 170–2008, Section 7; the requirements of the 2010 FGI Guidelines for Design and Construction of Health Care Facilities (Table 2.1–2); or a local equivalent, whichever is most stringent. For any area not covered in 170 or the FGI guidelines, follow ASHRAE 62.1 or a local equivalent, whichever is more stringent and meet the minimum requirements of ASHRAE Standard 170– 2008, Sections 6–8, Ventilation of Health Care Facilities (with errata) or a USGBC-approved equivalent standard for projects outside the U.S. Naturally Ventilated Spaces For naturally ventilated spaces (and for mixed-mode systems when the mechanical ventilation is inactivated), determine the minimum outdoor air opening and space configuration requirements using the natural ventilation procedure of ASHRAE Standard 62.1–2010 (with errata) or a local equivalent, whichever is more stringent. Confirm that natural ventilation is an effective strategy for the project by following the flow diagram in Figure 2.8 of the Chartered Institution of Building Services Engineers (CIBSE) Applications Manual AM10, March 2005, Natural Ventilation in Nondomestic Buildings. Monitoring Mechanically Ventilated Spaces
  • 243. For mechanically ventilated spaces (and for mixed-mode systems when the mechanical ventilation is activated), provide a direct outdoor airflow measurement device capable of measuring the minimum outdoor air intake flow. This device must measure the minimum outdoor air intake flow with an accuracy of +/–10% of the design minimum outdoor airflow rate defined by the ventilation requirements above. An alarm must alert staff whenever the outdoor airflow value varies by 15% or more from the outdoor airflow setpoint. Naturally Ventilated Spaces For naturally ventilated spaces (and for mixed-mode systems when the mechanical ventilation is inactivated), comply with at least one of the following strategies. airflow measurement device capable of measuring the exhaust airflow with an accuracy of +/–10% of the design minimum exhaust airflow rate. An alarm must indicate when airflow values vary by 15% or more from the exhaust airflow setpoint. matic indication devices on all natural ventilation openings intended to meet the minimum opening requirements. An alarm must indicate when any one of the openings is closed during occupied hours. ch thermal zone. CO2 monitors must be between 3 and 6 feet (900 and 1 800 millimeters) above the floor and within the thermal zone.
  • 244. CO2 monitors must have an audible or visual indicator or alert the building automation system if 110 Updated to reflect the April 14, 2017 LEED v4 Building Design and Construction Addenda the sensed CO2 concentration exceeds the setpoint by more than 10%. Calculate appropriate CO2 setpoints by using the methods in ASHRAE 62.1–2010, Appendix C. 111 Updated to reflect the April 14, 2017 LEED v4 Building Design and Construction Addenda EQ PREREQUISITE: ENVIRONMENTAL TOBACCO SMOKE CONTROL Required BD&C This prerequisite applies to
  • 245. Intent To prevent or minimize exposure of building occupants, indoor surfaces, and ventilation air distribution systems to environmental tobacco smoke. Requirements NC, CS, RETAIL, DATA CENTERS, WAREHOUSES & DISTRIBUTION CENTERS, HOSPITALITY, HEALTHCARE Prohibit smoking inside the building. Prohibit smoking outside the building except in designated smoking areas located at least 25 feet (7.5 meters) from all entries, outdoor air intakes, and operable windows. Also prohibit smoking outside the property line in spaces used for business purposes. If the requirement to prohibit smoking within 25 feet (7.5 meters) cannot be implemented because of code, provide documentation of these regulations. Signage must be posted within 10 feet (3 meters) of all building
  • 246. entrances indicating the no-smoking policy. Residential only Option 1. No Smoking Meet the requirements above. OR Option 2. Compartmentalization of Smoking Areas Prohibit smoking inside all common areas of the building. The prohibition must be communicated in building rental or lease agreements or condo or coop association covenants and restrictions. Make provisions for enforcement. Prohibit smoking outside the building except in designated smoking areas located at least 25 feet (7.5 meters) from all entries, outdoor air intakes, and operable windows. The no-smoking policy also applies to spaces outside the property line used for business purposes. If the requirement to prohibit smoking within 25 feet (7.5 meters) cannot be implemented because of code, provide documentation of these regulations. 112 Updated to reflect the April 14, 2017 LEED v4 Building Design and Construction Addenda Signage must be posted within 10 feet (3 meters) of all building
  • 247. entrances indicating the no-smoking policy. Each unit must be compartmentalized to prevent excessive leakage between units: -strip all exterior doors and operable windows in the residential units to minimize leakage from outdoors. -strip all doors leading from residential units into common hallways. and other indoor air pollutants between residential units by sealing penetrations in the walls, ceilings, and floors and by sealing vertical chases (including utility chases, garbage chutes, mail drops, and elevator shafts) adjacent to the units. per minute per square foot (1.17 liters per second per square meter) at 50 Pa of enclosure (i.e., all surfaces enclosing the apartment, including exterior and party walls, floors, and ceilings). SCHOOLS Prohibit smoking on site. Signage must be posted at the property line indicating the no- smoking policy.
  • 248. 113 Updated to reflect the April 14, 2017 LEED v4 Building Design and Construction Addenda EQ PREREQUISITE: MINIMUM ACOUSTIC PERFORMANCE Required BD&C This prerequisite applies to Intent To provide classrooms that facilitate teacher-to-student and student-to-student communication through effective acoustic design. Requirements SCHOOLS HVAC Background Noise Achieve a maximum background noise level of 40 dBA from heating, ventilating, and air-conditioning (HVAC) systems in classrooms and other core learning spaces. Follow the recommended methodologies and best practices for mechanical system noise control in ANSI Standard S12.60–2010, Part 1, Annex A.1; the 2011 HVAC Applications ASHRAE Handbook, Chapter 48, Noise and Vibration Control (with errata); AHRI Standard 885–2008; or a local equivalent for projects outside the U.S.
  • 249. Exterior Noise For high-noise sites (peak-hour Leq above 60 dBA during school hours), implement acoustic treatment and other measures to minimize noise intrusion from exterior sources and control sound transmission between classrooms and other core learning spaces. Projects at least one-half mile (800 meters) from any significant noise source (e.g., aircraft overflights, highways, trains, industry) are exempt. Reverberation Time Adhere to the following reverberation time requirements. Classrooms and Core Learning Spaces < 20,000 Cubic Feet (566 Cubic Meters) Design classrooms and other core learning spaces to include sufficient sound-absorptive finishes for compliance with the reverberation time requirements specified in ANSI Standard S12.60–2010, Part 1, Acoustical Performance Criteria, Design Requirements and Guidelines for Schools, or a local equivalent for projects outside the U.S. Option 1 For each room, confirm that the total surface area of acoustic wall panels, ceiling finishes, and other sound-absorbent finishes equals or exceeds the total ceiling area of the room (excluding lights, diffusers, and grilles). Materials must have an NRC of 0.70 or higher to be included in the calculation. OR Option 2 Confirm through calculations described in ANSI Standard S12.60-2010 that rooms are designed to meet
  • 250. reverberation time requirements as specified in that standard. Classrooms and Core Learning Spaces ≥ 20,000 Cubic Feet (566 Cubic Meters) Meet the recommended reverberation times for classrooms and core learning spaces described in the NRC-CNRC Construction Technology Update No. 51, Acoustical Design of Rooms for Speech (2002), or a local equivalent for projects outside the U.S. Exceptions 114 Updated to reflect the April 14, 2017 LEED v4 Building Design and Construction Addenda Exceptions to the requirements because of a limited scope of work or to observe historic preservation requirements will be considered. 115 Updated to reflect the April 14, 2017 LEED v4 Building Design and Construction Addenda EQ CREDIT: ENHANCED INDOOR AIR QUALITY STRATEGIES BD&C
  • 251. 1–2 points This credit applies to –2 points) –2 points) –2 points) –2 points) –2 points) –2 points) –2 points) –2 points) Intent To promote occupants’ comfort, well-being, and productivity by improving indoor air quality. Requirements NC, CS, SCHOOLS, RETAIL, DATA CENTERS, WAREHOUSES & DISTRIBUTION CENTERS, HOSPITALITY, HEALTHCARE Option 1. Enhanced IAQ Strategies (1 point) Comply with the following requirements, as applicable.
  • 252. Mechanically ventilated spaces: A. entryway systems; B. interior cross-contamination prevention; and C. filtration. Naturally ventilated spaces: A. entryway systems; and D. natural ventilation design calculations. Mixed-mode systems: A. entryway systems; B. interior cross-contamination prevention; C. filtration; D. natural ventilation design calculations; and E. mixed-mode design calculations. A. Entryway Systems Install permanent entryway systems at least 10 feet (3 meters) long in the primary direction of travel to capture dirt and particulates entering the building at regularly used exterior entrances. Acceptable entryway systems include permanently installed grates, grilles, slotted systems that allow for cleaning underneath, rollout mats, and any other materials manufactured as entryway systems with equivalent or better performance. Maintain all on a weekly basis. Warehouses & Distribution Centers only
  • 253. Entryway systems are not required at doors leading from the exterior to the loading dock or garage but must be installed between these spaces and adjacent office areas. Healthcare only 116 Updated to reflect the April 14, 2017 LEED v4 Building Design and Construction Addenda In addition to the entryway system, provide pressurized entryway vestibules at high-volume building entrances. B. Interior Cross-Contamination Prevention Sufficiently exhaust each space where hazardous gases or chemicals may be present or used (e.g., garages, housekeeping and laundry areas, copying and printing rooms), using the exhaust rates determined in EQ Prerequisite Minimum Indoor Air Quality Performance or a minimum of 0.50 cfm per square foot (2.54 l/s per square meter), to create negative pressure with respect to adjacent spaces when the doors to the room are closed. For each of these spaces, provide self-closing doors and deck-to-deck partitions or a hard-lid ceiling. C. Filtration Each ventilation system that supplies outdoor air to occupied
  • 254. spaces must have particle filters or air- cleaning devices that meet one of the following filtration media requirements: um efficiency reporting value (MERV) of 13 or higher, in accordance with ASHRAE Standard 52.2–2007; or – 2002, Particulate Air Filters for General Ventilation, Determination of the Filtration Performance. Replace all air filtration media after completion of construction and before occupancy. Data Centers only The above filtration media requirements are required only for ventilation systems serving regularly occupied spaces. D. Natural Ventilation Design Calculations Demonstrate that the system design for occupied spaces employs the appropriate strategies in Chartered Institution of Building Services Engineers (CIBSE) Applications Manual AM10, March 2005, Natural Ventilation in Non-Domestic Buildings, Section 2.4. E. Mixed-Mode Design Calculations Demonstrate that the system design for occupied spaces complies with CIBSE Applications Manual 13–2000, Mixed Mode Ventilation.
  • 255. Option 2. Additional Enhanced IAQ Strategies (1 point) Comply with the following requirements, as applicable. Mechanically ventilated spaces (select one): A. exterior contamination prevention; B. increased ventilation; C. carbon dioxide monitoring; or D. additional source control and monitoring. Naturally ventilated spaces (select one): A. exterior contamination prevention; D. additional source control and monitoring; or E. natural ventilation room by room calculations. Mixed-mode systems (select one): A. exterior contamination prevention; B. increased ventilation; D. additional source control and monitoring; or E. natural ventilation room-by-room calculations. A. Exterior Contamination Prevention Design the project to minimize and control the entry of pollutants into the building. Ensure through the results of computational fluid dynamics modeling, Gaussian dispersion analyses, wind tunnel
  • 256. 117 Updated to reflect the April 14, 2017 LEED v4 Building Design and Construction Addenda modeling, or tracer gas modeling that outdoor air contaminant concentrations at outdoor air intakes are below the thresholds listed in Table 1 (or local equivalent for projects outside the U.S., whichever is more stringent). Table 1. Maximum concentrations of pollutants at outdoor air intakes Pollutants Maximum concentration Standard Those regulated by National Ambient Air Quality Standards (NAAQS) Allowable annual average OR 8-hour or 24-hour average where an annual standard does not exist OR Rolling 3-month average National Ambient Air Quality Standards (NAAQS) B. Increased Ventilation
  • 257. Increase breathing zone outdoor air ventilation rates to all occupied spaces by at least 30% above the minimum rates as determined in EQ Prerequisite Minimum Indoor Air Quality Performance. C. Carbon Dioxide Monitoring Monitor CO2 concentrations within all densely occupied spaces. CO2 monitors must be between 3 and 6 feet (900 and 1 800 millimeters) above the floor. CO2 monitors must have an audible or visual indicator or alert the building automation system if the sensed CO2 concentration exceeds the setpoint by more than 10%. Calculate appropriate CO2 setpoints using methods in ASHRAE 62.1– 2010, Appendix C. D. Additional Source Control and Monitoring For spaces where air contaminants are likely, evaluate potential sources of additional air contaminants besides CO2. Develop and implement a materials- handling plan to reduce the likelihood of contaminant release. Install monitoring systems with sensors designed to detect the specific contaminants. An alarm must indicate any unusual or unsafe conditions. E. Natural Ventilation Room-by-Room Calculations Follow CIBSE AM10, Section 4, Design Calculations, to predict that room-by-room airflows will provide effective natural ventilation.
  • 258. 118 Updated to reflect the April 14, 2017 LEED v4 Building Design and Construction Addenda EQ CREDIT: LOW-EMITTING MATERIALS BD&C 1–3 points This credit applies to –3 points) ll (1–3 points) –3 points) –3 points) –3 points) –3 points) –3 points) –3 points) Intent To reduce concentrations of chemical contaminants that can damage air quality, human health,
  • 259. productivity, and the environment. Requirements NC, CS, SCHOOLS, RETAIL, DATA CENTERS, WAREHOUSES & DISTRIBUTION CENTERS, HOSPITALITY, HEALTHCARE This credit includes requirements for product manufacturing as well as project teams. It covers volatile organic compound (VOC) emissions in the indoor air and the VOC content of materials, as well as the testing methods by which indoor VOC emissions are determined. Different materials must meet different requirements to be considered compliant for this credit. The building interior and exterior are organized in seven categories, each with different thresholds of compliance. The building interior is defined as everything within the waterproofing membrane. The building exterior is defined as everything outside and inclusive of the primary and secondary weatherproofing system, such as waterproofing membranes and air- and water-resistive barrier materials. Option 1. Product Category Calculations Achieve the threshold level of compliance with emissions and content standards for the number of product categories listed in Table 2. Table 1. Thresholds of compliance with emissions and content standards for 7 categories of materials
  • 260. Category Threshold Emissions and content requirements Interior paints and coatings applied on site At least 90%, by volume, for emissions; 100% for VOC content for paints and coatings applied to walls, floors, and ceilings wet applied products Interior adhesives and sealants applied on site (including flooring adhesive) At least 90%, by volume, for emissions; 100% for VOC content ent requirements for wet applied products Flooring 100% General Emissions Evaluation Composite wood 100% not covered by other categories
  • 261. Composite Wood Evaluation 119 Updated to reflect the April 14, 2017 LEED v4 Building Design and Construction Addenda Ceilings, walls, thermal, and acoustic insulation Additional insulation requirements Furniture (include in calculations if part of scope of work) At least 90%, by cost Furniture Evaluation Healthcare and Schools Projects only: Exterior applied products At least 90%, by volume Exterior Applied Products Table 2. Points for number of compliant categories of products Compliant categories Points
  • 262. New Construction, Core Shell, Retail, Data Centers, Warehouse and Distribution Centers, Hospitality projects without furniture 2 1 4 2 5 3 New Construction, Core Shell, Retail, Data Centers, Warehouse and Distribution Centers, Hospitality projects with furniture 3 1 5 2 6 3 Schools, Healthcare without furniture 3 1 5 2 6 3 Schools, Healthcare with furniture 4 1 6 2 7 3
  • 263. Option 2. Budget Calculation Method If some products in a category do not meet the criteria, project teams may use the budget calculation method (Table 3). Table 3. Points for percentage compliance, under budget calculation method Percentage of total Points ≥ 50% and < 70% 1 ≥ 70% and < 90% 2 ≥ 90% 3 The budget method organizes the building interior into six assemblies:
  • 264. 120 Updated to reflect the April 14, 2017 LEED v4 Building Design and Construction Addenda Include furniture in the calculations if it is part of the scope of work. Walls, ceilings, and flooring are defined as building interior products; each layer of the assembly, including paints, coatings, adhesives, and sealants, must be evaluated for compliance. Insulation is tracked separately. Determine the total percentage of compliant materials according to Equation 1. Equation 1. Total percentage compliance Total % compliant for projects without furniture = (% compliant walls + % compliant ceilings + % compliant flooring + % compliant insulation) 4 Total % compliant for projects with furniture = (% compliant walls + % compliant ceilings + % compliant flooring + % compliant insulation) + (% compliant furniture)
  • 265. 5 Equation 2. System percentage compliant Flooring, walls, ceilings, insulation % compliant = (compliant surface area of layer 1 + compliant surface area of layer 2 + compliant surface area of layer 3 + …) total surface area of layer 1 + total surface area of layer 2 + total surface area of layer 3 + …) X 100 Equation 3. Furniture systems compliant, using ANSI/BIFMA evaluation % compliant for furniture = 0.5 x cost compliant with §7.6.1 of ANSI/BIFMA e3-2011 + cost compliant with §7.6.2 of ANSI/BIFMA e3-2011 total furniture cost
  • 266. X 100 Calculate surface area of assembly layers based on the manufacturer’s documentation for application. If 90% of an assembly meets the criteria, the system counts as 100% compliant. If less than 50% of an assembly meets the criteria, the assembly counts as 0% compliant. Manufacturers’ claims. Both first-party and third-party statements of product compliance must follow the guidelines in CDPH SM V1.1–2010, Section 8. Organizations that certify manufacturers’ claims must be accredited under ISO Guide 65. Laboratory requirements. Laboratories that conduct the tests specified in this credit must be accredited under ISO/IEC 17025 for the test methods they use. Emissions and Content Requirements To demonstrate compliance, a product or layer must meet all of the following requirements, as applicable. Inherently nonemitting sources. Products that are inherently nonemitting sources of VOCs (stone, ceramic, powder-coated metals, plated or anodized metal, glass, concrete, clay brick, and unfinished or untreated solid wood flooring) are considered fully compliant without any VOC emissions testing if they do not include integral organic-based surface coatings, binders, or sealants. General emissions evaluation. Building products must be tested and determined compliant in accordance
  • 267. with California Department of Public Health (CDPH) Standard Method v1.1–2010, using the applicable exposure scenario. The default scenario is the private office scenario. The manufacturer’s or third-party certification must state the exposure scenario used to determine compliance. Claims of compliance for wet-applied products must state the amount applied in mass per surface area. 121 Updated to reflect the April 14, 2017 LEED v4 Building Design and Construction Addenda Manufacturers’ claims of compliance with the above requirements must also state the range of total VOCs after 14 days (336 hours), measured as specified in the CDPH Standard Method v1.1: Projects outside the U.S. may use products tested and deemed compliant in accordance with either (1) the CDPH standard method (2010) or (2) the German AgBB Testing and Evaluation Scheme (2010). Test products either with (1) the CDPH Standard Method (2010), (2) the German AgBB Testing and Evaluation Scheme (2010), (3) ISO 16000-3: 2010, ISO 16000- 6: 2011, ISO 16000-9: 2006, ISO 16000-
  • 268. 11:2006 either in conjunction with AgBB, or with French legislation on VOC emission class labeling, or (4) the DIBt testing method (2010). If the applied testing method does not specify testing details for a product group for which the CDPH standard method does provide details, use the specifications in the CDPH standard method. U.S. projects must follow the CDPH standard method. Additional VOC content requirements for wet-applied products. In addition to meeting the general requirements for VOC emissions (above), on-site wet-applied products must not contain excessive levels of VOCs, for the health of the installers and other tradesworkers who are exposed to these products. To demonstrate compliance, a product or layer must meet the following requirements, as applicable. Disclosure of VOC content must be made by the manufacturer. Any testing must follow the test method specified in the applicable regulation. -applied on site must meet the applicable VOC limits of the California Air Resources Board (CARB) 2007, Suggested Control Measure (SCM) for Architectural Coatings, or the South Coast Air Quality Management District (SCAQMD) Rule 1113, effective June 3, 2011. -applied on site must meet the applicable chemical content requirements of SCAQMD Rule 1168, July 1, 2005, Adhesive and Sealant Applications, as analyzed by the methods specified in Rule 1168. The provisions of SCAQMD Rule 1168 do not apply to adhesives and sealants subject to state or federal
  • 269. consumer product VOC regulations. and sealants wet-applied on site must either meet the technical requirements of the above regulations, or comply with applicable national VOC control regulations, such as the European Decopaint Directive (2004/42/EC), the Canadian VOC Concentration Limits for Architectural Coatings, or the Hong Kong Air Pollution Control (VOC) Regulation. traction of exempt compounds, any content of intentionally added exempt compounds larger than 1% weight by mass (total exempt compounds) must be disclosed. testing of VOC content must comply with ASTM D2369-10; ISO 11890, part 1; ASTM D6886-03; or ISO 11890-2. perchloroethylene may not be intentionally added in paints, coatings, adhesives, or sealants. Composite Wood Evaluation. Composite wood, as defined by the California Air Resources Board, Airborne Toxic Measure to Reduce Formaldehyde Emissions from Composite Wood Products Regulation, must be documented to have low formaldehyde emissions that meet the California Air Resources Board ATCM for formaldehyde requirements for ultra-low-emitting formaldehyde (ULEF) resins or no added
  • 270. formaldehyde resins. Salvaged and reused architectural millwork more than one year old at the time of occupancy is considered compliant, provided it meets the requirements for any site-applied paints, coatings, adhesives, and sealants. Furniture evaluation. New furniture and furnishing items must be tested in accordance with ANSI/BIFMA Standard Method M7.1–2011. Comply with ANSI/BIFMA e3- 2011 Furniture Sustainability Standard, 122 Updated to reflect the April 14, 2017 LEED v4 Building Design and Construction Addenda Sections 7.6.1 (for half credit, by cost) OR 7.6.2 (for full credit, by cost), using either the concentration modeling approach or the emissions factor approach. Model the test results using the open plan, private office, or seating scenario in ANSI/BIFMA M7.1, as appropriate. USGBC-approved equivalent testing methodologies and contaminant thresholds are also acceptable. For classroom furniture, use the standard school classroom model in CDPH Standard Method v1.1. Documentation submitted for furniture must indicate the modeling scenario used to determine compliance. Salvaged and reused furniture more than one year old at the time of use is considered compliant, provided it meets the requirements for any site-applied paints,
  • 271. coatings, adhesives, and sealants. Healthcare, Schools only Additional insulation requirements. Batt insulation products may contain no added formaldehyde, including urea formaldehyde, phenol formaldehyde, and urea- extended phenol formaldehyde. Exterior applied products. Adhesives, sealants, coatings, roofing, and waterproofing materials applied on site must meet the VOC limits of California Air Resources Board (CARB) 2007 Suggested Control Measure (SCM) for Architectural Coatings, and South Coast Air Quality Management District (SCAQMD), Rule 1168, effective July 1, 2005. Small containers of adhesives and sealants subject to state or federal consumer product VOC regulations are exempt. Projects outside North America may use either the jurisdictional VOC content requirements or comply with the European Decopaint Directive (2004/42/EC, to be updated to most current version when available) Phase II, for water-borne coatings, as analyzed according to ISO 11890 parts 1 and 2, instead of the CARB and SCAQMD regulatory standards. Two materials are prohibited and do not count toward total percentage compliance: hot-mopped asphalt for roofing, and coal tar sealants for parking lots and other paved surfaces. 123
  • 272. Updated to reflect the April 14, 2017 LEED v4 Building Design and Construction Addenda EQ CREDIT: CONSTRUCTION INDOOR AIR QUALITY MANAGEMENT PLAN BD&C 1 point This credit applies to Intent To promote the well-being of construction workers and building occupants by minimizing indoor air quality problems associated with construction and renovation. Requirements NC, CS, SCHOOLS, RETAIL, DATA CENTERS, WAREHOUSES & DISTRIBUTION CENTERS, HOSPITALITY
  • 273. Develop and implement an indoor air quality (IAQ) management plan for the construction and preoccupancy phases of the building. The plan must address all of the following. During construction, meet or exceed all applicable recommended control measures of the Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning National Contractors Association (SMACNA) IAQ Guidelines for Occupied Buildings under Construction, 2nd edition, 2007, ANSI/SMACNA 008– 2008, Chapter 3. Protect absorptive materials stored on-site and installed from moisture damage. Do not operate permanently installed air-handling equipment during construction unless filtration media with a minimum efficiency reporting value (MERV) of 8, as determined by ASHRAE 52.2–2007, with errata (or equivalent filtration media class of F5 or higher, as defined by CEN Standard EN 779–2002, Particulate Air Filters for General Ventilation, Determination of the Filtration Performance), are installed at each return air grille and return or transfer duct inlet opening such that there is no bypass around the filtration media. Immediately before occupancy, replace all filtration media with the final design filtration media, installed in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations. Prohibit the use of tobacco products inside the building and within 25 feet (7.5 meters) of the building entrance during construction. HEALTHCARE
  • 274. Moisture. Develop and implement a moisture control plan to protect stored on-site and installed absorptive materials from moisture damage. Immediately remove from site and properly dispose of any materials susceptible to microbial growth and replace with new, undamaged materials. Also include strategies for protecting the building from moisture intrusion and preventing occupants’ exposure to mold spores. Particulates. Do not operate permanently installed air-handling equipment during construction unless filtration media with a minimum efficiency reporting value (MERV) of 8, as determined by ASHRAE 52.2– 2007, with errata (or equivalent filtration media class of F5 or higher, as defined by CEN Standard EN 779–2002, Particulate Air Filters for General Ventilation, Determination of the Filtration Performance), are installed at each return air grille and return or transfer duct inlet opening such that there is no bypass 124 Updated to reflect the April 14, 2017 LEED v4 Building Design and Construction Addenda around the filtration media. Immediately before occupancy, replace all filtration media with the final design filtration media, installed in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations. VOCs. Schedule construction procedures to minimize exposure of absorbent materials to VOC emissions.
  • 275. Complete painting and sealing before storing or installing “dry” materials, which may accumulate pollutants and release them over time. Store fuels, solvents, and other sources of VOCs separately from absorbent materials. Outdoor emissions. For renovation projects involving waterproofing, repairing asphalt roofing, sealing parking lots, or other outdoor activities that generate high VOC emissions, develop a plan to manage fumes and avoid infiltration to occupied spaces. Comply with the procedures established by NIOSH, Asphalt Fume Exposures during the Application of Hot Asphalt to Roofs (Publication 2003–112). Tobacco. Prohibit the use of tobacco products inside the building and within 25 feet (7.5 meters) of the building entrance during construction. Noise and vibration. Develop a plan based on the British Standard (BS 5228) to reduce noise emissions and vibrations from construction equipment and other nonroad engines by specifying low-noise emission design or the lowest decibel level available that meets performance requirements in the British Standard. Construction crews must wear ear protection in areas where sound levels exceed 85 dB for extended periods. Infection control. For renovations and additions adjacent to occupied facilities or phased occupancy in new construction, follow the FGI 2010 Guidelines for Design and Construction of Health Care Facilities and the Joint Commission on Standards to establish an integrative infection control team comprising the owner, designer, and contractor to evaluate infection control
  • 276. risk and document the required precautions in a project-specific plan. Use the infection control risk assessment standard published by the American Society of Healthcare Engineering and the U.S. Centers for Disease Control and Prevention (CDC) as a guideline to assess risk and to select mitigation procedures for construction activities. 125 Updated to reflect the April 14, 2017 LEED v4 Building Design and Construction Addenda EQ CREDIT: INDOOR AIR QUALITY ASSESSMENT BD&C 1–2 points This credit applies to –2 points) –2 points) –2 points) –2 points) –2 points) –2 points) –2 points)
  • 277. Intent To establish better quality indoor air in the building after construction and during occupancy. Requirements NC, SCHOOLS, RETAIL, DATA CENTERS, WAREHOUSES & DISTRIBUTION CENTERS, HOSPITALITY, HEALTHCARE Select one of the following two options, to be implemented after construction ends and the building has been completely cleaned. All interior finishes, such as millwork, doors, paint, carpet, acoustic tiles, and movable furnishings (e.g., workstations, partitions), must be installed, and major VOC punch list items must be finished. The options cannot be combined. Option 1. Flush-Out (1 point) Path 1. Before Occupancy Install new filtration media and perform a building flush-out by supplying a total air volume of 14,000 cubic feet of outdoor air per square foot (4 267 140 liters of outdoor air per square meter) of gross floor area while maintaining an internal temperature of at least 60°F relative humidity no higher than 60%. OR Path 2. During Occupancy If occupancy is desired before the flush-out is completed, the space may be occupied only after delivery of a minimum of 3,500 cubic feet of outdoor air per square foot
  • 278. (1 066 260 liters of outdoor air per square meter) of gross floor area while maintaining an internal temperature of at least 60°F (15°C) and no higher Once the space is occupied, it must be ventilated at a minimum rate of 0.30 cubic foot per minute (cfm) per square foot of outdoor air (1.5 liters per second per square meter of outside air) or the design minimum outdoor air rate determined in EQ Prerequisite Minimum Indoor Air Quality Performance, whichever is greater. During each day of the flush-out period, ventilation must begin at least three hours before occupancy and continue during occupancy. These conditions must be maintained until a total of 14,000 cubic feet per square foot of outdoor air (4 270 liters of outdoor air per square meter) has been delivered to the space. OR Option 2. Air Testing (2 points) After construction ends and before occupancy, but under ventilation conditions typical for occupancy, conduct baseline IAQ testing using protocols consistent with the methods listed in Table 1 for all occupied spaces. Use current versions of ASTM standard methods, EPA compendium methods, or ISO methods, as indicated. Laboratories that conduct the tests for chemical analysis of formaldehyde and volatile 126
  • 279. Updated to reflect the April 14, 2017 LEED v4 Building Design and Construction Addenda organic compounds must be accredited under ISO/IEC 17025 for the test methods they use. Retail projects may conduct the testing within 14 days of occupancy. Demonstrate that contaminants do not exceed the concentration levels listed in Table 1. Table 1. Maximum concentration levels, by contaminant and testing method Contaminant Maximum concentration ASTM and U.S. EPA methods ISO method Particulates PM10 (for all buildings) 50 μg/m3 Healthcare only: 20
  • 280. μg/m3 EPA Compendium Method IP-10 ISO 7708 PM2.5 (for buildings in EPA nonattainment areas for PM2.5, or local equivalent) 15 μg/m3 Ozone (for buildings in EPA nonattainment areas for Ozone, or local equivalent) 0.075 ppm ASTM D5149 - 02 ISO 13964 Carbon monoxide (CO) 9 ppm; no more than 2 ppm above outdoor levels EPA Compendium Method IP-3 ISO 4224 Total volatile organic compounds (TVOCs) 500 μg/m3 Healthcare only: 200 μg/m3 EPA TO-1, TO-17, or EPA Compendium
  • 281. Method IP-1 ISO 16000-6 Formaldehyde 27 ppb Healthcare only: 16.3 ppb ASTM D5197, EPA TO- 11, or EPA Compendium Method IP-6 ISO 16000-3 Target volatile organic compounds* 1 Acetaldehyde 140 μg/m3 2 Benzene 3 μg/m3 ASTM D5197; EPA TO-1, TO-17, or EPA Compendium Method IP-1
  • 282. ISO 16000-3, ISO 16000-6 3 Carbon disulfide 800 μg/m3 4 Carbon tetrachloride 40 μg/m3 5 Chlorobenzene 1000 μg/m3 6 Chloroform 300 μg/m3 7 Dichlorobenzene (1,4-) 800μg/m3 8 Dichloroethylene (1,1) 70 μg/m3 9 Dimethylformamide (N,N-) 80 μg/m3 10 Dioxane (1,4-) 3000 μg/m3 11 Epichlorohydrin 3 μg/m3 12 Ethylbenzene 2000 μg/m3 13 Ethylene glycol 400 μg/m3 14 Ethylene glycol monoethyl ether 70 μg/m3 15 Ethylene glycol monoethyl ether acetate 300 μg/m3
  • 283. 16 Ethylene glycol monomethyl ether 60 μg/m3 17 Ethylene glycol monomethyl ether acetate 90 μg/m3 127 Updated to reflect the April 14, 2017 LEED v4 Building Design and Construction Addenda 19 Hexane (n-) 7000 μg/m3 20 Isophorone 2000 μg/m3 21 Isopropanol 7000 μg/m3 22 Methyl chloroform 1000 μg/m3 23 Methylene chloride 400 μg/m3 24 Methyl t-butyl ether 8000 μg/m3 25 Naphthalene 9 μg/m3 26 Phenol 200 μg/m3
  • 284. 27 Propylene glycol monomethyl ether 7000 μg/m3 28 Styrene 900 μg/m3 29 Tetrachloroethylene (Perchloroethylene) 35 μg/m3 30 Toluene 300 μg/m3 31 Trichloroethylene 600 μg/m3 32 Vinyl acetate 200 μg/m3 33- 35 Xylenes, technical mixture (m-, o-, p-xylene combined) 700 μg/m3 ppb = parts per billion; ppm = parts per million; μg/cm = micrograms per cubic meter *The target volatile organic compounds are from CDPH Standard Method v1.1, Table 4-1. The Maximum concentration limits for these target compounds are the full CREL adopted by Cal/EPA OEHHA in effect on June
  • 285. 2014 http://oehha.ca.gov/air/allrels.html. Conduct all measurements before occupancy but during normal occupied hours, with the building ventilation system started at the normal daily start time and operated at the minimum outdoor airflow rate for the occupied mode throughout the test. For each sampling point where the concentration exceeds the limit, take corrective action and retest for the noncompliant contaminants at the same sampling points. Repeat until all requirements are met. http://oehha.ca.gov/air/allrels.html 128 Updated to reflect the April 14, 2017 LEED v4 Building Design and Construction Addenda EQ CREDIT: THERMAL COMFORT BD&C 1 point This credit applies to
  • 286. Intent To promote occupants’ productivity, comfort, and well-being by providing quality thermal comfort. Requirements Meet the requirements for both thermal comfort design and thermal comfort control. Thermal Comfort Design NC, SCHOOLS, RETAIL, DATA CENTERS, HOSPITALITY, HEALTHCARE Option 1. ASHRAE Standard 55-2010 Design heating, ventilating, and air-conditioning (HVAC) systems and the building envelope to meet the requirements of ASHRAE Standard 55–2010, Thermal Comfort Conditions for Human Occupancy with errata or a local equivalent. For natatoriums, demonstrate compliance with ASHRAE HVAC Applications Handbook, 2011 edition, Chapter 5, Places of Assembly, Typical Natatorium Design Conditions, with errata. OR
  • 287. Option 2. ISO and CEN Standards Design HVAC systems and the building envelope to meet the requirements of the applicable standard: analytical determination and interpretation of thermal comfort, using calculation of the PMV and PPD indices and local thermal comfort criteria; and Parameters for Design and Assessment of Energy Performance of Buildings, addressing indoor air quality, thermal environment, lighting, and acoustics, Section A2. Data Centers only Meet the above requirements for regularly occupied spaces. WAREHOUSES & DISTRIBUTION CENTERS Meet the above requirements for office portions of the building. In regularly occupied areas of the building’s bulk storage, sorting, and distribution areas, include one or more of the following design alternatives:
  • 288. 129 Updated to reflect the April 14, 2017 LEED v4 Building Design and Construction Addenda time air, heat venting, or wind flow; -based systems) or heating systems; and -wired fans that provide air movement for occupants’ comfort. tegy. Thermal Comfort Control NC, SCHOOLS, RETAIL, DATA CENTERS, WAREHOUSES & DISTRIBUTION CENTERS, HOSPITALITY Provide individual thermal comfort controls for at least 50% of individual occupant spaces. Provide group thermal comfort controls for all shared multioccupant spaces. Thermal comfort controls allow occupants, whether in individual spaces or shared multioccupant spaces, to adjust at least one of the following in their local environment: air temperature, radiant temperature, air speed, and humidity. Hospitality only Guest rooms are assumed to provide adequate thermal comfort
  • 289. controls and are therefore not included in the credit calculations. Retail only Meet the above requirements for at least 50% of the individual occupant spaces in office and administrative areas. HEALTHCARE Provide individual thermal comfort controls for every patient room and at least 50% of the remaining individual occupant spaces. Provide group thermal comfort controls for all shared multioccupant spaces. Thermal comfort controls allow occupants, whether in individual spaces or shared multioccupant spaces, to adjust at least one of the following in their local environment: air temperature, radiant temperature, air speed, and humidity. 130 Updated to reflect the April 14, 2017 LEED v4 Building Design and Construction Addenda EQ CREDIT: INTERIOR LIGHTING BD&C 1–2 points This credit applies to
  • 290. –2 points) –2 points) –2 points) –2 points) –2 points) Intent To promote occupants’ productivity, comfort, and well-being by providing high-quality lighting. Requirements NC, SCHOOLS, DATA CENTERS, WAREHOUSES & DISTRIBUTION CENTERS, HOSPITALITY Select one or both of the following two options. Option 1. Lighting Control (1 point) For at least 90% of individual occupant spaces, provide individual lighting controls that enable occupants to adjust the lighting to suit their individual tasks and preferences, with at least three lighting levels or scenes (on, off, midlevel). Midlevel is 30% to 70% of the maximum illumination level (not including daylight contributions).
  • 291. For all shared multioccupant spaces, meet all of the following requirements. occupants to adjust the lighting to meet group needs and preferences, with at least three lighting levels or scenes (on, off, midlevel). separately controlled. space as the controlled luminaires. A person operating the controls must have a direct line of sight to the controlled luminaires. Hospitality only Guest rooms are assumed to provide adequate lighting controls and are therefore not included in the credit calculations. AND/OR Option 2. Lighting Quality (1 point) Choose four of the following strategies. A. For all regularly occupied spaces, use light fixtures with a luminance of less than 2,500 cd/m2 between 45 and 90 degrees from nadir. Exceptions include wallwash fixtures properly aimed at walls, as specified by manufacturer’s data,
  • 292. indirect uplighting fixtures, provided there is no view down into these uplights from a regularly occupied space above, and any other specific applications (i.e. adjustable fixtures). B. For the entire project, use light sources with a CRI of 80 or higher. Exceptions include lamps or fixtures specifically designed to provide colored lighting for effect, site lighting, or other special use. C. For at least 75% of the total connected lighting load, use light sources that have a rated life (or L70 for LED sources) of at least 24,000 hours (at 3-hour per start, if applicable). 131 Updated to reflect the April 14, 2017 LEED v4 Building Design and Construction Addenda D. Use direct-only overhead lighting for 25% or less of the total connected lighting load for all regularly occupied spaces. E. For at least 90% of the regularly occupied floor area, meet or exceed the following thresholds for area-weighted average surface reflectance: 85% for ceilings, 60% for walls, and 25% for floors. F. If furniture is included in the scope of work, select furniture finishes to meet or exceed the following thresholds for area-weighted average surface reflectance: 45% for work surfaces, and 50% for movable partitions.
  • 293. G. For at least 75% of the regularly occupied floor area, meet a ratio of average wall surface illuminance (excluding fenestration) to average work plane (or surface, if defined) illuminance that does not exceed 1:10. Must also meet strategy E, strategy F, or demonstrate area-weighted surface reflectance of at least 60% for walls. H. For at least 75% of the regularly occupied floor area, meet a ratio of average ceiling illuminance (excluding fenestration) to work surface illuminance that does not exceed 1:10. Must also meet strategy E, strategy F, or demonstrate area-weighted surface reflectance of at least 85% for ceilings. RETAIL NC For at least 90% of the individual occupant spaces in office and administrative areas, provide individual lighting controls. In sales areas, provide controls that can reduce the ambient light levels to a midlevel (30% to 70% of the maximum illumination level not including daylight contributions). HEALTHCARE Provide individual lighting controls for at least 90% of individual occupant spaces in staff areas. For at least 90% of patient positions, provide lighting controls that are readily accessible from the patient’s bed. In multioccupant patient spaces, the controls must be
  • 294. individual lighting controls. In private rooms, also provide exterior window shades, blinds, or curtain controls that are readily accessible from the patient’s bed. Exceptions include in-patient critical care, pediatric, and psychiatric patient rooms. For all shared multioccupant spaces, provide multizone control systems that enable occupants to adjust the lighting to meet group needs and preferences, with at least three lighting levels or scenes (on, off, midlevel). Midlevel is 30% to 70% of the maximum illumination level (not including daylight contributions). 132 Updated to reflect the April 14, 2017 LEED v4 Building Design and Construction Addenda EQ CREDIT: DAYLIGHT BD&C 1–3 points This credit applies to –3 points) –3 points) chools (1–3 points) –3 points) –3 points)
  • 295. –3 points) –3 points) –2 points) Intent To connect building occupants with the outdoors, reinforce circadian rhythms, and reduce the use of electrical lighting by introducing daylight into the space. Requirements NC, CS, SCHOOLS, RETAIL, DATA CENTERS, WAREHOUSES & DISTRIBUTION CENTERS, HOSPITALITY, HEALTHCARE Provide manual or automatic (with manual override) glare- control devices for all regularly occupied spaces. Select one of the following three options. Option 1. Simulation: Spatial Daylight Autonomy and Annual Sunlight Exposure (2–3 points, 1-2 points Healthcare) Demonstrate through annual computer simulations that spatial daylight autonomy300/50% (sDA300/50%) of at least 55%, 75%, or 90% is achieved. Use regularly occupied floor area. Healthcare projects should use the perimeter area determined under EQ Credit Quality Views. Points are awarded according to Table 1.
  • 296. Table 1. Points for daylit floor area: Spatial daylight autonomy New Construction, Core and Shell, Schools, Retail, Data Centers, Warehouses and Distribution Centers, Hospitality Healthcare sDA (for regularly occupied floor area) Points sDA (for perimeter floor area) Points 55% 2 75% 1 75% 3 90% 2 AND Demonstrate through annual computer simulations that annual sunlight exposure1000,250 (ASE1000,250) of no more than 10% is achieved. Use the regularly occupied floor area that is daylit per the sDA300/50% simulations. The sDA and ASE calculation grids should be no more than 2 feet (600 millimeters) square and laid out across the regularly occupied area at a work plane height of 30 inches (76 millimeters) above finished floor (unless otherwise defined). Use an hourly time-step analysis based on typical meteorological year
  • 297. 133 Updated to reflect the April 14, 2017 LEED v4 Building Design and Construction Addenda data, or an equivalent, for the nearest available weather station. Include any permanent interior obstructions. Moveable furniture and partitions may be excluded. CS only If the finishes in the space will not be completed, use the following default surface reflectances: 80% for ceilings, 20% for floors, and 50% for walls. Assume that the entire floor plate, except for the core, will be regularly occupied space. OR Option 2. Simulation: Illuminance Calculations (1–2 points) Demonstrate through computer modeling that illuminance levels will be between 300 lux and 3,000 lux for 9 a.m. and 3 p.m., both on a clear-sky day at the equinox, for the floor area indicated in Table 2. Use regularly occupied floor area. Healthcare projects should use the perimeter area determined under EQ Credit Quality Views. Table 2. Points for daylit floor area: Illuminance calculation New Construction, Core and Shell, Schools, Retail, Data Centers, Warehouses and Distribution Centers, Hospitality Healthcare Percentage of regularly occupied floor area Points
  • 298. Percentage of perimeter floor area Points 75% 1 75% 1 90% 2 90% 2 Calculate illuminance intensity for sun (direct component) and sky (diffuse component) for clear-sky conditions as follows: eorological year data, or an equivalent, for the nearest available weather station. within 15 days of March 21 that represent the clearest sky condition. e for the two selected days. Exclude blinds or shades from the model. Include any permanent interior obstructions. Moveable furniture and partitions may be excluded. CS only Assume the following default surface reflectances if the finishes in the space will not be completed: 80% for ceilings, 20% for floors, and 50% for walls. Assume that the entire floor plate, except for the core, will be regularly occupied space. OR Option 3. Measurement (2-3 points, 1-2 points Healthcare)
  • 299. Achieve illuminance levels between 300 lux and 3,000 lux for the floor area indicated in Table 3. Table 3. Points for daylit floor area: Measurement New Construction, Core and Schools, Schools, Retail, Data Centers, Warehouses and Distribution Centers, Hospitality Healthcare Percentage of regularly occupied floor area Points Percentage of perimeter floor area 75 2 75 1 90 3 90 2 134 Updated to reflect the April 14, 2017 LEED v4 Building Design and Construction Addenda With furniture, fixtures, and equipment in place, measure illuminance levels as follows: between 9 a.m. and 3 p.m.
  • 300. take a second as indicated in Table 4. take measurements on a maximum 10 foot (3 meter) square grid. measurements on a maximum 3 foot (900 millimeters) square grid. Table 4. Timing of measurements for illuminance If first measurement is taken in … take second measurement in … January May-September February June-October March June-July, November-December April August-December May September-January June October-February July November-March August December-April September December-January, May-June October February-June
  • 301. November March-July December April-August 135 Updated to reflect the April 14, 2017 LEED v4 Building Design and Construction Addenda EQ CREDIT: QUALITY VIEWS BD&C 1–2 points This credit applies to enters (1 point) -2 points)
  • 302. Intent To give building occupants a connection to the natural outdoor environment by providing quality views. Requirements NC, CS, SCHOOLS, RETAIL, DATA CENTERS, HOSPITALITY Achieve a direct line of sight to the outdoors via vision glazing for 75% of all regularly occupied floor area. View glazing in the contributing area must provide a clear image of the exterior, not obstructed by frits, fibers, patterned glazing, or added tints that distort color balance. Additionally, 75% of all regularly occupied floor area must have at least two of the following four kinds of views: at least 90 degrees apart; fauna, or sky; (2) movement; and (3) objects at least 25 feet (7.5 meters) from the exterior of the glazing; the head height of the vision glazing; and “Windows and Offices; A Study of Office Worker Performance and the Indoor Environment.”
  • 303. Include in the calculations any permanent interior obstructions. Movable furniture and partitions may be excluded. Views into interior atria may be used to meet up to 30% of the required area. WAREHOUSES & DISTRIBUTION CENTERS For the office portion of the building, meet the requirements above. For the bulk storage, sorting, and distribution portions of the building, meet the requirements above for 25% of the regularly occupied floor area. HEALTHCARE For inpatient units (IPUs), meet the requirements above (1 point). For other areas, configure the building floor plates such that the floor area within 15 feet (4.5 meters) of the perimeter exceeds the perimeter area requirement (Table 1), and meet the requirements above for the perimeter area (1 point). 136 Updated to reflect the April 14, 2017 LEED v4 Building Design and Construction Addenda
  • 304. Table 1. Minimum compliant perimeter area, by floor plate area Floor plate area Perimeter area (square feet) (square meters) (square feet) (square meters) Up to 15,000 Up to 1 400 7,348 682 20,000 1 800 8,785 816 25,000 2 300 10,087 937 30,000 2 800 11,292 1 049 35,000 3 300 12,425 1 154 40,000 3 700 13,500 1 254 45,000 4 200 14,528 1 349 50,000 and larger 4 600 and larger 15,516 1 441 137 Updated to reflect the April 14, 2017 LEED v4 Building Design and Construction Addenda EQ CREDIT: ACOUSTIC PERFORMANCE BD&C 1–2 points This credit applies to
  • 305. t) –2 points) Intent To provide workspaces and classrooms that promote occupants’ well-being, productivity, and communications through effective acoustic design. Requirements NC, DATA CENTERS, WAREHOUSES & DISTRIBUTION CENTERS, HOSPITALITY For all occupied spaces, meet the following requirements, as applicable, for HVAC background noise, sound isolation, reverberation time, and sound reinforcement and masking. HVAC Background Noise Achieve maximum background noise levels from heating, ventilating, and air conditioning (HVAC) systems per 2011 ASHRAE Handbook, HVAC Applications, Chapter 48, Table 1; AHRI Standard 885- 2008, Table 15; or a local equivalent. Calculate or measure sound levels.
  • 306. For measurements, use a sound level meter that conforms to ANSI S1.4 for type 1 (precision) or type 2 (general purpose) sound measurement instrumentation, or a local equivalent. Comply with design criteria for HVAC noise levels resulting from the sound transmission paths listed in ASHRAE 2011 Applications Handbook, Table 6; or a local equivalent. Sound Transmission Meet the composite sound transmission class (STCC) ratings listed in Table 1, or local building code, whichever is more stringent. Table 1. Minimum composite sound transmission class ratings for adjacent spaces Adjacency combinations STCC Residence (within a multifamily residence), hotel or motel room Residence, hotel or motel room 55 Residence, hotel or motel room Common hallway, stairway 50 Residence, hotel or motel room Retail 60 Retail Retail 50 Standard office Standard office 45 Executive office Executive office 50
  • 307. Conference room Conference room 50 Office, conference room Hallway, stairway 50 Mechanical equipment room Occupied area 60 Reverberation Time 138 Updated to reflect the April 14, 2017 LEED v4 Building Design and Construction Addenda Meet the reverberation time requirements in Table 2 (adapted from Table 9.1 in the Performance Measurement Protocols for Commercial Buildings3). Table 2. Reverberation time requirements Room type Application T60 (sec), at 500 Hz, 1000 Hz, and 2000 Hz Apartment and condominium — < 0.6 Hotel/motel Individual room or suite < 0.6 Meeting or banquet room < 0.8 Office building Executive or private office < 0.6 Conference room < 0.6
  • 308. Teleconference room < 0.6 Open-plan office without sound masking < 0.8 Open-plan office with sound masking 0.8 Courtroom Unamplified speech < 0.7 Amplified speech < 1.0 Performing arts space Drama theaters, concert and recital halls Varies by application Laboratories Testing or research with minimal speech communication < 1.0 Extensive phone use and speech communication < 0.6 Church, mosque, synagogue General assembly with critical
  • 309. music program Varies by application Library < 1.0 Indoor stadium, gymnasium Gymnasium and natatorium < 2.0 Large-capacity space with speech amplification < 1.5 Classroom — < 0.6 Sound Reinforcement and Masking Systems Sound Reinforcement For all large conference rooms and auditoriums seating more than 50 persons, evaluate whether sound reinforcement and AV playback capabilities are needed. If needed, the sound reinforcement systems must meet the following criteria: common intelligibility scale (CIS) rating of at least 0.77 at representative points within the area of coverage to provide acceptable intelligibility. -level coverage within +/–3 dB at the 2000 Hz
  • 310. octave band throughout the space. Masking Systems For projects that use masking systems, the design levels must not exceed 48 dBA. Ensure that loudspeaker coverage provides uniformity of +/–2 dBA and that speech spectra are effectively masked. SCHOOLS 3 Adapted from ASHRAE (2007d), ASA (2008), ANSI (2002), and CEN (2007) 139 Updated to reflect the April 14, 2017 LEED v4 Building Design and Construction Addenda HVAC Background noise Achieve a background noise level of 35 dBA or less from heating, ventilating, and air-conditioning (HVAC) systems in classrooms and other core learning spaces. Follow the recommended methodologies and best practices for mechanical system noise control in ANSI Standard S12.60–2010, Part 1, Annex A.1; the 2011 HVAC Applications ASHRAE Handbook, Chapter 48, Sound and Vibration Control, with errata; AHRI Standard 885–2008; or a local equivalent. Sound Transmission Design classrooms and other core learning spaces to meet the sound transmission class (STC)
  • 311. requirements of ANSI S12.60–2010 Part 1, or a local equivalent. Exterior windows must have an STC rating of at least 35, unless outdoor and indoor noise levels can be verified to justify a lower rating. HEALTHCARE Design the facility to meet or exceed the sound and vibration criteria outlined below, which are adapted from the 2010 FGI Guidelines for Design and Construction of Health Care Facilities (“2010 FGI Guidelines”) and the reference document on which it is based, Sound and Vibration Design Guidelines for Health Care Facilities (“2010 SV Guidelines”). Option 1. Speech Privacy, Sound Isolation, and Background Noise (1 point) Speech Privacy and Sound Isolation Design sound isolation to achieve speech privacy, acoustical comfort, and minimal annoyance from noise-producing sources. Consider sound levels at both source and receiver locations, the background sound at receiver locations, and the occupants’ acoustical privacy and acoustical comfort needs. Speech privacy is defined as “techniques … to render speech unintelligible to casual listeners” (ANSI T1.523- 2001, Telecom Glossary 2007). Design the facility to meet the criteria outlined in the sections of Table 1.2-3, Design Criteria for Minimum Sound Isolation Performance between Enclosed Rooms, and Table 1.2-4 Speech Privacy for Enclosed Room and Open-Plan Spaces (in the 2010 FGI Guidelines and 2010 SV Guidelines).
  • 312. Calculate or measure sound isolation and speech privacy descriptors achieved for representative adjacencies as necessary to confirm compliance with the criteria in the 2010 FGI Guidelines, Sections1.2- 6.1.5 and 1.2-6.1.6, and the 2010 SV Guidelines (including the appendix). Background Noise Consider background noise levels generated by all building mechanical-electrical-plumbing systems, air distribution systems and other facility noise sources under the purview of the project building design- construction team. Design the facility to meet the 2010 FGI Guidelines, Table 1.2- 2 Minimum-Maximum Design Criteria for Noise in representative interior rooms and spaces. Calculate or measure sound levels in representative rooms and spaces of each type to confirm compliance with criteria in the above-referenced table using a sound level meter that conforms to ANSI S1.4 for type 1 (precision) or type 2 (general purpose) sound measurement instrumentation. For spaces not listed in Table 1.2-2, refer to ASHRAE 2011 Handbook, Chapter 48, Sound and Vibration Control, Table 1. Option 2. Acoustical Finishes and Site Exterior Noise (1 point) Meet the requirements for acoustical finishes and site exterior noise. Acoustical Finishes Specify materials, products systems installation details, and other design features to meet the 2010 FGI Guidelines, Table 1.2-1, Design Room Sound Absorption
  • 313. Coefficients (including associated sections of the appendix) and the 2010 SV Guidelines. 140 Updated to reflect the April 14, 2017 LEED v4 Building Design and Construction Addenda Calculate or measure the average sound absorption coefficients for representative unoccupied rooms of each type in the building to confirm conformance with the requirements. Site Exterior Noise Minimize the effect on building occupants of site exterior noise produced by road traffic, aircraft flyovers, railroads, on-site heliports, emergency power generators during maintenance testing, outdoor facility MEP and building services equipment, etc. Also minimize effects on the surrounding community from all facility MEP equipment and activities as required to meet (1) local applicable codes or (2) Table 1.2-1 of the 2010 FGI Guidelines, Table 1.2-1, and the 2010 SV Guidelines, Table 1.3-1, whichever is more stringent. Comply with the 2010 FGI Guidelines for the following noise sources: -3.6.2.2; -8.3.3.1; -8.2.1.1; and -5.3
  • 314. Measure and analyze data to determine the exterior noise classification (A, B, C, or D) of the facility site. See the 2010 FGI Guidelines, Categorization of Health Care Facility Sites by Exterior Ambient Sound, Table A1.2a, and the 2010 SV Guidelines, Table 1.3-1. Design the building envelope composite STC rating based on the 2010 FGI Guidelines, Categorization of Health Care Facility Sites by Exterior Ambient Sound, and show conformance with requirements. For exterior site exposure categories B, C, or D, calculate or measure the sound isolation performance of representative elements of the exterior building envelope to determine the composite sound transmission class (STCc) rating for representative façade sections. Measurements should generally conform to ASTM E966, Standard Guide for Field Measurements of Airborne Sound Insulation of Building Façades and Façade Elements, current edition. 141 Updated to reflect the April 14, 2017 LEED v4 Building Design and Construction Addenda INNOVATION (IN) IN CREDIT: INNOVATION
  • 315. BD&C 1–5 points This credit applies to –5 points) –5 points) –5 points) –5 points) ters (1–5 points) –5 points) –5 points) –5 points) Intent To encourage projects to achieve exceptional or innovative performance. Requirements NC, CS, SCHOOLS, RETAIL, DATA CENTERS, WAREHOUSES & DISTRIBUTION CENTERS, HOSPITALITY, HEALTHCARE Project teams can use any combination of innovation, pilot, and exemplary performance strategies.
  • 316. Option 1. Innovation (1 point) Achieve significant, measurable environmental performance using a strategy not addressed in the LEED green building rating system. Identify the following: ; and requirements. AND/OR Option 2. Pilot (1 point) Achieve one pilot credit from USGBC’s LEED Pilot Credit Library. AND/OR Option 3. Additional Strategies -3 points) Defined in Option 1 above. -3 points) Meet the requirements of Option 2. –2 points) Achieve exemplary performance in an existing LEED v4 prerequisite or credit that allows
  • 317. exemplary performance, as specified in the LEED Reference Guide, v4 edition. An exemplary 142 Updated to reflect the April 14, 2017 LEED v4 Building Design and Construction Addenda performance point is typically earned for achieving double the credit requirements or the next incremental percentage threshold. 143 Updated to reflect the April 14, 2017 LEED v4 Building Design and Construction Addenda IN CREDIT: LEED ACCREDITED PROFESSIONAL BD&C 1 point This credit applies to nt)
  • 318. Intent To encourage the team integration required by a LEED project and to streamline the application and certification process. Requirements NC, CS, SCHOOLS, RETAIL NC, DATA CENTERS, WAREHOUSES & DISTRIBUTION CENTERS, HOSPITALITY, HEALTHCARE At least one principal participant of the project team must be a LEED Accredited Professional (AP) with a specialty appropriate for the project. 144 Updated to reflect the April 14, 2017 LEED v4 Building Design and Construction Addenda
  • 319. REGIONAL PRIORITY (RP) RP CREDIT: REGIONAL PRIORITY BD&C 4 points This credit applies to -4 points) -4 points) -4 points) -4 points) -4 points) -4 points) -4 points) -4 points) Intent To provide an incentive for the achievement of credits that address geographically specific environmental, social equity, and public health priorities. Requirements
  • 320. NC, CS, SCHOOLS, RETAIL NC, DATA CENTERS, WAREHOUSES & DISTRIBUTION CENTERS, HOSPITALITY, HEALTHCARE Earn up to four of the six Regional Priority credits. These credits have been identified by the USGBC regional councils and chapters as having additional regional importance for the project’s region. A database of Regional Priority credits and their geographic applicability is available on the USGBC website, http://www.usgbc.org. One point is awarded for each Regional Priority credit achieved, up to a maximum of four. http://www.usgbc.org/ 145 Updated to reflect the April 14, 2017 LEED v4 Building Design and Construction Addenda APPENDICES APPENDIX 1. USE TYPES AND CATEGORIES Table 1. Use Types and Categories Category Use type
  • 321. Food retail Supermarket Grocery with produce section Community-serving retail Convenience store Farmers market Hardware store Pharmacy Other retail Services Bank Family entertainment venue (e.g., theater, sports) Gym, health club, exercise studio Hair care Laundry, dry cleaner Restaurant, café, diner (excluding those with only drive-thru service) Civic and community facilities Adult or senior care (licensed) Child care (licensed)
  • 322. Community or recreation center Cultural arts facility (museum, performing arts) Education facility (e.g., K—12 school, university, adult education center, vocational school, community college) Government office that serves public on-site Medical clinic or office that treats patients Place of worship Police or fire station Post office Public library Public park Social services center Community anchor uses (BD&C and ID&C only) Commercial office (100 or more full-time equivalent jobs) Housing (100 or more dwelling units) Adapted from Criterion Planners, INDEX neighborhood
  • 323. completeness indicator, 2005. 146 Updated to reflect the April 14, 2017 LEED v4 Building Design and Construction Addenda APPENDIX 2. DEFAULT OCCUPANCY COUNTS Use Table 1 to calculate default occupancy counts. Only use the occupancy estimates if occupancy is unknown. For the calculation, use gross floor area, not net or leasable floor area. Gross floor area is defined as the sum of all areas on all floors of a building included within the outside faces of the exterior wall, including common areas, mechanical spaces, circulation areas, and all floor penetrations that connect one floor to another. To determine gross floor area, multiply the building footprint (in square feet or square meters) by the number of floors in the building. Exclude underground or structured parking from the calculation. Table 1. Default Occupancy Numbers Gross square feet per occupant Gross square meters per occupant Employees
  • 324. Transients Employees Transients General office 250 0 23 0 Retail, general 550 130 51 12 Retail or service (e.g., financial, auto) 600 130
  • 325. 56 12 Restaurant 435 95 40 9 Grocery store 550 115 51 11 Medical office 225 330 21 31
  • 326. R&D or laboratory 400 0 37 0 Warehouse, distribution 2,500 0 232 0 Warehouse, storage 20,000 0 1860 0 Hotel
  • 327. 1,500 700 139 65 Educational, daycare 630 105 59 10 Educational, K–12 1,300 140 121 13 Educational, postsecondary 2,100 150 195 14 Sources: ANSI/ASHRAE/IESNA Standard 90.1–2004 (Atlanta, GA, 2004). 2001 Uniform Plumbing Code (Los Angeles, CA) California Public Utilities Commission, 2004–2005 Database for Energy Efficiency Resources (DEER) Update Study (2008). California State University, Capital Planning, Design and Construction Section VI, Standards for Campus Development Programs ( Long Beach, CA, 2002). City of Boulder Planning Department, Projecting Future Employment—How Much Space per Person (Boulder, 2002). Metro, 1999 Employment Density Study (Portland, OR 1999). American Hotel and Lodging Association, Lodging Industry
  • 328. Profile Washington, DC, 2008. LEED for Core & Shell Core Committee, personal communication (2003 - 2006). LEED for Retail Core Committee, personal communication (2007) OWP/P, Medical Office Building Project Averages (Chicago, 2008). OWP/P, University Master Plan Projects (Chicago, 2008). U.S. General Services Administration, Childcare Center Design Guide (Washington, DC,2003). 147 Updated to reflect the April 14, 2017 LEED v4 Building Design and Construction Addenda APPENDIX 3. RETAIL PROCESS LOAD BASELINES Table 1a. Commercial kitchen appliance prescriptive measures and baseline for energy cost budget (IP units) Baseline energy usage for energy modeling path Levels for prescriptive path Appliance type Fuel Function Baseline
  • 329. efficiency Baseline idle rate Prescriptive efficiency Prescriptive idle rate Broiler, underfired Gas Cooking 30% 16,000 Btu/h/ft2 peak input 35% 12,000 Btu/h/ft2 peak input Combination ovens, steam mode (P = pan capacity) Elec Cooking 40% steam mode 0.37P+4.5 kW 50% steam mode 0.133P+0.6400 kW Combination
  • 330. ovens, steam mode Gas Cooking 20% steam mode 1,210P+35,810 Btu/h 38% steam mode 200P+6,511 Btu/h Combination ovens, convection mode Elec Cooking 65% convection mode 0.1P+1.5 kW 70% convection mode 0.080P+0.4989 kW Combination ovens, convection mode Gas Cooking
  • 331. 35% convection mode 322P+13,563 Btu/h 44% convection mode 150P+5,425 Btu/h Convection oven, full- size Elec Cooking 65% 2.0 kW 71% 1.6 kW Convection oven, full- size Gas Cooking 30% 18,000 Btu/h 46% 12,000 Btu/h Convection oven, half- size Elec Cooking 65% 1.5 kW 71% 1.0 kW Conveyor oven, > 25- inch belt Gas Cooking 20% 70,000 Btu/h 42% 57,000 Btu/h Conveyor oven, ≤ 25- inch belt Gas Cooking 20% 45,000 Btu/h 42% 29,000 Btu/h Fryer Elec Cooking 75% 1.05 kW 80% 1.0 kW
  • 332. Fryer Gas Cooking 35% 14,000 Btu/h 50% 9,000 Btu/h Griddle (based on 3 ft model) Elec Cooking 60% 400 W/ft2 70% 320 W/ft2 Griddle (based on 3 ft model) Gas Cooking 30% 3,500 Btu/h/ft2 38% 2,650 Btu/h/ft2 Hot food holding Elec Cooking na 40 W/ft3 Na 21.5V Watts 148 Updated to reflect the April 14, 2017 LEED v4 Building Design and Construction Addenda cabinets (excluding drawer warmers and heated display), 0 < V < 13 ft³ (V = volume) Hot food holding cabinets (excluding drawer
  • 333. warmers and heated display), 13 ≤ V < 28 ft³ Elec Cooking na 40 W/ft3 Na 2.0V + 254 Watts Hot food holding cabinets (excluding drawer warmers and heated display), 28 ft³ ≤ V Elec Cooking na 40 W/ft3 Na 3.8V + 203.5 Watts Large vat fryer Elec Cooking 75% 1.35 kW 80% 1.1 kW Large vat fryer Gas Cooking 35% 20,000 Btu/h 50% 12,000 Btu/h Rack oven, double Gas Cooking 30% 65,000 Btu/h 50% 35,000 Btu/h Rack oven, single Gas Cooking 30% 43,000 Btu/h 50% 29,000 Btu/h Range Elec Cooking 70% 80% Range Gas Cooking 35% na 40% and no standing
  • 334. pilots na Steam cooker, batch cooking Elec Cooking 26% 200 W/pan 50% 135 W/pan Steam cooker, batch cooking Gas Cooking 15% 2,500 Btu/h/pan 38% 2,100 Btu/h/pan Steam cooker, high production or cook to order Elec Cooking 26% 330 W/pan 50% 275 W/pan Steam cooker, high production Gas Cooking 15% 5,000 Btu/h/pan 38% 4,300 Btu/h/pan 149 Updated to reflect the April 14, 2017 LEED v4 Building Design and Construction Addenda or cook to order Toaster Elec Cooking —
  • 335. 1.8 kW average operating energy rate Na 1.2 kW average operating energy rate Ice machine, IMH (ice- making head, H = ice harvest), H > 450 lb/day Elec Ice 6.89 - 0.0011H kWh/100 lb ice na 37.72*H-0.298 kWh/100 lb ice na Ice machine, IMH (ice- making head), H < 450 lb/day Elec Ice 10.26 – 0.0086H
  • 336. kWh/100 lb ice na 37.72*H-0.298 kWh/100 lb ice na Ice machine, RCU (remote condensing unit, w/o remote compressor, H < 1,000 lb/day Elec Ice 8.85 - 0.0038H kWh/100lb ice na 22.95*H-0.258 + 1.00 kWh/100 lb ice na Ice machine, RCU (remote condensing unit), 1600 >
  • 337. H > 1000 lb/day Elec ice 5.10 kWh/100 lb ice Na 22.95*H-0.258 + 1.00 kWh/100 lb ice na Ice machine, RCU (remote condensing unit), H ≥ 1600 lb/day Elec Ice 5.10 kWh/100lb ice Na -0.00011*H + 4.60 kWh/100 lb ice na Ice machine, SCU (self- contained unit), H < 175 lb/day Elec Ice
  • 338. 18.0 - 0.0469H kWh/100lb ice Na 48.66*H-0.326 + 0.08 kWh/100 lb ice na Ice machine self- contained unit, H > 175 lb/day Elec Ice 9.80 kWh/100 lb ice Na 48.66*H-0.326 + 0.08 kWh/100 lb ice na 150 Updated to reflect the April 14, 2017 LEED v4 Building Design and Construction Addenda Ice machine, water- cooled ice-
  • 339. making head, H > 1436 lb/day (must be on chilled loop) Elec Ice 4.0 kWh/100 lb ice Na 3.68 kWh/100 lb ice na Ice machine, water- cooled ice- making head, 500 lb/day < H < 1436 (must be on chilled loop) Elec Ice 5.58 – 0.0011H kWh/100 lb ice Na 5.13 - 0.001H kWh/100 lb ice na Ice
  • 340. machine, water- cooled ice- making head, H < 500 lb/day (must be on chilled loop) Elec Ice 7.80 – 0.0055H kWh/100 lb ice Na 7.02 - 0.0049H kWh/100 lb ice na Ice machine, water- cooled once- through (open loop) Elec Ice Banned Banned Banned Banned Ice machine, water- cooled SCU (self- contained unit), H < 200 lb/day (must be on
  • 341. chilled loop) Elec Ice 11.4 – 0.0190H kWh/100 lb ice Na 10.6 - 0.177H kWh/100 lb ice na Ice machine, water- cooled self- contained unit, H > 200 lb/day (must be on chilled loop) Elec Ice 7.6 kWh/100 lb ice Na 7.07 kWh/100 lb ice na 151 Updated to reflect the April 14, 2017 LEED v4 Building Design and Construction Addenda
  • 342. Chest freezer, solid or glass door Elec Refrig 0.45V + 0.943 kWh/day Na ≤ 0.270V + 0.130 kWh/day na Chest refrigerator, solid or glass door Elec Refrig 0.1V + 2.04 kWh/day Na ≤ 0.125V + 0.475 kWh/day na Glass-door reach-in freezer, 0 < V < 15 ft³ Elec Refrig 0.75V + 4.10 kWh/day Na
  • 343. ≤ 0.607V + 0.893 kWh/day na Glass-door reach-in freezer, 15 ≤ V < 30 ft³ Elec Refrig .75V + 4.10 kWh/day Na ≤ 0.733V – 1.00 kWh/day na Glass-door reach-in freezer, 30 ≤ V < 50 ft³ Elec Refrig .75V + 4.10 kWh/day Na ≤ 0.250V + 13.50 kWh/day na Glass-door reach-in freezer, 50 ≤ V ft³ Elec Refrig 0.75V + 4.10
  • 344. kWh/day Na ≤ 0.450V + 3.50 kWh/day na Glass-door reach-in refrigerator, 0 < V < 15 ft³ Elec Refrig 0.12V + 3.34 kWh/day Na ≤ 0.118V + 1.382 kWh/day na Glass-door reach-in refrigerator, 15 ≤ V < 30 ft³ Elec Refrig 0.12V + 3.34 kWh/day Na ≤ 0.140V + 1.050 kWh/day na Glass-door reach-in
  • 345. refrigerator, 30 ≤ V < 50 ft³ Elec Refrig 0.12V + 3.34 kWh/day Na ≤ 0.088V + 2.625 kWh/day na Glass-door reach-in refrigerator, 50 ≤ V ft³ Elec Refrig 0.12V + 3.34 kWh/day Na ≤ 0.110V + 1.500 kWh/day na Solid-door reach-in freezer, 0 < V < 15 ft³ Elec Refrig 0.4V + 1.38 kWh/day Na ≤ 0.250V + 1.25 kWh/day na
  • 346. Solid-door reach-in freezer, 15 ≤ V < 30 ft³ Elec Refrig 0.4V + 1.38 kWh/day Na ≤ 0.400V – 1.000 kWh/day na 152 Updated to reflect the April 14, 2017 LEED v4 Building Design and Construction Addenda Solid-door reach-in freezer, 30 ≤ V < 50 ft³ Elec Refrig 0.4V + 1.38 kWh/day Na ≤ 0.163V + 6.125 kWh/day na Solid-door reach-in freezer, 50 ≤ V ft³ Elec Refrig
  • 347. 0.4V + 1.38 kWh/day Na ≤ 0.158V + 6.333 kWh/day na Solid-door reach-in refrigerator, 0 < V < 15 ft³ Elec Refrig 0.1V + 2.04 kWh/day Na ≤ 0.089V + 1.411 kWh/day na Solid-door reach-in refrigerator, 15 ≤ V < 30 ft³ Elec Refrig 0.1V + 2.04 kWh/day Na ≤ 0.037V + 2.200 kWh/day na Solid-door reach-in
  • 348. refrigerator, 30 ≤ V < 50 ft³ Elec Refrig 0.1V + 2.04 kWh/day Na ≤ 0.056V + 1.635 kWh/day na Solid-door reach-in refrigerator, 50 ≤ V ft³ Elec Refrig 0.1V + 2.04 kWh/day Na ≤ 0.060V + 1.416 kWh/day na Clothes washer Gas Sanitation 1.72 MEF Na 2.00 MEF na Door-type dish machine, high temp Elec Sanitation na 1.0 kW Na 0.70 kW Door-type dish machine, low temp Elec Sanitation na 0.6 kW Na 0.6 kW
  • 349. Multitank rack conveyor dish machine, high temp Elec Sanitation na 2.6 kW Na 2.25 kW Multitank rack conveyor dish machine, low temp Elec Sanitation na 2.0 kW Na 2.0 kW Single-tank rack conveyor dish machine, high temp Elec Sanitation na 2.0 kW Na 1.5 kW 153 Updated to reflect the April 14, 2017 LEED v4 Building Design and Construction Addenda Single-tank rack conveyor dish machine, low temp Elec Sanitation na 1.6 kW Na 1.5 kW Undercount
  • 350. er dish machine, high temp Elec Sanitation na 0.9 kW Na 0.5 kW Undercount er dish machine, low temp Elec Sanitation na 0.5 kW Na 0.5 kW The energy efficiency, idle energy rates, and water use requirements, where applicable, are based on the following test methods: ASTM F1275 Standard Test Method for Performance of Griddles ASTM F1361 Standard Test Method for Performance of Open Deep Fat Fryers ASTM F1484 Standard Test Methods for Performance of Steam Cookers ASTM F1496 Standard Test Method for Performance of Convection Ovens ASTM F1521 Standard Test Methods for Performance of Range Tops ASTM F1605 Standard Test Method for Performance of Double- Sided Griddles ASTM F1639 Standard Test Method for Performance of Combination Ovens ASTM F1695 Standard Test Method for Performance of Underfired Broilers ASTM F1696 Standard Test Method for Energy Performance of Single-Rack Hot Water Sanitizing, ASTM Door-Type Commercial Dishwashing Machines ASTM F1704 Standard Test Method for Capture and Containment Performance of Commercial Kitchen Exhaust Ventilation Systems
  • 351. ASTM F1817 Standard Test Method for Performance of Conveyor Ovens ASTM F1920 Standard Test Method for Energy Performance of Rack Conveyor, Hot Water Sanitizing, Commercial Dishwashing Machines ASTM F2093 Standard Test Method for Performance of Rack Ovens ASTM F2140 Standard Test Method for Performance of Hot Food Holding Cabinets ASTM F2144 Standard Test Method for Performance of Large Open Vat Fryers ASTM F2324 Standard Test Method for Prerinse Spray Valves ASTM F2380 Standard Test Method for Performance of Conveyor Toasters ARI 810-2007: Performance Rating of Automatic Commercial Ice Makers ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 72–2005: Method of Testing Commercial Refrigerators and Freezers with temperature setpoints at 38°F for medium-temp refrigerators, 0°F for low-temp freezers, and -15°F for ice cream freezers Table 1b. Commercial Kitchen Appliance Prescriptive Measures and Baseline for Energy Cost Budget (SI units) Baseline energy usage for energy modeling path Levels for prescriptive path
  • 352. Appliance type Fuel Function Baseline efficiency Baseline idle rate Prescriptive efficiency Prescriptive idle rate Broiler, underfired Gas Cooking 30% 50.5 kW/m2 35% 37.9 kW/m2 154 Updated to reflect the April 14, 2017 LEED v4 Building Design and Construction Addenda Combination oven, steam mode (P = pan capacity) Elec Cooking 40% steam mode 0.37P+4.5 kW 50% steam mode
  • 353. 0.133P+0.6400 kW Combination oven, steam mode Gas Cooking 20% steam mode (1 210P+ 35 810)/3 412 kW 38% steam mode (200P+6 511)/ 3 412 kW Combination oven, convection mode Elec Cooking 65% convection mode 0.1P+1.5 kW 70% convection mode 0.080P+0.4989 kW
  • 354. Combination oven, convection mode Gas Cooking 35% convection mode (322P+ 13 563)/ 3412 kW 44% convection mode (150P+5 425)/ 3412 kW Convection oven, full-size Elec Cooking 65% 2.0 kW 71% 1.6 kW Convection oven, full-size Gas Cooking 30% 5.3 kW 46% 3.5 kW Convection oven, half- size Elec Cooking 65% 1.5 kW 71% 1.0 kW Conveyor oven, > 63.5 cm belt Gas Cooking 20% 20.5 kW 42% 16.7 kW Conveyor oven, < 63.5
  • 355. cm belt Gas Cooking 20% 13.2 kW 42% 8.5 kW Fryer Elec Cooking 75% 1,05 kW 80% 1.0 kW Fryer Gas Cooking 35% 4.1 kW 50% 2.64 kW Griddle (based on 90-cm model) Elec Cooking 60% 4.3 kW/m2 70% 3 .45 kW/m2 Griddle (based on 90-cm model) Gas Cooking 30% 11 kW/m2 33% 8.35 kW/m2 Hot food holding cabinets (excluding drawer warmers and heated display) 0 < V < 0.368 m3 (V = volume) Elec Cooking na 1.4 kW/m3 Na (21.5*V)/0.0283 kW/m3 Hot food holding cabinets (excluding drawer warmers and heated display), Elec Cooking na 1.4 kW/m3 Na
  • 356. (2.0*V + 254)/0.0283 kW/m3 155 Updated to reflect the April 14, 2017 LEED v4 Building Design and Construction Addenda 0.368 ≤ V < 0.793 m3 Hot food holding cabinets (excluding drawer warmers and heated display), 0.793 m3 ≤ V Elec Cooking na 1.4 kW/m3 Na (3.8*V + 203.5)/0.0283 kW/m3 Large vat fryer Elec Cooking 75% 1.35 kW 80% 1.1 kW Large vat fryer Gas Cooking 35% 5.86 kW 50% 3.5 kW Rack oven,
  • 357. double Gas Cooking 30% 19 kW 50% 10.25 kW Rack oven, single Gas Cooking 30% 12.6 kW 50% 8.5 kW Range Elec Cooking 70% na 80% na Range Gas Cooking 35% na 40% and no standing pilots na Steam cooker, batch cooking Elec Cooking 26% 200 W/pan 50% 135 W/pan Steam cooker, batch cooking Gas Cooking 15% 733 W/pan 38% 615 W/pan Steam cooker, high production or cook to order Elec Cooking 26% 330 W/pan 50% 275 W/pan Steam cooker, high production or cook to order Gas Cooking 15% 1.47 kW/pan 38% 1.26 kW/pan Toaster Elec Cooking na 1.8 kW average operating energy rate Na
  • 358. 1.2 kW average operating energy rate Ice machine, IMH (ice making head, H = ice harvest) H ≥ 204 kg/day Elec Ice 0.0015 - 5.3464E-07 kWh/kg ice na ≤ 13.52*H- 0.298 kWh/100 kg ice na Ice machine, IMH (ice making head), H < 204 kg/day Elec Ice 0.2262 - 4.18E-04 kWh/kg ice na ≤ 13.52*H- 0.298 kWh/100 kg ice na
  • 359. Ice machine, RCU (remote condensing Elec Ice 0.1951 - 1.85E-04 kWh/kg ice na ≤ 111.5835H- 0.258) + 2.205 kWh/100 kg ice na 156 Updated to reflect the April 14, 2017 LEED v4 Building Design and Construction Addenda unit, w/o remote compressor) H < 454 kg/day Ice machine, RCU (remote condensing unit) 726 > H ≥ 454 kg/day Elec Ice 0.1124 kWh/kg ice na
  • 360. ≤ 111.5835H- 0.258) + 2.205 kWh/100 kg ice na Ice machine, RCU (remote condensing unit), H > 726kg/day Elec Ice 0.1124 kWh/kg ice na ≤ -0.00024H + 4.60 kWh/100 kg ice na Ice machine, SCU (self contained unit), H < 79 kg/day Elec Ice 0.3968 - 2.28E-03 kWh/kg ice na 236.59H-0.326 +0.176 kWh/100 kg ice na
  • 361. Ice machine, SCU (self contained unit), H ≥ 79 kg/day Elec Ice 0.2161 kWh/kg ice na 236.59H-0.326 +0.176 kWh/100 kg ice na Ice machine, water-cooled ice-making head, H ≥ 651 kg/day(must be on a chilled loop) Elec Ice 0.0882 kWh/kg ice na ≤ 8.11 kWh/100 kg ice na Ice machine, water-cooled
  • 362. ice-making head, 227 ≤ H < 651 kg/day (must be on a chilled loop) Elec Ice 0.1230 - 5.35E-05 kWh/kg ice na ≤ 11.31 - 0.065H kWh/100 kg ice na Ice machine, water-cooled ice-making head, H < 227 kg/day( must be on a chilled loop) Elec Ice 0.1720 - 2.67E-04 kWh/kg ice na ≤ 15.48 - 0.0238H kWh/100 kg ice na Ice machine, water-cooled once-through
  • 363. (open loop) Elec Ice Banned Banned Banned Banned Ice machine, water cooled SCU (self- Elec Ice 0.2513 - 9.23E-04 kWh/kg ice na ≤ 23.37- 0.086H na 157 Updated to reflect the April 14, 2017 LEED v4 Building Design and Construction Addenda contained unit) H < 91 kg/day (must be on a chilled loop) kWh/100 kg ice Ice machine, water cooled SCU (self- contained unit) H > 91 kg/day (must be on a
  • 364. chilled loop) Elec Ice 0.1676 kWh/kg ice na 15.57 kWh/100 kg ice na Chest freezer, solid or glass door Elec Refrig 15.90V + 0.943 kWh/day na 9.541V + 0.130 kWh/day na Chest refrigerator, solid or glass door Elec Refrig 3.53V + 2.04 kWh/day na ≤ 4.417 V + 0.475 kWh/day na Glass-door reach-in
  • 365. freezer, 0 < V < 0.42 m3 Elec Refrig 26.50V + 4.1 kWh/day na ≤ 21.449V + 0.893 kWh/day na Glass-door reach-in freezer, 0.42 ≤ V < 0.85 m3 Elec Refrig 26.50V + 4.1 kWh/day na ≤ 25.901V – 1.00 kWh/day na Glass-door reach-in freezer, 0.85 ≤ V < 1.42 m3 Elec Refrig 26.50V + 4.1 kWh/day na ≤ 8.834V + 13.50 kWh/day na
  • 366. Glass-door reach-in freezer, 1.42 ≤ V m3 Elec Refrig 26.50V + 4.1 kWh/day na ≤ 15.90V + 3.50 kWh/day na Glass-door reach-in refrigerator, 0 < V < 0.42m3 Elec Refrig 4.24V + 3.34 kWh/day na ≤ 4.169V + 1.382 kWh/day na Glass-door reach-in refrigerator, 0.42 ≤ V < 0.85 m3 Elec Refrig 4.24V + 3.34 kWh/day na
  • 367. ≤ 4.947V + 1.050 kWh/day na Glass-door reach-in refrigerator, 0.85 ≤ V < 1.42 m3 Elec Refrig 4.24V + 3.34 kWh/day na ≤ 3.109V + 2.625 kWh/day na Glass-door reach-in refrigerator, 1.42 ≤ V m3 Elec Refrig 4.24V + 3.34 kWh/day na ≤ 3.887V + 1.500 kWh/day na 158
  • 368. Updated to reflect the April 14, 2017 LEED v4 Building Design and Construction Addenda Solid-door reach-in freezer, 0 < V < 0.42 m3 Elec Refrig 14.13V + 1.38 kWh/day na ≤ 8.834V + 1.25 kWh/day na Solid-door reach-in freezer, 0.42 ≤ V < 0.85 m3 Elec Refrig 14.13V + 1.38 kWh/day na ≤ 4.819V – 1.000 kWh/day na Solid-door reach-in freezer, 0.85 ≤ V < 1.42 m3 Elec Refrig 14.13V + 1.38
  • 369. kWh/day na ≤ 5.760V + 6.125 kWh/day na Solid-door reach-in freezer, 1.42 ≤ V m3 Elec Refrig 14.13V + 1.38 kWh/day na ≤ 5.583V + 6.333 kWh/day na Solid-door reach-in refrigerator, 0 < V < 0.42m3 Elec Refrig 3.53V + 2.04 kWh/day na ≤ 3.145V + 1.411 kWh/day na Solid-door reach-in refrigerator, 0.42 ≤ V <
  • 370. 0.85 m3 Elec Refrig 3.53V + 2.04 kWh/day na ≤ 1.307V + 2.200 kWh/day na Solid-door reach-in refrigerator, 0.85 ≤ V < 1.42 m3 Elec Refrig 3.53V + 2.04 kWh/day na ≤ 1.979V + 1.635 kWh/day na Solid-door reach-in refrigerator, 1.42 ≤ V m3 Elec Refrig 3.53V + 2.04 kWh/day na ≤ 2.120V + 1.416 kWh/day na
  • 371. Clothes washer Gas Sanitatio n 1.72 MEF 2.00 MEF Door-type dish machine, high temp Elec Sanitatio n na 1.0 kW Na 0.70 kW Door-type dish machine, low temp Elec Sanitatio n na 0.6 kW Na 0.6 kW Multitank rack conveyor dish machine, high temp Elec Sanitatio n na 2.6 kW Na 2.25 kW Multitank rack conveyor
  • 372. dish Elec Sanitatio n na 2.0 kW Na 2.0 kW 159 Updated to reflect the April 14, 2017 LEED v4 Building Design and Construction Addenda machine, low temp Single-tank rack conveyor dish machine, high temp Elec Sanitatio n na 2.0 kW Na 1.5 kW Single-tank rack conveyor dish machine, low temp Elec Sanitatio n na 1.6 kW Na 1.5 kW Undercounter
  • 373. dish machine, high temp Elec Sanitatio n na 0.9 kW Na 0.5 kW Undercounter dish machine, low temp Elec Sanitatio n na 0.5 kW Na 0.5 kW The energy efficiency, idle energy rates, and water use requirements, where applicable, are based on the following test methods: ASTM F1275 Standard Test Method for Performance of Griddles ASTM F1361 Standard Test Method for Performance of Open Deep Fat Fryers ASTM F1484 Standard Test Methods for Performance of Steam Cookers ASTM F1496 Standard Test Method for Performance of Convection Ovens ASTM F1521 Standard Test Methods for Performance of Range Tops ASTM F1605 Standard Test Method for Performance of Double- Sided Griddles ASTM F1639 Standard Test Method for Performance of Combination Ovens ASTM F1695 Standard Test Method for Performance of Underfired Broilers ASTM F1696 Standard Test Method for Energy Performance of Single-Rack Hot Water Sanitizing,
  • 374. ASTM Door-Type Commercial Dishwashing Machines ASTM F1704 Standard Test Method for Capture and Containment Performance of Commercial Kitchen Exhaust Ventilation Systems ASTM F1817 Standard Test Method for Performance of Conveyor Ovens ASTM F1920 Standard Test Method for Energy Performance of Rack Conveyor, Hot Water Sanitizing, Commercial Dishwashing Machines ASTM F2093 Standard Test Method for Performance of Rack Ovens ASTM F2140 Standard Test Method for Performance of Hot Food Holding Cabinets ASTM F2144 Standard Test Method for Performance of Large Open Vat Fryers ASTM F2324 Standard Test Method for Prerinse Spray Valves ASTM F2380 Standard Test Method for Performance of Conveyor Toasters ARI 810-2007: Performance Rating of Automatic Commercial Ice Makers ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 72–2005: Method of Testing Commercial Refrigerators and Freezers with temperature setpoints at 38°F (3°C) for mediumtemp refrigerators, -18°C for low-temp freezers, and -26°C for ice cream freezers. 160
  • 375. Updated to reflect the April 14, 2017 LEED v4 Building Design and Construction Addenda Table 2. Supermarket refrigeration prescriptive measures and baseline for energy cost budget Item Attribute Prescriptive measure Baseline for energy modeling path Commercial Refrigerator and Freezers Energy Use Limits ASHRAE 90.1-2010 Addendum g. Table 6.8.1L ASHRAE 90.1-2010 Addendum g. Table 6.8.1L Commercial Refrigeration Equipment Energy Use Limits ASHRAE 90.1-2010 Addendum g. Table 6.8.1M ASHRAE 90.1-2010 Addendum g. Table 6.8.1M
  • 376. Table 3. Walk-in coolers and freezers prescriptive measures and baseline for energy cost budget Item Attribute Prescriptive measure Baseline for energy modeling path Envelope Freezer insulation R-46 R-36 Cooler insulation R-36 R-20 Automatic closer doors Yes No High-efficiency low- or no- heat reach-in doors 40W/ft (130W/m) of door frame (low temperature), 17W/ft (55W/m) of door frame (medium temperature) 40W/ft (130W/m) of door frame (low temperature), 17W/ft (55W/m) of door frame (medium temperature) Evaporator Evaporator fan motor and control
  • 377. Shaded pole and split phase motors prohibited; use PSC or EMC motors Constant-speed fan Hot gas defrost No electric defrosting. Electric defrosting Condenser Air-cooled condenser fan motor and control Shaded pole and split phase motors prohibited; use PSC or EMC motors; add condenser fan controllers Cycling one-speed fan Air Cooled condenser design approach Floating head pressure controls or ambient subcooling 10°F (-12°C) to 15°F (-9°C) dependent on suction temperature Lighting Lighting power density (W/sq.ft.) 0.6 W/sq.ft. (6.5 W/sq. meter)
  • 378. 0.6 W/sq.ft. (6.5 W/sq. meter) Commercial Refrigerator and Freezers Energy Use Limits N/A Use an Exceptional Calculation Method if attempting to take savings Commercial Refrigerator and Freezers Energy Use Limits N/A Use an Exceptional Calculation Method if attempting to take savings Table 4. Commercial kitchen ventilation prescriptive measures and baseline for energy cost budget Strategies Prescriptive measure Baseline Kitchen hood control ASHRAE 90.1-2010 Section 6.5.7.1, except that Section 6.5.7.1.3 and Section 6.5.7.1.4 ASHRAE 90.1-2010 Section 6.5.7.1 and Section G3.1.1
  • 379. Exception (d) where applicable 161 Updated to reflect the April 14, 2017 LEED v4 Building Design and Construction Addenda shall apply if the total kitchen exhaust airflow rate exceeds 2,000 cfm (960 L/s) (as opposed to 5,000 cfm (2,400 L/s) noted in the ASHRAE 90.1-2010 requirements)